The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Ancient Allan
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this ebook or online
at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States,
you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.
Title: The Ancient Allan
Author: H. Rider Haggard
Release date: May 1, 2004 [eBook #5746]
Most recently updated: March 12, 2021
Language: English
Credits: John Bickers, Dagny and David Widger
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ANCIENT ALLAN ***
![[Illustration]](https://img.gamelinxhub.com/images/cover.jpg)
The Ancient Allan
by H. Rider Haggard
First Published 1920.
Contents
CHAPTER I. AN OLD FRIEND |
CHAPTER II. RAGNALL CASTLE |
CHAPTER III. ALLAN GIVES HIS WORD |
CHAPTER IV. THROUGH THE GATES |
CHAPTER V. THE WAGER |
CHAPTER VI. THE DOOM OF THE BOAT |
CHAPTER VII. BES STEALS THE SIGNET |
CHAPTER VIII. THE LADY AMADA |
CHAPTER IX. THE MESSENGERS |
CHAPTER X. SHABAKA PLIGHTS HIS TROTH |
CHAPTER XI. THE HOLY TANOFIR |
CHAPTER XII. THE SLAYING OF IDERNES |
CHAPTER XIII. AMADA RETURNS TO ISIS |
CHAPTER XIV. SHABAKA FIGHTS THE CROCODILE |
CHAPTER XV. THE SUMMONS |
CHAPTER XVI. TANOFIR FINDS HIS BROKEN CUP |
CHAPTER XVII. THE BATTLE—AND AFTER |
CHAPTER I.
AN OLD FRIEND
Now I, Allan Quatermain, come to the weirdest (with one or two exceptions
perhaps) of all the experiences which it has amused me to employ my idle hours
in recording here in a strange land, for after all England is strange to me. I
grow elderly. I have, as I suppose, passed the period of enterprise and
adventure and I should be well satisfied with the lot that Fate has given to my
unworthy self.
To begin with, I am still alive and in health when by all the rules I should
have been dead many times over. I suppose I ought to be thankful for that but,
before expressing an opinion on the point, I should have to be quite sure
whether it is better to be alive or dead. The religious plump for the latter,
though I have never observed that the religious are more eager to die than the
rest of us poor mortals.
For instance, if they are told that their holy hearts are wrong, they spend
time and much money in rushing to a place called Nauheim in Germany, to put
them right by means of water-drinking, thereby shortening their hours of
heavenly bliss and depriving their heirs of a certain amount of cash. The same
thing applies to Buxton in my own neighbourhood and gout, especially when it
threatens the stomach or the throat. Even archbishops will do these things, to
say nothing of such small fry as deans, or stout and prominent lay figures of
the Church.
From common sinners like myself such conduct might be expected, but in the case
of those who are obviously poised on the topmost rungs of the Jacobean—I
mean, the heavenly—ladder, it is legitimate to inquire why they show such
reluctance in jumping off. As a matter of fact the only persons that,
individually, I have seen quite willing to die, except now and again to save
somebody else whom they were so foolish as to care for more than they did for
themselves, have been not those “upon whom the light has shined” to
quote an earnest paper I chanced to read this morning, but, to quote again,
“the sinful heathen wandering in their native blackness,” by which
I understand the writer to refer to their moral state and not to their sable
skins wherein for the most part they are also condemned to wander, that is if
they happen to have been born south of a certain degree of latitude.
To come to facts, the staff of Faith which each must shape for himself, is
often hewn from unsuitable kinds of wood, yes, even by the very best among us.
Willow, for instance, is pretty and easy to cut, but try to support yourself
with it on the edge of a precipice and see where you are. Then of a truth you
will long for ironbark, or even homely oak. I might carry my parable further,
some allusions to the proper material of which to fashion the helmet of
Salvation suggest themselves to me for example, but I won’t.
The truth is that we fear to die because all the religions are full of
uncomfortable hints as to what may happen to us afterwards as a reward for our
deviations from their laws and we half believe in something, whereas often the
savage, not being troubled with religion, fears less, because he half believes
in nothing. For very few inhabitants of this earth can attain either to
complete belief or to its absolute opposite. They can seldom lay their hands
upon their hearts, and say they know that they will live for ever, or
sleep for ever; there remains in the case of most honest men an element of
doubt in either hypothesis.
That is what makes this story of mine so interesting, at any rate to me, since
it does seem to suggest that whether or no I have a future, as personally I
hold to be the case and not altogether without evidence, certainly I have had a
past, though, so far as I know, in this world only; a fact, if it be a fact,
from which can be deduced all kinds of arguments according to the taste of the
reasoner.
And now for my experience, which it is only fair to add, may after all have
been no more than a long and connected dream. Yet how was I to dream of lands,
events and people whereof I have only the vaguest knowledge, or none at all,
unless indeed, as some say, being a part of this world, we have hidden away
somewhere in ourselves an acquaintance with everything that has ever happened
in the world. However, it does not much matter and it is useless to discuss
that which we cannot prove.
Here at any rate is the story.
In a book or a record which I have written down and put away with others under
the title of “The Ivory Child,” I have told the tale of a certain
expedition I made in company with Lord Ragnall. Its object was to search for
his wife who was stolen away while travelling in Egypt in a state of mental
incapacity resulting from shock caused by the loss of her child under tragic
and terrible circumstances. The thieves were the priests of a certain bastard
Arab tribe who, on account of a birthmark shaped like the young moon which was
visible above her breast, believed her to be the priestess or oracle of their
worship. This worship evidently had its origin in Ancient Egypt since, although
they did not seem to know it, the priestess was nothing less than a
personification of the great goddess Isis, and the Ivory Child, their fetish,
was a statue of the infant Horus, the fabled son of Isis and Osiris whom the
Egyptians looked upon as the overcomer of Set or the Devil, the murderer of
Osiris before his resurrection and ascent to Heaven to be the god of the dead.
I need not set down afresh all that happened to us on this remarkable
adventure. Suffice it to say that in the end we recovered the lady and that her
mind was restored to her. Before she left the Kendah country, however, the
priesthood presented her with two ancient rolls of papyrus, also with a
quantity of a certain herb, not unlike tobacco in appearance, which by the
Kendah was called Taduki. Once, before we took our great homeward
journey across the desert, Lady Ragnall and I had a curious conversation about
this herb whereof the property is to cause the person who inhales its fumes to
become clairvoyant, or to dream dreams, whichever the truth may be. It was used
for this purpose in the mystical ceremonies of the Kendah religion when under
its influence the priestess or oracle of the Ivory Child was wont to announce
divine revelations. During her tenure of this office Lady Ragnall was
frequently subjected to the spell of the Taduki vapour, and said strange
things, some of which I heard with my own ears. Also myself once I experienced
its effects and saw a curious vision, whereof many of the particulars were
afterwards translated into facts.
Now the conversation which I have mentioned was shortly to the effect, that
she, Lady Ragnall, believed a time would come when she or I or both of us, were
destined to imbibe these Taduki fumes and see wonderful pictures of some
past or future existence in which we were both concerned. This knowledge, she
declared, had come to her while she was officiating in an apparently mindless
condition as the priestess of the Kendah god called the Ivory Child.
At the time I did not think it wise to pursue so exciting a subject with a
woman whose mind had been recently unbalanced, and afterwards in the stress of
new experiences, I forgot all about the matter, or at any rate only thought of
it very rarely.
Once, however, it did recur to me with some force. Shortly after I came to
England to spend my remaining days far from the temptations of adventure, I was
beguiled into becoming a steward of a Charity dinner and, what was worse, into
attending the said dinner. Although its objects were admirable, it proved one
of the most dreadful functions in which I was ever called upon to share. There
was a vast number of people, some of them highly distinguished, who had come to
support the Charity or to show off their Orders, I don’t know which, and
others like myself, not at all distinguished, just common subscribers, who had
no Orders and stood about the crowded room like waiters looking for a job.
At the dinner, which was very bad, I sat at a table so remote that I could hear
but little of the interminable speeches, which was perhaps fortunate for me. In
these circumstances I drifted into conversation with my neighbour, a queer,
wizened, black-bearded man who somehow or other had found out that I was
acquainted with the wilder parts of Africa. He proved to be a wealthy scientist
whose passion it was to study the properties of herbs, especially of such as
grow in the interior of South America where he had been travelling for some
years.
Presently he mentioned a root named Yagé, known to the Indians which, when
pounded up into a paste and taken in the form of pills, had the effect of
enabling the patient to see events that were passing at a distance. Indeed he
alleged that a vision thus produced had caused him to return home, since in it
he saw that some relative of his, I think a twin-sister, was dangerously ill.
In fact, however, he might as well have stayed away, as he only arrived in
London on the day after her funeral.
As I saw that he was really interested in the subject and observed that he was
a very temperate man who did not seem to be romancing, I told him something of
my experiences with Taduki, to which he listened with a kind of rapt but
suppressed excitement. When I affected disbelief in the whole business, he
differed from me almost rudely, asking why I rejected phenomena simply because
I was too dense to understand them. I answered perhaps because such phenomena
were inconvenient and upset one’s ideas. To this he replied that all
progress involved the upsetting of existent ideas. Moreover he implored me, if
the chance should ever come my way, to pursue experiments with Taduki
fumes and let him know the results.
Here our conversation came to an end for suddenly a band that was braying near
by, struck up “God save the Queen,” and we hastily exchanged cards
and parted. I only mention it because, had it not occurred, I think it probable
that I should never have been in a position to write this history.
The remarks of my acquaintance remained in my mind and influenced it so much
that when the occasion came, I did as a kind of duty what, however much I was
pressed, I am almost sure I should never have done for any other reason, just
because I thought that I ought to take an opportunity of trying to discover
what was the truth of the matter. As it chanced it was quick in coming.
Here I should explain that I attended the dinner of which I have spoken not
very long after a very lengthy absence from England, whither I had come to live
when King Solomon’s Mines had made me rich. Therefore it happened that
between the conclusion of my Kendah adventure some years before and this time I
saw nothing and heard little of Lord and Lady Ragnall. Once a rumour did reach
me, however, I think through Sir Henry Curtis or Captain Good, that the former
had died as a result of an accident. What the accident was my informant did not
know and as I was just starting on a far journey at the time, I had no
opportunity of making inquiries. My talk with the botanical scientist
determined me to do so; indeed a few days later I discovered from a book of
reference that Lord Ragnall was dead, leaving no heir; also that his wife
survived him.
I was working myself up to write to her when one morning the postman brought me
here at the Grange a letter which had “Ragnall Castle” printed on
the flap of the envelope. I did not know the writing which was very clear and
firm, for as it chanced, to the best of my recollection, I had never seen that
of Lady Ragnall. Here is a copy of the letter it contained:
“MY DEAR MR.
QUATERMAIN,—Very strangely I have just seen at a meeting
of the Horticultural Society, a gentleman who declares that a few days ago he
sat next to you at some public dinner. Indeed I do not think there can be any
doubt for he showed me your card which he had in his purse with a Yorkshire
address upon it.
“A dispute had arisen as to whether a certain variety of Crinum lily was
first found in Africa, or Southern America. This gentleman, an authority upon
South American flora, made a speech saying that he had never met with it there,
but that an acquaintance of his, Mr. Quatermain, to whom he had spoken on the
subject, said that he had seen something of the sort in the interior of
Africa.” (This was quite true for I remembered the incident.) “At
the tea which followed the meeting I spoke to this gentleman whose name I never
caught, and to my astonishment learnt that he must have been referring to you
whom I believed to be dead, for so we were told a long time ago. This seemed
certain, for in addition to the evidence of the name, he described your
personal appearance and told me that you had come to live in England.
“My dear friend, I can assure you it is long since I heard anything which
rejoiced me so much. Oh! as I write all the past comes back, flowing in upon me
like a pent-up flood of water, but I trust that of this I shall soon have an
opportunity of talking to you. So let it be for a while.
“Alas! my friend, since we parted on the shores of the Red Sea, tragedy
has pursued me. As you will know, for both my husband and I wrote to you,
although you did not answer the letters” (I never received them),
“we reached England safely and took up our old life again, though to tell
you the truth, after my African experiences things could never be quite the
same to me, or for the matter of that to George either. To a great extent he
changed his pursuits and certain political ambitions which he once cherished,
seemed no longer to appeal to him. He became a student of past history and
especially of Egyptology, which under all the circumstances you may think
strange, as I did. However it suited me well enough, since I also have tastes
that way. So we worked together and I can now read hieroglyphics as well as
most people. One year he said that he would like to go to Egypt again, if I
were not afraid. I answered that it had not been a very lucky place for us, but
that personally I was not in the least afraid and longed to return there. For
as you know, I have, or think I have, ties with Egypt and indeed with all
Africa. Well, we went and had a very happy time, although I was always
expecting to see old Harût come round the corner.
“After this it became a custom with us who, since George practically gave
up shooting and attending the House of Lords, had nothing to keep us in
England, to winter in Egypt. We did this for five years in succession, living
in a bungalow which we built at a place in the desert, not far from the banks
of the Nile, about half way between Luxor which was the ancient Thebes, and
Assouan. George took a great fancy to this spot when first he saw it, and so in
truth did I, for, like Memphis, it attracted me so much that I used to laugh
and say I believed that once I had something to do with it.
“Now near to our villa that we called ‘Ragnall’ after this
house, are the remains of a temple which were almost buried in the sand. This
temple George obtained permission to excavate. It proved to be a long and
costly business, but as he did not mind spending the money, that was no
obstacle. For four winters we worked at it, employing several hundred men. As
we went on we discovered that although not one of the largest, the temple,
owing to its having been buried by the sand during, or shortly after the Roman
epoch, remained much more perfect than we had expected, because the early
Christians had never got at it with their chisels and hammers. Before long I
hope to show you pictures and photographs of the various courts, etc., so I
will not attempt to describe them now.
“It is a temple to Isis—built, or rather rebuilt over the remains
of an older temple on a site that seems to have been called Amada, at any rate
in the later days, and so named after a city in Nubia, apparently by one of the
Amen-hetep Pharaohs who had conquered it. Its style is beautiful, being of the
best period of the Egyptian Renaissance under the last native dynasties.
“At the beginning of the fifth winter, at length we approached the
sanctuary, a difficult business because of the retaining walls that had to be
built to keep the sand from flowing down as fast as it was removed, and the
great quantities of stuff that must be carried off by the tramway. In so doing
we came upon a shallow grave which appeared to have been hastily filled in and
roughly covered over with paving stones like the rest of the court, as though
to conceal its existence. In this grave lay the skeleton of a large man,
together with the rusted blade of an iron sword and some fragments of armour.
Evidently he had never been mummified, for there were no wrappings, canopic
jars, ushapti figures or funeral offerings. The state of the bones
showed us why, for the right forearm was cut through and the skull smashed in;
also an iron arrow-head lay among the ribs. The man had been buried hurriedly
after a battle in which he had met his death. Searching in the dust beneath the
bones we found a gold ring still on one of the fingers. On its bezel was
engraved the cartouche of ‘Peroa, beloved of Ra.’ Now Peroa
probably means Pharaoh and perhaps he was Khabasha who revolted against the
Persians and ruled for a year or two, after which he is supposed to have been
defeated and killed, though of his end and place of burial there is no record.
Whether these were the remnants of Khabasha himself, or of one of his high
ministers or generals who wore the King’s cartouche upon his ring in
token of his office, of course I cannot say.
“When George had read the cartouche he handed me the ring which I slipped
upon the first finger of my left hand, where I still wear it. Then leaving the
grave open for further examination, we went on with the work, for we were
greatly excited. At length, this was towards evening, we had cleared enough of
the sanctuary, which was small, to uncover the shrine that, if not a monolith,
was made of four pieces of granite so wonderfully put together that one could
not see the joints. On the curved architrave as I think it is called, was
carved the symbol of a winged disc, and beneath in hieroglyphics as fresh as
though they had only been cut yesterday, an inscription to the effect that
Peroa, Royal Son of the Sun, gave this shrine as an ‘excellent eternal
work,’ together with the statues of the Holy Mother and the Holy Child to
the ‘emanations of the great Goddess Isis and the god Horus,’
Amada, Royal Lady, being votaress or high-priestess.
“We only read the hieroglyphics very hurriedly, being anxious to see what
was within the shrine that, the cedar door having rotted away, was filled with
fine, drifted sand. Basketful by basketful we got it out and then, my friend,
there appeared the most beautiful life-sized statue of Isis carved in alabaster
that ever I have seen. She was seated on a throne-like chair and wore the
vulture cap on which traces of colour remained. Her arms were held forward as
though to support a child, which perhaps she was suckling as one of the breasts
was bare. But if so, the child had gone. The execution of the statue was
exquisite and its tender and mystic face extraordinarily beautiful, so
life-like also that I think it must have been copied from a living model. Oh!
my friend, when I looked upon it, which we did by the light of the candles, for
the sun was sinking and shadows gathered in that excavated hole, I
felt—never mind what I felt—perhaps you can guess who know
my history.
“While we stared and stared, I longing to go upon my knees, I knew not
why, suddenly I felt a faint trembling of the ground. At the same moment, the
head overseer of the works, a man called Achmet, rushed up to us, shouting
out—‘Back! Back! The wall has burst. The sand runs!’
“He seized me by the arm and dragged me away beside of and behind the
grave, George turning to follow. Next instant I saw a kind of wave of sand, on
the crest of which appeared the stones of the wall, curl over and break. It
struck the shrine, overturned and shattered it, which makes me think it was
made of four pieces, and shattered also the alabaster statue within, for I saw
its head strike George upon the back and throw him forward. He reeled and fell
into the open grave which in another moment was filled and covered with the
débris that seemed to grip me to my middle in its flow. After this I remembered
nothing more until hours later I found myself lying in our house.
“Achmet and his Egyptians had done nothing; indeed none of them could be
persuaded to approach the place till the sun rose because, as they said, the
old gods of the land whom they looked upon as devils, were angry at being
disturbed and would kill them as they had killed the Bey, meaning George. Then,
distracted as I was, I went myself for there was no other European there, to
find that the whole site of the sanctuary was buried beneath hundreds of tons
of sand, that, beginning at the gap in the broken wall, had flowed from every
side. Indeed it would have taken weeks to dig it out, since to sink a shaft was
impracticable and so dangerous that the local officials refused to allow it to
be attempted. The end of it was that an English bishop came up from Cairo and
consecrated the ground by special arrangement with the Government, which of
course makes it impossible that this part of the temple should be further
disturbed. After this he read the Burial Service over my dear husband.
“So there is the end of a very terrible story which I have written down
because I do not wish to have to talk about it more than is necessary when we
meet. For, dear Mr. Quatermain, we shall meet, as I always knew that we
should—yes, even after I heard that you were dead. You will remember that
I told you so years ago in Kendah Land and that it would happen after a great
change in my life, though what that change might be I could not say....”
This is the end of the letter except for certain suggested dates for the visit
which she took for granted I should make to Ragnall.
CHAPTER II.
RAGNALL CASTLE
When I had finished reading this amazing document I lit my pipe and set to work
to think it over. The hypothetical inquirer might ask why I thought it amazing.
There was nothing odd in a dilettante Englishman of highly cultivated mind
taking to Egyptology and, being, as it chanced, one of the richest men in the
kingdom, spending a fraction of his wealth in excavating temples. Nor was it
strange that he should have happened to die by accident when engaged in that
pursuit, which I can imagine to be very fascinating in the delightful winter
climate of Egypt. He was not the first person to be buried by a fall of sand.
Why, only a little while ago the same fate overtook a nursery-governess and the
child in her charge who were trying to dig out a martin’s nest in a pit
in this very parish. Their operations brought down a huge mass of the
overhanging bank beneath which the sand-vein had been hollowed by workmen who
deserted the pit when they saw that it had become unsafe. Next day I and my
gardeners helped to recover their bodies, for their whereabouts was not
discovered until the following morning, and a sad business it was.
Yet, taken in conjunction with the history of this couple, the whole Ragnall
affair was very strange. When but a child Lady Ragnall, then the Hon. Miss
Holmes, had been identified by the priests of a remote African tribe as the
oracle of their peculiar faith, which we afterwards proved to be derived from
old Egypt, in short the worship of Isis and Horus. Subsequently they tried to
steal her away and through the accident of my intervention, failed. Later on,
after her marriage when shock had deprived her of her mind, these priests
renewed the attempt, this time in Egypt, and succeeded. In the end we rescued
her in Central Africa, where she was playing the part of the Mother-goddess
Isis and even wearing her ancient robes. Next she and her husband came home
with their minds turned towards a branch of study that took them back to Egypt.
Here they devote themselves to unearthing a temple and find out that among all
the gods of Egypt, who seem to have been extremely numerous, it was dedicated
to Isis and Horus, the very divinities with whom they recently they had been so
intimately concerned if in traditional and degenerate forms.
Moreover that was not the finish of it. They come to the sanctuary. They
discover the statue of the goddess with the child gone, as their child was
gone. A disaster occurs and both destroys and buries Ragnall so effectually
that nothing of him is ever seen again: he just vanishes into another
man’s grave and remains there.
A common sort of catastrophe enough, it is true, though people of superstitious
mind might have thought that it looked as though the goddess, or whatever force
was behind the goddess, was working vengeance on the man who desecrated her
ancient shrine. And, by the way, though I cannot remember whether or no I
mentioned it in “The Ivory Child,” I recall that the old priest of
the Kendah, Harût, once told me he was sure Ragnall would meet with a violent
death. This seemed likely enough in that country under our circumstances there,
still I asked him why. He answered,
“Because he has laid hands on that which is holy and not meant for
man,” and he looked at Lady Ragnall.
I remarked that all women were holy, whereon he replied that he did not think
so and changed the subject.
Well, Ragnall, who had married the lady who once served as the last priestess
of Isis upon earth, was killed, whereas she, the priestess, was almost
miraculously preserved from harm. And—oh! the whole story was deuced odd
and that is all. Poor Ragnall! He was a great English gentleman and one whom
when first I knew him, I held to be the most fortunate person I ever met,
endowed as he was with every advantage of mind, body and estate. Yet in the end
this did not prove to be the case. Well, while he lived he was a good friend
and a good fellow and none can hope for a better epitaph in a world where all
things are soon forgotten.
And now, what was I to do? To tell the truth I did not altogether desire to
reopen this chapter in past history, or to have to listen to painful
reminiscences from the lips of a bereaved woman. Moreover, beautiful as she had
been, for doubtless she was passée now, and charming as of course she
remained—I do not think I ever knew anyone who was quite so
charming—there was something about Lady Ragnall which alarmed me. She did
not resemble any other woman. Of course no woman is ever quite like another,
but in her case the separateness, if I may so call it, was very marked. It was
as though she had walked out of a different age, or even world, and been but
superficially clothed with the attributes of our own. I felt that from the
first moment I set eyes upon her and while reading her letter the sensation
returned with added force.
Also for me she had a peculiar attraction and not one of the ordinary kind. It
is curious to find oneself strangely intimate with a person of whom after all
one does not know much, just as if one really knew a great deal that was shut
off by a thin but quite impassable door. If so, I did not want to open that
door for who could tell what might be on the other side of it? And intimate
conversations with a lady in whose company one has shared very strange
experiences, not infrequently lead to the opening of every kind of door.
Further I had made up my mind some time ago to have no more friendships with
women who are so full of surprises, but to live out the rest of my life in a
kind of monastery of men who have few surprises, being creatures whose thoughts
are nearly always open and whose actions can always be foretold.
Lastly there was that Taduki business. Well, there at any rate I was
clear and decided. No earthly power would induce me to have anything more to do
with Taduki smoke. Of course I remembered that Lady Ragnall once told me
kindly but firmly that I would if she wished. But that was just where she made
a mistake. For the rest it seemed unkind to refuse her invitation now when she
was in trouble, especially as I had once promised that if ever I could be of
help, she had only to command me. No, I must go. But if that
word—Taduki—were so much as mentioned I would leave again in
a hurry. Moreover it would not be, for doubtless she had forgotten all about
the stuff by now, even if it were not lost.
The end of it was that as I did not wish to write a long letter entering into
all that Lady Ragnall had told me, I sent her a telegram, saying that if
convenient to her, I would arrive at the Castle on the following Saturday
evening and adding that I must be back here on the Tuesday afternoon, as I had
guests coming to stay with me on that day. This was perfectly true as the
season was mid-November and I was to begin shooting my coverts on the Wednesday
morning, a function that once fixed, cannot be postponed.
In due course an answer arrived—“Delighted, but hoped that you
would have been able to stay longer.”
Behold me then about six o’clock on the said Saturday evening being once
more whirled by a splendid pair of horses through the gateway arch of Ragnall
Castle. The carriage stopped beneath the portico, the great doors flew open
revealing the glow of the hall fire and lights within, the footman sprang down
from the box and two other footmen descended the steps to assist me and my
belongings out of the carriage. These, I remember, consisted of a handbag with
my dress clothes and a yellow-backed novel.
So one of them took the handbag and the other had to content himself with the
novel, which made me wish I had brought a portmanteau as well, if only for the
look of the thing. The pair thus burdened, escorted me up the steps and
delivered me over to the butler who scanned me with a critical eye. I scanned
him also and perceived that he was a very fine specimen of his class. Indeed
his stately presence so overcame me that I remarked nervously, as he helped me
off with my coat, that when last I was here another had filled his office.
“Indeed, Sir,” he said, “and what was his name, Sir?”
“Savage,” I replied.
“And where might he be now, Sir?”
“Inside a snake!” I answered. “At least he was inside a snake
but now I hope he is waiting upon his master in Heaven.”
The man recoiled a little, pulling off my coat with a jerk. Then he coughed,
rubbed his bald head, stared and recovering himself with an effort, said,
“Indeed, Sir! I only came to this place after the death of his late
lordship, when her ladyship changed all the household. Alfred, show this
gentleman up to her ladyship’s boudoir, and William, take
his—baggage—to the blue room. Her ladyship wishes to see you at
once, Sir, before the others come.”
So I went up the big staircase to a part of the Castle that I did not remember,
wondering who “the others” might be. Almost could I have sworn that
the shade of Savage accompanied me up those stairs; I could feel him at my
side.
Presently a door was thrown open and I was ushered into a room somewhat dimly
lit and full of the scent of flowers. By the fire near a tea-table, stood a
lady clad in some dark dress with the light glinting on her rich-hued hair. She
turned and I saw that she still wore the necklace of red stones, and beneath it
on her breast a single red flower. For this was Lady Ragnall; about that there
was no doubt at all, so little doubt indeed that I was amazed. I had expected
to see a stout, elderly woman whom I should only know by the colour of her eyes
and her voice, and perhaps certain tricks of manner. But, this was the mischief
of it, I could not perceive any change, at any rate in that light. She was just
the same! Perhaps a little fuller in figure, which was an advantage; perhaps a
little more considered in her movements, perhaps a little taller or at any rate
more stately, and that was all.
These things I learned in a flash. Then with a murmured “Mr. Quatermain,
my Lady,” the footman closed the door and she saw me.
Moving quickly towards me with both her hands outstretched, she exclaimed in
that honey-soft voice of hers,
“Oh! my dear friend——” stopped and added, “Why,
you haven’t changed a bit.”
“Fossils wear well,” I replied, “but that is just what I was
thinking of you.”
“Then it is very rude of you to call me a fossil when I am only
approaching that stage. Oh! I am glad to see you. I am glad!” and
she gave me both the outstretched hands.
Upon my word I felt inclined to kiss her and have wondered ever since if she
would have been very angry. I am not certain that she did not divine the
inclination. At any rate after a little pause she dropped my hands and laughed.
Then she said,
“I must tell you at once. A most terrible catastrophe has
happened——”
Instantly it occurred to me that she had forgotten having informed me by letter
of all the details of her husband’s death. Such things chance to people
who have once lost their memory. So I tried to look as sympathetic as I felt,
sighed and waited.
“It’s not so bad as all that,” she said with a little shake
of her head, reading my thought as she always had the power to do from the
first moment we met. “We can talk about that afterwards.
It’s only that I hoped we were going to have a quiet two days, and now
the Atterby-Smiths are coming, yes, in half an hour. Five of them!”
“The Atterby-Smiths!” I exclaimed, for somehow I too felt
disappointed. “Who are the Atterby-Smiths?”
“Cousins of George’s, his nearest relatives. They think he ought to
have left them everything. But he didn’t, because he could never bear the
sight of them. You see his property was unentailed and he left it all to me.
Now the entire family is advancing to suggest that I should leave it to them,
as perhaps I might have done if they had not chosen to come just now.”
“Why didn’t you put them off?” I asked.
“Because I couldn’t,” she answered with a little stamp of her
foot, “otherwise do you suppose they would have been here? They were far
too clever. They telegraphed after lunch giving the train by which they were to
arrive, but no address save Charing Cross. I thought of moving up to the
Berkeley Square house, but it was impossible in the time, also I didn’t
know how to catch you. Oh! it’s most vexatious.”
“Perhaps they are very nice,” I suggested feebly.
“Nice! Wait till you have seen them. Besides if they had been angels I
did not want them just now. But how selfish I am! Come and have some tea. And
you can stop longer, that is if you live through the Atterby-Smiths who are
worse than both the Kendah tribes put together. Indeed I wish old Harût were
coming instead. I should like to see Harût again, wouldn’t you?”
and suddenly the mystical look I knew so well, gathered on her face.
“Yes, perhaps I should,” I replied doubtfully. “But I must
leave by the first train on Tuesday morning; it goes at eight o’clock. I
looked it up.”
“Then the Atterby-Smiths leave on Monday if I have to turn them out of
the house. So we shall get one evening clear at any rate. Stop a minute,”
and she rang the bell.
The footman appeared as suddenly as though he had been listening at the door.
“Alfred,” she said, “tell Moxley” (he, I discovered,
was the butler) “that when Mr. and Mrs. Atterby-Smith, the two Misses
Atterby-Smith and the young Mr. Atterby-Smith arrive, they are to be shown to
their rooms. Tell the cook also to put off dinner till half-past eight, and if
Mr. and Mrs. Scroope arrive earlier, tell Moxley to tell them that I am sorry
to be a little late, but that I was delayed by some parish business. Now do you
understand?”
“Yes, my Lady,” said Alfred and vanished.
“He doesn’t understand in the least,” remarked Lady Ragnall,
“but so long as he doesn’t show the Atterby-Smiths up here, in
which case he can go away with them on Monday, I don’t care. It will all
work out somehow. Now sit down by the fire and let’s talk. We’ve
got nearly an hour and twenty minutes and you can smoke if you like. I learnt
to in Egypt,” and she took a cigarette from the mantelpiece and lit it.
That hour and twenty minutes went like a flash, for we had so much to say to
each other that we never even got to the things we wanted to say. For instance,
I began to tell her about King Solomon’s Mines, which was a long story;
and she to tell me what happened after we parted on the shores of the Red Sea.
At least the first hour and a quarter went, when suddenly the door opened and
Alfred in a somewhat frightened voice announced—“Mr. and Mrs.
Atterby-Smith, the Misses Atterby-Smith and Mr. Atterby-Smith junior.”
Then he caught sight of his mistress’s eye and fled.
I looked and felt inclined to do likewise if only there had been another door.
But there wasn’t and that which existed was quite full. In the forefront
came A.-S. senior, like a bull leading the herd. Indeed his appearance was
bull-like as my eye, travelling from the expanse of white shirt-front (they
were all dressed for dinner) to his red and massive countenance surmounted by
two horn-like tufts of carroty hair, informed me at a glance. Followed Mrs.
A.-S., the British matron incarnate. Literally there seemed to be acres of her;
black silk below and white skin above on which set in filigree floated big
green stones, like islands in an ocean. Her countenance too, though stupid was
very stern and frightened me. Followed the progeny of this formidable pair.
They were tall and thin, also red haired. The girls, whose age I could not
guess in the least, were exactly like each other, which was not strange as
afterwards I discovered that they were twins. They had pale blue eyes and
somehow reminded me of fish. Both of them were dressed in green and wore topaz
necklaces. The young man who seemed to be about one or two and twenty, had also
pale blue eyes, in one of which he wore an eye-glass, but his hair was sandy as
though it had been bleached, parted in the middle and oiled down flat.
For a moment there was a silence which I felt to be dreadful. Then in a big,
pompous voice A.-S. père said,
“How do you do, my dear Luna? As I ascertained from the footman that you
had not yet gone to dress, I insisted upon his leading us here for a little
private conversation after we have been parted for so many years. We wished to
offer you our condolences in person on your and our still recent loss.”
“Thank you,” said Lady Ragnall, “but I think we have
corresponded on the subject which is painful to me.”
“I fear that we are interrupting a smoking party, Thomas,” said
Mrs. A.-S. in a cold voice, sniffing at the air for all the world like a
suspicious animal, whereon the five of them stared at Lady Ragnall’s
cigarette which she held between her fingers.
“Yes,” said Lady Ragnall. “Won’t you have one? Mr.
Quatermain, hand Mrs. Smith the box, please.”
I obeyed automatically, proffering it to the lady who nearly withered me with a
glance, and then to each to each in turn. To my relief the young man took one.
“Archibald,” said his mother, “you are surely not going to
make your sisters’ dresses smell of tobacco just before dinner.”
Archibald sniggered and replied,
“A little more smoke will not make any difference in this room,
Ma.”
“That is true, darling,” said Mrs. A.-S. and was straightway seized
with a fit of asthma.
After this I am sure I don’t know what happened, for muttering something
about its being time to dress, I rushed from the room and wandered about until
I could find someone to conduct me to my own where I lingered until I heard the
dinner-bell ring. But even this retreat was not without disaster, for in my
hurry I trod upon one of the young lady’s dresses; I don’t know
whether it was Dolly’s or Polly’s (they were named Dolly and Polly)
and heard a dreadful crack about her middle as though she were breaking in two.
Thereon Archibald giggled again and Dolly and Polly remarked with one
voice—they always spoke together,
“Oh! clumsy!”
To complete my misfortunes I missed my way going downstairs and strayed to and
fro like a lost lamb until I found myself confronted by a green baize door
which reminded me of something. I stood staring at it till suddenly a vision
arose before me of myself following a bell wire through that very door in the
darkness of the night when in search for the late Mr. Savage upon a certain
urgent occasion. Yes, there could be no doubt about it, for look! there was the
wire, and strange it seemed to me that I should live to behold it again.
Curiosity led me to push the door open just to ascertain if my memory served me
aright about the exact locality of the room. Next moment I regretted it for I
fell straight into the arms of either Polly or Dolly.
“Oh!” said she, “I’ve just been sewn up.”
I reflected that this was my case also in another sense, but asked feebly if
she knew the way downstairs.
She didn’t; neither of us did, till at length we met Mrs. Smith coming to
look for her.
If I had been a burglar she could not have regarded me with graver suspicions.
But at any rate she knew the way downstairs. And there to my joy I found
my old friend Scroope and his wife, both of them grown stout and elderly, but
as jolly as ever, after which the Smith family ceased to trouble me.
Also there was the rector of the parish, Dr. Jeffreys and an absurdly young
wife whom he had recently married, a fluffy-headed little thing with round eyes
and a cheerful, perky manner. The two of them together looked exactly like a
turkey-cock and a chicken. I remembered him well enough and to my astonishment
he remembered me, perhaps because Lady Ragnall, when she had hastily invited
him to meet the Smith family, mentioned that I was coming. Lastly there was the
curate, a dark, young man who seemed to be always brooding over the secrets of
time and eternity, though perhaps he was only thinking about his dinner or the
next day’s services.
Well, there we stood in that well-remembered drawing-room in which first I had
made the acquaintance of Harût and Marût; also of the beautiful Miss Holmes as
Lady Ragnall was then called. The Scroopes, the Jeffreys and I gathered in one
group and the Atterby-Smiths in another like a force about to attack, while
between the two, brooding and indeterminate, stood the curate, a neutral
observer.
Presently Lady Ragnall arrived, apologizing for being late. For some reason
best known to herself she had chosen to dress as though for a great party. I
believe it was out of mischief and in order to show Mrs. Atterby-Smith some of
the diamonds she was firmly determined that family should never inherit. At any
rate there she stood glittering and lovely, and smiled upon us.
Then came dinner and once more I marched to the great hall in her company; Dr.
Jeffreys got Mrs. Smith; Papa Smith got Mrs. Jeffreys who looked like a Grecian
maiden walking into dinner with the Minotaur; Scroope got one of the Miss
Smiths, she who wore a pink bow, the gloomy curate got the other with a blue
bow, and Archibald got Mrs. Scroope who departed making faces at us over his
shoulder.
“You look very grand and nice,” I said to Lady Ragnall as we
followed the others at a discreet distance.
“I am glad,” she answered, “as to the nice, I mean. As for
the grand, that dreadful woman is always writing to me about the Ragnall
diamonds, so I thought that she should see some of them for the first and last
time. Do you know I haven’t worn these things since George and I went to
Court together, and I daresay shall never wear them again, for there is only
one ornament I care for and I have got that on under my dress.”
I stared and her and with a laugh said that she was very mischievous.
“I suppose so,” she replied, “but I detest those people who
are pompous and rude and have spoiled my party. Do you know I had half a mind
to come down in the dress that I wore as Isis in Kendah Land. I have got it
upstairs and you shall see me in it before you go, for old time’s sake.
Only it occurred to me that they might think me mad, so I didn’t. Dr.
Jeffreys, will you say grace, please?”
Well, it was a most agreeable dinner so far as I was concerned, for I sat
between my hostess and Mrs. Scroope and the rest were too far off for
conversation. Moreover as Archibald developed an unexpected quantity of small
talk, and Scroope on the other side amused himself by filling pink-bow Miss
Smith’s innocent mind with preposterous stories about Africa, as had
happened to me once before at this table, Lady Ragnall and I were practically
left undisturbed.
“Isn’t it strange that we should find ourselves sitting here again
after all these years, except that you are in my poor mother’s place? Oh!
when that scientific gentleman convinced me the other day that you whom I had
heard were dead, were not only alive and well but actually in England, really I
could have embraced him.”
I thought of an answer but did not make it, though as usual she read my mind
for I saw her smile.
“The truth is,” she went on, “I am an only child and really
have no friends, though of course being—well, you know,” and she
glanced at the jewels on her breast, “I have plenty of
acquaintances.”
“And suitors,” I suggested.
“Yes,” she replied blushing, “as many as Penelope, not one of
whom cares twopence about me any more than I care for them. The truth is, Mr.
Quatermain, that nobody and nothing interest me, except a spot in the
churchyard yonder and another amid ruins in Egypt.”
“You have had sad bereavements,” I said looking the other way.
“Very sad and they have left life empty. Still I should not complain for
I have had my share of good. Also it isn’t true to say that nothing
interests me. Egypt interests me, though after what has happened I do not feel
as though I could return there. All Africa interests me and,” she added
dropping her voice, “I can say it because I know you will not
misunderstand, you interest me, as you have always done since the first moment
I saw you.”
“I!” I exclaimed, staring at my own reflection in a silver
plate which made me look—well, more unattractive than usual.
“It’s very kind of you to say so, but I can’t understand why
I should. You have seen very little of me, Lady Ragnall, except in that long
journey across the desert when we did not talk much, since you were otherwise
engaged.”
“I know. That’s the odd part of it, for I feel as though I had seen
you for years and years and knew everything about you that one human being can
know of another. Of course, too, I do know a good lot of your life through
George and Harût.”
“Harût was a great liar,” I said uneasily.
“Was he? I always thought him painfully truthful, though how he got at
the truth I do not know. Anyhow,” she added with meaning,
“don’t suppose I think the worse of you because others have thought
so well. Women who seem to be all different, generally, I notice, have this in
common. If one or two of them like a man, the rest like him also because
something in him appeals to the universal feminine instinct, and the same
applies to their dislike. Now men, I think, are different in that
respect.”
“Perhaps because they are more catholic and charitable,” I
suggested, “or perhaps because they like those who like them.”
She laughed in her charming way, and said,
“However these remarks do not apply to you and me, for as I think I told
you once before in that cedar wood in Kendah Land where you feared lest I
should catch a chill, or become—odd again, it is another you with whom
something in me seems to be so intimate.”
“That’s fortunate for your sake,” I muttered, still staring
at and pointing to the silver plate.
Again she laughed. “Do you remember the Taduki herb?” she
asked. “I have plenty of it safe upstairs, and not long ago I took a
whiff of it, only a whiff because you know it had to be saved.”
“And what did you see?”
“Never mind. The question is what shall we both see?”
“Nothing,” I said firmly. “No earthly power will make me
breathe that unholy drug again.”
“Except me,” she murmured with sweet decision. “No,
don’t think about leaving the house. You can’t, there are no Sunday
trains. Besides you won’t if I ask you not.”
“‘In vain is the net spread in the sight of any bird,’”
I replied, firm as a mountain.
“Is it? Then why are so many caught?”
At that moment the Bull of Bashan—I mean Smith, began to bellow something
at his hostess from the other end of the table and our conversation came to an
end.
“I say, old chap,” whispered Scroope in my ear when we stood up to
see the ladies out. “I suppose you are thinking of marrying again. Well,
you might do worse,” and he glanced at the glittering form of Lady
Ragnall vanishing through the doorway behind her guests.
“Shut up, you idiot!” I replied indignantly.
“Why?” he asked with innocence. “Marriage is an honourable
estate, especially when there is lots of the latter. I remember saying
something of the sort to you years ago and at this table, when as it happened
you also took in her ladyship. Only there was George in the wind then; now it
has carried him away.”
Without deigning any reply I seized my glass and went to sit down between the
canon and the Bull of Bashan.
CHAPTER III.
ALLAN GIVES HIS WORD
Mr. Atterby-Smith proved on acquaintance to be even worse than unfond fancy
painted him. He was a gentleman in a way and of good family whereof the real
name was Atterby, the Smith having been added to secure a moderate fortune left
to him on that condition. His connection with Lord Ragnall was not close and
through the mother’s side. For the rest he lived in some south-coast
watering-place and fancied himself a sportsman because he had on various
occasions hired a Scottish moor or deer forest. Evidently he had never done
anything nor earned a shilling during all his life and was bringing his family
up to follow in his useless footsteps. The chief note of his character was that
intolerable vanity which so often marks men who have nothing whatsoever about
which to be vain. Also he had a great idea of his rights and what was due to
him, which he appeared to consider included, upon what ground I could not in
the least understand, the reversal of all the Ragnall properties and wealth. I
do not think I need say any more about him, except that he bored me to
extinction, especially after his fourth glass of port.
Perhaps, however, the son was worse, for he asked questions without number and
when at last I was reduced to silence, lectured me about shooting. Yes, this
callow youth who was at Sandhurst, instructed me, Allan Quatermain, how to kill
elephants, he who had never seen an elephant except when he fed it with buns at
the Zoo. At last Mr. Smith, who to Scroope’s great amusement had taken
the end of the table and assumed the position of host, gave the signal to move
and we adjourned to the drawing-room.
I don’t know what had happened but there we found the atmosphere
distinctly stormy. The ample Mrs. Smith sat in a chair fanning herself, which
caused the barbaric ornaments she wore to clank upon her fat arm. Upon either
side of her, pale and indeterminate, stood Polly and Dolly each pretending to
read a book. Somehow the three of them reminded me of a coat-of-arms seen in a
nightmare, British Matron sejant with Modesty and Virtue as supporters.
Opposite, on the other side of the fire and evidently very angry, stood Lady
Ragnall, regardant.
“Do I understand you to say, Luna,” I heard Mrs. A.-S. ask in
resonant tones as I entered the room, “that you actually played the part
of a heathen goddess among these savages, clad in a transparent
bed-robe?”
“Yes, Mrs. Atterby-Smith,” replied Lady Ragnall, “and a
nightcap of feathers. I will put it on for you if you won’t be shocked.
Or perhaps one of your daughters——”
“Oh!” said both the young ladies together, “please be quiet.
Here come the gentlemen.”
After this there was a heavy silence broken only by the stifled giggles in the
background of Mrs. Scroope and the canon’s fluffy-headed wife, who to do
her justice had some fun in her. Thank goodness the evening, or rather that
part of it did not last long, since presently Mrs. Atterby-Smith, after
studying me for a long while with a cold eye, rose majestically and swept off
to bed followed by her offspring.
Afterwards I ascertained from Mrs. Scroope that Lady Ragnall had been amusing
herself by taking away my character in every possible manner for the benefit of
her connections, who were left with a general impression that I was the chief
of a native tribe somewhere in Central Africa where I dwelt in light attire
surrounded by the usual accessories. No wonder, therefore, that Mrs. A.-S.
thought it best to remove her “Twin Pets,” as she called them, out
of my ravening reach.
Then the Scroopes went away, having arranged for me to lunch with them on the
morrow, an invitation that I hastily accepted, though I heard Lady Ragnall
mutter—“Mean!” beneath her breath. With them departed the
canon and his wife and the curate, being, as they said, “early birds with
duties to perform.” After this Lady Ragnall paid me out by going to bed,
having instructed Moxley to show us to the smoking room, “where,”
she whispered as she said good night, “I hope you will enjoy
yourself.”
Over the rest of the night I draw a veil. For a solid hour and three-quarters
did I sit in that room between this dreadful pair, being alternately questioned
and lectured. At length I could stand it no longer and while pretending to help
myself to whiskey and soda, slipped through the door and fled upstairs.
I arrived late to breakfast purposely and found that I was wise, for Lady
Ragnall was absent upstairs, recovering from “a headache.” Mr.
A.-Smith was also suffering from a headache downstairs, the result of
champagne, port and whisky mixed, and all his family seemed to have pains in
their tempers. Having ascertained that they were going to the church in the
park, I departed to one two miles away and thence walked straight on to the
Scroopes’ where I had a very pleasant time, remaining till five in the
afternoon. I returned to tea at the Castle where I found Lady Ragnall so cross
that I went to church again, to the six o’clock service this time, only
getting back in time to dress for dinner. Here I was paid out for I had to take
in Mrs. Atterby-Smith. Oh! what a meal was that. We sat for the most part in
solemn silence broken only by requests to pass the salt. I observed with
satisfaction, however, that things were growing lively at the other end of the
table where A.-Smith père was drinking a good deal too much wine. At
last I heard him say,
“We had hoped to spend a few days with you, my dear Luna. But as you tell
us that your engagements make this impossible”—and he paused to
drink some port, whereon Lady Ragnall remarked inconsequently,
“I assure you the ten o’clock train is far the best and I have
ordered the carriage at half-past nine, which is not very early.”
“As your engagements make this impossible,” he repeated, “we
would ask for the opportunity of a little family conclave with you
to-night.”
Here all of them turned and glowered at me.
“Certainly,” said Lady Ragnall, “‘the sooner ‘tis
over the sooner to sleep.’ Mr. Quatermain, I am sure, will excuse us,
will you not? I have had the museum lit up for you, Mr. Quatermain. You may
find some Egyptian things there that will interest you.”
“Oh, with pleasure!” I murmured, and fled away.
I spent a very instructive two hours in the museum, studying various Egyptian
antiquities including a couple of mummies which rather terrified me. They
looked so very corpse-like standing there in their wrappings. One was that of a
lady who was a “Singer of Amen,” I remember. I wondered where she
was singing now and what song. Presently I came to a glass case which riveted
my attention, for above it was a label bearing the following words: “Two
Papyri given to Lady Ragnall by the priests of the Kendah Tribe in
Africa.” Within were the papyri unrolled and beneath each of the
documents, its translation, so far as they could be translated for they were
somewhat broken. No. 1, which was dated, “In the first year of
Peroa,” appeared to be the official appointment of the Royal Lady Amada,
to be the prophetess to the temple of Isis and Horus the Child, which was also
called Amada, and situated on the east bank of the Nile above Thebes. Evidently
this was the same temple of which Lady Ragnall had written to me in her letter,
where her husband had met his death by accident, a coincidence which made me
start when I remembered how and where the document had come into her hands and
what kind of office she filled at the time.
The second papyrus, or rather its translation, contained a most comprehensive
curse upon any man who ventured to interfere with the personal sanctity of this
same Royal Lady of Amada, who, apparently in virtue of her office, was doomed
to perpetual celibacy like the vestal virgins. I do not remember all the terms
of the curse, but I know that it invoked the vengeance of Isis the Mother, Lady
of the Moon, and Horus the Child upon anyone who should dare such a
desecration, and in so many words doomed him to death by violence “far
from his own country where first he had looked on Ra,” (i.e. the sun) and
also to certain spiritual sufferings afterwards.
The document gave me the idea that it was composed in troubled days to protect
that particularly sacred person, the Prophetess of Isis whose cult, as I have
since learned, was rising in Egypt at the time, from threatened danger, perhaps
at the hands of some foreign man. It occurred to me even that this Princess,
for evidently she was a descendant of kings, had been appointed to a most
sacred office for that very purpose. Men who shrink from little will often fear
to incur the direct curse of widely venerated gods in order to obtain their
desires, even if they be not their own gods. Such were my conclusions about
this curious and ancient writing which I regret I cannot give in full as I
neglected to copy it at the time.
I may add that it seemed extremely strange to me that it and the other which
dealt with a particular temple in Egypt should have passed into Lady
Ragnall’s hands over two thousand years later in a distant part of
Africa, and that subsequently her husband should have been killed in her
presence whilst excavating the very temple to which they referred, whence too
in all probability they were taken. Moreover, oddly enough Lady Ragnall had
herself for a while filled the rôle of Isis in a shrine whereof these two
papyri had been part of the sacred appurtenances for unknown ages, and one of
her official titles there was Prophetess and Lady of the Moon, whose symbol she
wore upon her breast.
Although I have always recognized that there are a great many more things in
the world than are dreamt of in our philosophy, I say with truth and confidence
that I am not a superstitious man. Yet I confess that these papers and the
circumstances connected with them, made me feel afraid.
Also they made me wish that I had not come to Ragnall Castle.
Well, the Atterby-Smiths had so far effectually put a stop to any talk of such
matters and even if Lady Ragnall should succeed in getting rid of them by that
morning train, as to which I was doubtful, there remained but a single day of
my visit during which it ought not to be hard to stave off the subject. Thus I
reflected, standing face to face with those mummies, till presently I observed
that the Singer of Amen who wore a staring, gold mask, seemed to be watching me
with her oblong painted eyes. To my fancy a sardonic smile gathered in them and
spread to the mouth.
“That’s what you think,” this smile seemed to say,
“as once before you thought that Fate could be escaped. Wait and see, my
friend. Wait and see!”
“Not in this room any way,” I remarked aloud, and departed in a
hurry down the passage which led to the main staircase.
Before I reached its end a remarkable sight caused me to halt in the shadow.
The Atterby-Smith family were going to bed en bloc. They marched in
single file up the great stair, each of them carrying a hand candle. Papa led
and young Hopeful brought up the rear. Their countenances were full of war,
even the twins looked like angry lambs, but something written on them informed
me that they had suffered defeat recent and grievous. So they vanished up the
stairway and out of my ken for ever.
When they had gone I started again and ran straight into Lady Ragnall. If her
guests had been angry, it was clear that she was furious, almost weeping
with rage, indeed. Moreover, she turned and rent me.
“You are a wretch,” she said, “to run away and leave me all
day long with those horrible people. Well, they will never come here again, for
I have told them that if they do the servants have orders to shut the door in
their faces.”
Not knowing what to say I remarked that I had spent a most instructive evening
in the museum, which seemed to make her angrier than ever. At any rate she
whisked off without even saying “good night” and left me standing
there. Afterwards I learned that the A.-S.‘s had calmly informed Lady
Ragnall that she had stolen their property and demanded that “as an act
of justice” she should make a will leaving everything she possessed to
them, and meanwhile furnish them with an allowance of £4,000 a year. What I did
not learn were the exact terms of her answer.
Next morning Alfred, when he called me, brought me a note from his mistress
which I fully expected would contain a request that I should depart by the same
train as her other guests. Its real contents, however, were very different.
“MY DEAR FRIEND,” it ran, “I am
so ashamed of myself and so sorry for my rudeness last night, for which I
deeply apologise. If you knew all that I had gone through at the hands of those
dreadful mendicants, you would forgive me.—L.R.”
“P.S.—I have ordered breakfast at 10. Don’t go down much
before, for your own sake.”
Somewhat relieved in my mind, for I thought she was really angry with me, not
altogether without cause, I rose, dressed and set to work to write some
letters. While I was doing so I heard the wheels of a carriage beneath and
opening my window, saw the Atterby-Smith family in the act of departing in the
Castle bus. Smith himself seemed to be still enraged, but the others looked
depressed. Indeed I heard the wife of his bosom say to him,
“Calm yourself, my dear. Remember that Providence knows what is best for
us and that beggars on horseback are always unjust and ungrateful.”
To which her spouse replied,
“Hold your infernal tongue, will you,” and then began to rate the
servants about the luggage.
Well, off they went. Glaring through the door of the bus, Mr. Smith caught
sight of me leaning out of the window, seeing which I waved my hand to him in
adieu. His only reply to this courtesy was to shake his fist, though whether at
me or at the Castle and its inhabitants in general, I neither know nor care.
When I was quite sure that they had gone and were not coming back again to find
something they had forgotten, I went downstairs and surprised a conclave
between the butler, Moxley, and his satellites, reinforced by Lady
Ragnall’s maid and two other female servants.
“Gratuities!” Moxley was exclaiming, which I thought a fine word
for tips, “not a smell of them! His gratuities were—‘Damn
your eyes, you fat bottle-washer,’ being his name for butler. My
eyes, mind you, Ann, not Alfred’s or William’s, and that because he
had tumbled over his own rugs. Gentleman! Why, I name him a hog with his
litter.”
“Hogs don’t have litters, Mr. Moxley,” observed Ann smartly.
“Well, young woman, if there weren’t no hogs, there’d be no
litters, so there! However, he won’t root about in this castle no more,
for I happened to catch a word or two of what passed between him and her
Ladyship last night. He said straight out that she was making love to that
little Mr. Quatermain who wanted her money, and probably not for the first time
as they had forgathered in Africa. A gentleman, mind you, Ann, who although
peculiar, I like, and who, the keeper Charles tells me, is the best shot in the
whole world.”
“And what did she say to that?” asked Ann.
“What did she say? What didn’t she say, that’s the question.
It was just as though all the furniture in the room got up and went for them
Smiths. Well, having heard enough, and more than I wanted, I stepped off with
the tray and next minute out they all come and grab the bedroom candlesticks.
That’s all and there’s her Ladyship’s bell. Alfred,
don’t stand gaping there but go and light the hot-plates.”
So they melted away and I descended from the landing, indignant but laughing.
No wonder that Lady Ragnall lost her temper!
Ten minutes later she arrived in the dining-room, waving a lighted ribbon that
disseminated perfume.
“What on earth are you doing?” I asked.
“Fumigating the house,” she said. “It is unnecessary as I
don’t think they were infectious, but the ceremony has a moral
significance—like incense. Anyway it relieves my feelings.”
Then she laughed and threw the remains of the ribbon into the fire, adding,
“If you say a word about those people I’ll leave the room.”
I think we had one of the jolliest breakfasts I ever remember. To begin with we
were both hungry since our miseries of the night before had prevented us from
eating any dinner. Indeed she swore that she had scarcely tasted food since
Saturday. Then we had such a lot to talk about. With short intervals we talked
all that day, either in the house or while walking through the gardens and
grounds. Passing through the latter I came to the spot on the back drive where
once I had saved her from being abducted by Harût and Marût, and as I
recognized it, uttered an exclamation. She asked me why and the end of it was
that I told her all that story which to this moment she had never heard, for
Ragnall had thought well to keep it from her.
She listened intently, then said,
“So I owe you more than I knew. Yet, I’m not sure, for you see I
was abducted after all. Also if I had been taken there, probably George would
never have married me or seen me again, and that might have been better for
him.”
“Why?” I asked. “You were all the world to him.”
“Is any woman ever all the world to a man, Mr. Quatermain?”
I hesitated, expecting some attack.
“Don’t answer,” she went on, “it would be too long and
you wouldn’t convince me who have been in the East. However, he was all
the world to me. Therefore his welfare was what I wished and wish, and I think
he would have had more of it if he had never married me.”
“Why?” I asked again.
“Because I brought him no good luck, did I? I needn’t go through
all the story as you know it. And in the end it was through me that he was
killed in Egypt.”
“Or through the goddess Isis,” I broke in rather nervously.
“Yes, the goddess Isis, a part I have played in my time, or something
like it. And he was killed in the temple of the goddess Isis. And those papyri
of which you read the translations in the museum, which were given to me in
Kendah Land, seem to have come from that same temple. And—how about the
Ivory Child? Isis in the temple evidently held a child in her arms, but when we
found her it had gone. Supposing this child was the same as that of which I was
guardian! It might have been, since the papyri came from that temple. What do
you think?”
“I don’t think anything,” I answered, “except that it
is all very odd. I don’t even understand what Isis and the child Horus
represent. They were not mere images either in Egypt or Kendah Land. There must
be an idea behind them somewhere.”
“Oh! there was. Isis was the universal Mother, Nature herself with all
the powers, seen and unseen, that are hidden in Nature; Love personified also,
although not actually the queen of Love like Hathor, her sister goddess. The
Horus child, whom the old Egyptians called Heru-Hennu, signified eternal
regeneration, eternal youth, eternal strength and beauty. Also he was the
Avenger who overthrew Set, the Prince of Darkness, and thus in a way opened the
Door of Life to men.”
“It seems to me that all religions have much in common,” I said.
“Yes, a great deal. It was easy for the old Egyptians to become
Christian, since for many of them it only meant worshipping Isis and Horus
under new and holier names. But come in, it grows cold.”
We had tea in Lady Ragnall’s boudoir and after it had been taken away our
conversation died. She sat there on the other side of the fire with a cigarette
between her lips, looking at me through the perfumed smoke till I began to grow
uncomfortable and to feel that a crisis of some sort was at hand. This proved
perfectly correct, for it was. Presently she said,
“We took a long journey once together, Mr. Quatermain, did we not?”
“Undoubtedly,” I answered, and began to talk of it until she cut me
short with a wave of her hand, and went on,
“Well, we are going to take a longer one together after dinner
to-night.”
“What! Where! How!” I exclaimed much alarmed.
“I don’t know where, but as for how—look in that box,”
and she pointed to a little carved Eastern chest made of rose or sandal wood,
that stood upon a table between us.
With a groan I rose and opened it. Inside was another box made of silver. This
I opened also and perceived that within lay bundles of dried leaves that looked
like tobacco, from which floated an enervating and well-remembered scent that
clouded my brain for a moment. Then I shut down the lids and returned to my
seat.
“Taduki,” I murmured.
“Yes, Taduki, and I believe in perfect order with all its virtue
intact.”
“Virtue!” I exclaimed. “I don’t think there is any
virtue about that hateful and magical herb which I believe grew in the
devil’s garden. Moreover, Lady Ragnall, although there are few things in
the world that I would refuse you, I tell you at once that nothing will induce
me to have anything more to do with it.”
She laughed softly and asked why not.
“Because I find life so full of perplexities and memories that I have no
wish to make acquaintance with any more, such as I am sure lie hid by the
thousand in that box.”
“If so, don’t you think that they might clear up some of those
which surround you to-day?”
“No, for in such things there is no finality, since whatever one saw
would also require explanation.”
“Don’t let us argue,” she replied. “It is tiring and I
daresay we shall need all our strength to-night.”
I looked at her speechless. Why could she not take No for an answer? As usual
she read my thought and replied to it.
“Why did not Adam refuse the apple that Eve offered him?” she
inquired musingly. “Or rather why did he eat it after many refusals and
learn the secret of good and evil, to the great gain of the world which
thenceforward became acquainted with the dignity of labour?”
“Because the woman tempted him,” I snapped.
“Quite so. It has always been her business in life and always will be.
Well, I am tempting you now, and not in vain.”
“Do you remember who was tempting the woman?”
“Certainly. Also that he was a good school-master since he caused the
thirst for knowledge to overcome fear and thus laid the foundation-stone of all
human progress. That allegory may be read two ways, as one of a rise from
ignorance instead of a fall from innocence.”
“You are too clever for me with your perverted notions. Also, you said we
were not to argue. I have therefore only to repeat that I will not eat your
apple, or rather, breathe your Taduki.”
“Adam over again,” she replied, shaking her head. “The same
old beginning and the same old end, because you see at last you will do exactly
what Adam did.”
Here she rose and standing over me, looked me straight in the eyes with the
curious result that all my will power seemed to evaporate. Then she sat down
again, laughing softly, and remarked as though to herself,
“Who would have thought that Allan Quatermain was a moral coward!”
“Coward,” I repeated. “Coward!”
“Yes, that’s the right word. At least you were a minute ago. Now
courage has come back to you. Why, it’s almost time to dress for dinner,
but before you go, listen. I have some power over you, my friend, as you have
some power over me, for I tell you frankly if you wished me very much to do
anything, I should have to do it; and the same applies conversely. Now,
to-night we are, as I believe, going to open a great gate and to see wonderful
things, glorious things that will thrill us for the rest of our lives, and
perhaps suggest to us what is coming after death. You will not fail me, will
you?” she continued in a pleading voice. “If you do I must try
alone since no one else will serve, and then I know—how I cannot
say—that I shall be exposed to great danger. Yes, I think that I shall
lose my mind once more and never find it again this side the grave. You would
not have that happen to me, would you, just because you shrink from digging up
old memories?”
“Of course not,” I stammered. “I should never forgive
myself.”
“Yes, of course not. There was really no need for me to ask you. Then you
promise you will do all I wish?” and once more she looked at me, adding,
“Don’t be ashamed, for you remember that I have been in touch with
hidden things and am not quite as other women are. You will recollect I told
you that which I have never breathed to any other living soul, years ago on
that night when first we met.”
“I promise,” I answered and was about to add something, I forget
what, when she cut me short, saying,
“That’s enough, for I know your word is rather better than your
bond. Now dress as quickly as you can or the dinner will be spoiled.”
CHAPTER IV.
THROUGH THE GATES
Short as was the time at my disposal before the dinner-gong sounded, it proved
ample for reflection. With every article of attire that I discarded went some
of that boudoir glamour till its last traces vanished with my walking-boots. I
was fallen indeed. I who had come to this place so full of virtuous
resolutions, could now only reflect upon the true and universal meaning of our
daily prayer that we might be kept from temptation. And yet what had tempted
me? For my life’s sake I could not say. The desire to please a most
charming woman and to keep her from making solitary experiments of a dangerous
nature, I suppose, though whether they should be less dangerous carried out
jointly remained to be seen. Certainly it was not any wish to eat of her
proffered apple of Knowledge, for already I knew a great deal more than I cared
for about things in general. Oh! the truth was that woman is the mightiest
force in the world, at any rate where the majority of us poor men is concerned.
She commanded and I must obey.
I grew desperate and wondered if I could escape. Perhaps I might slip out of
the back door and run for it, without my great coat or hat although the night
was so cold and I should probably be taken up as a lunatic. No, it was
impossible for I had forged a chain that might not be broken. I had passed my
word of honour. Well, I was in for it and after all what was there of which I
need be afraid that I should tremble and shrink back as though I were about to
run away with somebody’s wife, or rather to be run away with quite
contrary to my own inclination? Nothing at all. A mere nonsensical ordeal much
less serious than a visit to the dentist.
Probably that stuff had lost its strength by now—that is, unless it had
grown more powerful by keeping, as is the case with certain sorts of
explosives. And if it had not, the worst to be expected was a silly dream,
followed perhaps by headache. That is, unless I did not chance to wake up again
at all in this world, which was a most unpleasant possibility. Another thing,
suppose I woke and she didn’t! What should I say then? Of a certainty I
should find myself in the dock. Yes, and there were further dreadful
eventualities, quite conceivable, every one of them, the very thought of which
plunged me into a cold perspiration and made me feel so weak that I was obliged
to sit down.
Then I heard the gong; to me it sounded like the execution bell to a prisoner
under sentence of death. I crept downstairs feebly and found Lady Ragnall
waiting for me in the drawing-room, clothed with gaiety as with a garment. I
remember that it made me most indignant that she could be so happy in such
circumstances, but I said nothing. She looked me up and down and remarked,
“Really from your appearance you might have seen the Ragnall ghost, or be
going to be married against your will, or—I don’t know what. Also
you have forgotten to fasten your tie.”
I looked in the glass. It was true, for there hung the ends down my shirt
front. Then I struggled with the wretched thing until at last she had to help
me, which she did laughing softly. Somehow her touch gave me confidence again
and enabled me to say quite boldly that I only wanted my dinner.
“Yes,” she replied, “but you are not to eat much and you must
only drink water. The priestesses in Kendah Land told me that this was
necessary before taking Taduki in its strongest form, as we are going to
do to-night. You know the prophet Harût only gave us the merest whiff in this
room years ago.”
I groaned and she laughed again.
That dinner with nothing to drink, although to avoid suspicion I let Moxley
fill my glass once or twice, and little to eat for my appetite had vanished,
went by like a bad dream. I recall no more about it until I heard Lady Ragnall
tell Moxley to see that there was a good fire in the museum where we were going
to study that night and must not be disturbed.
Another minute and I was automatically opening the door for her. As she passed
she paused to do something to her dress and whispered,
“Come in a quarter of an hour. Mind—no port which clouds the
intellect.”
“I have none left to cloud,” I remarked after her.
Then I went back and sat by the fire feeling most miserable and staring at the
decanters, for never in my life do I remember wanting a bottle of wine more.
The big clock ticked and ticked and at last chimed the quarter, jarring on my
nerves in that great lonely banqueting hall. Then I rose and crept upstairs
like an evil-doer and it seemed to me that the servants in the hall looked on
me with suspicion, as well they might.
I reached the museum and found it brilliantly lit, but empty except for the
cheerful company of the two mummies who also appeared to regard me with
gleaming but doubtful eyes. So I sat down there in front of the fire, not even
daring to smoke lest tobacco should complicate Taduki.
Presently I heard a low sound of laughter, looked up and nearly fell backwards,
that is, metaphorically, for the chair prevented such a physical collapse.
It was not wonderful since before me, like a bride of ancient days adorned for
her husband, stood the goddess Isis—white robes, feathered headdress,
ancient bracelets, gold-studded sandals on bare feet, scented hair, ruby
necklace and all the rest. I stared, then there burst from me words which were
the last I meant to say,
“Great Heavens! how beautiful you are.”
“Am I?” she asked. “I am glad,” and she glided across
the room and locked the door.
“Now,” she said, returning, “we had better get to business,
that is unless you would like to worship the goddess Isis a little first, to
bring yourself into a proper frame of mind, you know.”
“No,” I replied, my dignity returning to me. “I do not wish
to worship any goddess, especially when she isn’t a goddess. It was not a
part of the bargain.”
“Quite so,” she said, nodding, “but who knows what you will
be worshipping before an hour is over? Oh! forgive me for laughing at you, but
I can’t help it. You are so evidently frightened.”
“Who wouldn’t be frightened?” I answered, looking with gloomy
apprehension at the sandal-wood box which had appeared upon a case full of
scarabs. “Look here, Lady Ragnall,” I added, “why can’t
you leave all this unholy business alone and let us spend a pleasant evening
talking, now that those Smith people have gone? I have lots of stories about my
African adventures which would interest you.”
“Because I want to hear my own African adventures, and perhaps yours too,
which I am sure will interest me a great deal more,” she exclaimed
earnestly. “You think it is all foolishness, but it is not. Those Kendah
priestesses told me much when I seemed to be out of my mind. For a long time I
did not remember what they said, but of late years, especially since George and
I began to excavate that temple, plenty has come back to me bit by bit,
fragments, you know, that make me desire to learn the rest as I never desired
anything else on earth. And the worst of it has always been that from the
beginning I have known—and know—that this can only happen with you
and through you, why I cannot say, or have forgotten. That’s what sent me
nearly wild with joy when I heard that you were not only alive, but in this
country. You won’t disappoint me, will you? There is nothing I can offer
you which would have any value for you, so I can only beg you not to disappoint
me—well, because I am your friend.”
I turned away my head, hesitating, and when I looked up again I saw that her
beautiful eyes were full of tears. Naturally that settled the matter, so I only
said,
“Let us get on with the affair. What am I to do? Stop a bit. I may as
well provide against eventualities,” and going to a table I took a sheet
of notepaper and wrote:
“Lady Ragnall and I, Allan Quatermain, are about to make an experiment
with an herb which we discovered some years ago in Africa. If by any chance
this should result in accident to either or both of us, the Coroner is
requested to understand that it is not a case of murder or of suicide, but
merely of unfortunate scientific research.”
This I dated, adding the hour, 9.47 P.M., and signed, requesting her to do the
same.
She obeyed with a smile, saying it was strange that one who had lived a life of
such constant danger as myself, should be so afraid to die.
“Look here, young lady,” I replied with irritation,
“doesn’t it occur to you that I may be afraid lest
you should die—and I be hanged for it,” I added by an
afterthought.
“Oh! I see,” she answered, “that is really very nice of you.
But, of course, you would think like that; it is your nature.”
“Yes,” I replied. “Nature, not merit.”
She went to a cupboard which formed the bottom of one of the mahogany museum
cases, and extracted from it first of all a bowl of ancient appearance made of
some black stone with projecting knobs for handles that were carved with the
heads of women wearing ceremonial wigs; and next a low tripod of ebony or some
other black wood. I looked at these articles and recognized them. They had
stood in front of the sanctuary in the temple in Kendah Land, and over them I
had once seen this very woman dressed as she was to-night, bend her head in the
magic smoke before she had uttered the prophecy of the passing of the Kendah
god.
“So you brought these away too,” I said.
“Yes,” she replied with solemnity, “that they might be ready
at the appointed hour when we needed them.”
Then she spoke no more for a while, but busied herself with certain rather
eerie preparations. First she set the tripod and its bowl in an open space
which I was glad to note was at some distance from the fire, since if either of
us fell into that who would there be to take us off before cremation ensued?
Then she drew up a curved settee with a back and arms, a comfortable-looking
article having a seat that sloped backwards like those in clubs, and motioned
to me to sit down. This I did with much the same sensations that are evoked by
taking one’s place upon an operation-table.
Next she brought that accursed Taduki box, I mean the inner silver one,
the contents of which I heartily wished I had thrown upon the fire, and set it
down, open, near the tripod. Lastly she lifted some glowing embers of wood from
the grate with tongs, and dropped them into the stone bowl.
“I think that’s all. Now for the great adventure,” she said
in a voice that was at once rapt and dreamy.
“What am I to do?” I asked feebly.
“That is quite simple,” she replied, as she sat herself down beside
me well within reach of the Taduki box, the brazier being between us
with its tripod stand pressed against the edge of the couch, and in its curve,
so that we were really upon each side of it. “When the smoke begins to
rise thickly you have only to bend your head a little forward, with your
shoulders still resting against the settee, and inhale until you find your
senses leaving you, though I don’t know that this is necessary for the
stuff is subtle. Then throw your head back, go to sleep and dream.”
“What am I to dream about?” I inquired in a vacuous way, for my
senses were leaving me already.
“You will dream, I think, of past events in which both of us played a
part, at least I hope so. I dreamt of them before in Kendah Land, but then I
was not myself, and for the most part they are forgotten. Moreover, I learned
that we can only see them all when we are together. Now speak no more.”
This command, by the way, at once produced in me an intense desire for
prolonged conversation. It was not to be gratified, however, for at that moment
she stood up again facing the tripod and me, and began to sing in a rich and
thrilling voice. What she sang I do not know for I could not understand the
language, but I presume it was some ancient chant that she learned in Kendah
Land. At any rate, there she stood, a lovely and inspired priestess clad in her
sacerdotal robes, and sang, waving her arms and fixing her eyes upon mine.
Presently she bent down, took a little of the Taduki weed and with words
of incantation, dropped it upon the embers in the bowl. Twice she did this,
then sat herself upon the couch and waited.
A clear flame sprang up and burned for thirty seconds or so, I suppose while it
consumed the volatile oils in the weed. Then it died down and smoke began to
come, white, rich and billowy, with a very pleasant odour resembling that of
hot-house flowers. It spread out between us like a fan, and though its veil I
heard her say,
“The gates are wide. Enter!”
I knew what she meant well enough, and though for a moment I thought of
cheating, there is no other word for it, knew also that she had detected the
thought and was scorning me in her mind. At any rate I felt that I must obey
and thrust my head forward into the smoke, as a green ham is thrust into a
chimney. The warm vapour struck against my face like fog, or rather steam, but
without causing me to choke or my eyes to smart. I drew it down my throat with
a deep inhalation—once, twice, thrice, then as my brain began to swim,
threw myself back as I had been instructed to do. A deep and happy drowsiness
stole over me, and the last thing I remember was hearing the clock strike the
first two strokes of the hour of ten. The third stroke I heard also, but it
sounded like to that of the richest-throated bell that ever boomed in all the
world. I remember becoming aware that it was the signal for the rolling up of
some vast proscenium, revealing behind it a stage that was the
world—nothing less.
What did I see? What did I see? Let me try to recall and record.
First of all something chaotic. Great rushes of vapour driven by mighty winds;
great seas, for the most part calm. Then upheavals and volcanoes spouting fire.
Then tropic scenes of infinite luxuriance. Terrific reptiles feeding on the
brinks of marshes, and huge elephant-like animals moving between palms beyond.
Then, in a glade, rough huts and about them a jabbering crowd of creatures that
were only half human, for sometimes they stood upright and sometimes ran on
their hands and feet. Also they were almost covered with hair which was all
they had in the way of clothes, and at the moment that I met them, were
terribly frightened by the appearance of a huge mammoth, if that is the right
name for it, which walked into the glade and looked at us. At any rate it was a
beast of the elephant tribe which I judged to be nearly twenty feet high, with
enormous curving tusks.
The point of the vision was that I recognized myself among those hairy
jabberers, not by anything outward and visible, but by something inward and
spiritual. Moreover, I was being urged by a female of the race, I can scarcely
call her a woman, to justify my existence by tackling the mammoth in her
particular interest, or to give her up to someone who would. In the end I
tackled it, rushing forward with a weapon, I think it was a sharp stone tied to
a stick, though how I could expect to hurt a beast twenty feet high with such a
thing is more than I can understand, unless perhaps the stone was poisoned.
At any rate the end was sudden. I threw the stone, whereat a great trunk shot
out from between the tusks and caught me. Round and round I went in the air,
reflecting as I did so, for I suppose at the time my normal consciousness had
not quite left me, that this was my first encounter with the elephant Jana,
also that it was very foolish to try to oblige a female regardless of personal
risk....
All became dark, as no doubt it would have done, but presently, that is after a
lapse of a great many thousands of years, or so it appeared to me, light grew
again. This time I was a black man living in something not unlike a Kaffir
kraal on the top of a hill.
There was shouting below and enemies attacked us; a woman rushed out of a hut
and gave me a spear and a shield, the latter made of wood with white spots on
it, and pointed to the path of duty which ran down the hill. I followed in
company with others, though without enthusiasm, and presently met a roaring
giant of a man at the bottom. I stuck my spear into him and he stuck his into
me, through the stomach, which hurt me most abominably. After this I retired up
the hill where the woman pulled the spear out and gave it to another man. I
remember no more.
Then followed a whole maze of visions, but really I cannot disentangle them.
Nor is it worth while doing so since after all they were only of the nature of
an overture, jumbled incidents of former lives, real or imaginary, or so I
suppose, having to do, all of them, with elementary things, such as hunger and
wounds and women and death.
At length these broken fragments of the past were swept away out of my
consciousness and I found myself face to face with something connected and
tangible, not too remote or unfamiliar for understanding. It was the beginning
of the real story.
I, please remember always that I knew it was I, Allan, and no one else, that
is, the same personality or whatever it may be which makes each man different
from any other man, saw myself in a chariot drawn by two horses with arched
necks and driven by a charioteer who sat on a little seat in front. It was a
highly ornamented, springless vehicle of wood and gilded, something like a
packing-case with a pole, or as we should call it in South Africa, a
disselboom, to which the horses were harnessed. In this cart I stood arrayed in
flowing robes fastened round my middle by a studded belt, with strips of
coloured cloth wound round my legs and sandals on my feet. To my mind the
general effect of the attire was distinctly feminine and I did not like it at
all.
I was glad to observe, however, that the I of those days was anything but
feminine. Indeed I could never have believed that once I was so good-looking,
even over two thousand years ago. I was not very tall but extremely stalwart,
burly almost, with an arm that as I could observe, since it projected from the
sleeve of my lady’s gown, would have done no discredit to a
prize-fighter, and a chest like a bull.
The face also I admired very much. The brow was broad; the black eyes were full
and proud-looking, the features somewhat massive but well-cut and highly
intelligent; the mouth firm and shapely, with lips that were perhaps a trifle
too thick; the hair—well, there was rather a failure in the hair, at
least according to modern ideas, for it curled so beautifully as to suggest
that one of my ancestors might have fallen in love with a person of negroid
origin. However there was lots of it, hanging down almost to the shoulders and
bound about the brow by a very neat fillet of blue cloth with silver studs. The
colour of my skin, I was glad to note, was by no means black, only a light and
pleasing brown such as might have been produced by sunburn. My age, I might
add, was anywhere between five and twenty and five and thirty, perhaps nearer
the latter than the former, at any rate, the very prime of life.
For the rest, I held in my left hand a very stout, long bow of black wood which
seemed to have seen much service, with a string of what looked like catgut, on
which was set a broad-feathered, barbed arrow. This I kept in place with the
fingers of my right hand, on one of which I observed a handsome gold ring with
strange characters carved upon the bezel.
Now for the charioteer.
He was black as night, black as a Sunday hat, with yellow rolling eyes set in a
countenance of extraordinary ugliness and I may add, extraordinary humour. His
big, wide mouth with thick lips ran up the left side of his face towards an ear
that was also big and projecting. His hair, that had a feather stuck in it, was
real nigger wool covering a skull like a cannon ball and I should imagine as
hard. This head, by the way, was set plumb upon the shoulders, as though it had
been driven down between them by a pile hammer. They were very broad shoulders
suggesting enormous strength, but the gaily-clad body beneath, which was
supported by two bowed legs and large, flat feet, was that of a dwarf who by
the proportions of his limbs Nature first intended for a giant; yes, an
Ethiopian dwarf.
Looking through this remarkable exterior, as it were, I recognized that inside
of it was the soul, or animating principle, of—whom do you think? None
other than my beloved old servant and companion, the Hottentot Hans whose loss
I had mourned for years! Hans himself who died for me, slaying the great
elephant, Jana, in Kendah Land, the elephant I could not hit, and thereby
saving my life. Oh! although I had been obliged to go back to the days of I
knew not what ancient empire to do so in my trance, or whatever it was, I could
have wept with joy at finding him again, especially as I knew by instinct that
as he loved the Allan Quatermain of to-day, so he loved this Egyptian in a
wheeled packing-case, for I may as well say at once that such was my
nationality in the dream.
Now I looked about me and perceived that my chariot was the second of a
cavalcade. Immediately in front of it was one infinitely more gorgeous in which
stood a person who even if I had not known it, I should have guessed to be a
king, and who, as a matter of fact, was none other than the King of kings, at
that time the absolute master of most of the known world, though what his name
may have been, I have no notion. He wore a long flowing robe of purple silk
embroidered with gold and bound in at the waist by a jewelled girdle from which
hung the private, sacred seal; the little “White Seal” that, as I
learned afterwards, was famous throughout the earth.
On his head was a stiff cloth cap, also purple in colour, round which was
fastened a fillet of light blue stuff spotted with white. The best idea that I
can give of its general appearance is to liken it to a tall hat of fashionable
shape, without a brim, slightly squashed in so that it bulged at the top, and
surrounded by a rather sporting necktie. Really, however, it was the
kitaris or headdress of these monarchs worn by them alone. If anyone
else had put on that hat, even by mistake in the dark, well, his head would
have come off with it, that is all.
This king held a bow in his hand with an arrow set upon its string, just as I
did, for we were out hunting, and as I shall have to narrate presently, lions
are no respecters of persons. By his side, leaning against the back of the
chariot, was a tall, sharp-pointed wand of cedar wood with a knob of some green
precious stone, probably an emerald, fashioned to the likeness of an apple.
This was the royal sceptre. Immediately behind the chariot walked several great
nobles. One of them carried a golden footstool, another a parasol, furled at
the moment; another a spare bow and a quiver of arrows, and another a jewelled
fly-whisk made of palm fibre.
The king, I should add, was young, handsome with a curled beard and clear-cut,
high-bred looking features; his face, however, was bad, cruel and stamped with
an air of weariness, or rather, satiety, which was emphasized by the black
circles beneath his fine dark eyes. Moreover pride seemed to emanate from him
and yet there was something in his bearing and glances which suggested fear. He
was a god who knows that he is mortal and is therefore afraid lest at any
moment he may be called upon to lose his godship in his mortality.
Not that he dreaded the perils of the chase; he was too much of a man for that.
But how could he tell lest among all that crowd of crawling nobles, there was
not one who had a dagger ready for his back, or a phial of poison to mix with
his wine or water? He with all the world in the hollow of his hand, was filled
with secret terrors which as I learned since first I seemed to see him thus,
fulfilled themselves at the appointed time. For this man of blood was destined
to die in blood, though not by murder.
The cavalcade halted. Presently a fat eunuch glittering in his gold-wrought
garments like some bronzed beetle in the sunlight, came waddling back towards
me. He was odious and I knew that we hated each other.
“Greeting, Egyptian,” he said, mopping his brow with his sleeve for
the sun was hot. “An honour for you! A great honour! The King of kings
commands your presence. Yes, he would speak with you with his own lips, and
with that abortion of a servant of yours also. Come! Come swiftly!”
“Swift as an arrow, Houman,” I answered laughing, “seeing
that for three moons I, like an arrow, have rested upon the string and flown no
nearer to his Majesty.”
“Three moons!” screeched the eunuch. “Why, many wait three
years and many go to the grave still waiting; bigger men than you, Egyptian,
though I hear you do claim to be of royal blood yonder on the Nile. But talk
not of arrows flying towards the most High, for surely it is ill-omened and
might earn you another honour, that of the string,” and he made a motion
suggestive of a cord encircling his throat. “Man, leave your bow behind!
Would you appear before the King armed? Yes, and your dagger also.”
“Perchance a lion might appear before the King and he does not leave his
claws and teeth behind,” I answered drily as I divested myself of my
weapons.
Then we started, the three of us, leaving the chariot in charge of a soldier.
“Draw your sleeves over your hands,” said the eunuch. “None
must appear before the King showing his hands, and, dwarf, since you have no
sleeves, thrust yours into your robe.”
“What am I to do with my feet?” he answered in a thick, guttural
voice. “Will it offend the King of kings to see my feet, most noble
eunuch?”
“Certainly, certainly,” answered Houman, “since they are ugly
enough to offend even me. Hide them as much as possible. Now we are near, down
on your faces and crawl forward slowly on your knees and elbows, as I do. Down,
I say!”
So down I went, though with anger in my heart, for be it remembered that I, the
modern Allan Quatermain, knew every thought and feeling that passed through the
mind of my prototype.
It was as though I were a spectator at a play, with this difference. I could
read the motives and reflections of this former ego as well as observe
his actions. Also I could rejoice when he rejoiced, weep when he wept and
generally feel all that he felt, though at the same time I retained the power
of studying him from my own modern standpoint and with my own existing
intelligence. Being two we still were one, or being one we still were two,
whichever way you like to put it. Lastly I lacked these powers with reference
to the other actors in the piece. Of these I knew just as much, or as little as
my former self knew, that is if he ever really existed. There was nothing
unnatural in my faculties where they were concerned. I had no insight into
their souls any more than I have into those of the people about me to-day. Now
I hope that I have made clear my somewhat uncommon position with reference to
these pages from the Book of the Past.
Well, preceded by the eunuch and followed by the dwarf, I crawled though the
sand in which grew some thorny plants that pricked my knees and fingers,
towards the person of the Monarch of the World. He had descended from his
chariot by help of a footstool, and was engaged in drinking from a golden cup,
while his attendants stood around in various attitudes of adoration, he who had
handed him the cup being upon his knees. Presently he looked up and saw us.
“Who are these?” he asked in a high voice that yet was not
unmusical, “and why do you bring them into my presence?”
“May it please the King,” answered our guide, knocking his head
upon the ground in a very agony of humiliation, “may it please the
King——”
“It would please me better, dog, if you answered my question. Who are
they?”
“May it please the King, this is the Egyptian hunter and noble,
Shabaka.”
“I hear,” said his Majesty with a gleam of interest in his tired
eyes, “and what does this Egyptian here?”
“May it please the King, the King bade me bring him to the presence, but
now when the chariots halted.”
“I forgot; you are forgiven. But who is that with him? Is it a man or an
ape?”
Here I screwed my head round and saw that my slave in his efforts to obey the
eunuch’s instructions and hide his feet, had made himself into a kind of
ball, much as a hedgehog does, except that his big head appeared in front of
the ball.
“O King, that I understand is the Egyptian’s servant and
charioteer.”
Again he looked interested, and exclaimed,
“Is it so? Then Egypt must be a stranger country than I thought if such
ape-men live there. Stand up, Egyptian, and bid your ape stand up also, for I
cannot hear men who speak with their mouths in the dust.”
So I rose and saluted by lifting both my hands and bowing as I had observed
others do, trying, however, to keep them covered by my sleeves. The King looked
me up and down, then said briefly,
“Set out your name and the business that brought you to my city.”
“May the King live for ever,” I replied. “As this lord
said,” and I pointed to the eunuch——
“He is not a lord but a dog,” interrupted the Monarch, “who
wears the robe of women. But continue.”
“As this dog who wears the robe of women said”—here the King
laughed, but the eunuch, Houman, turned green with rage and glowered at
me—“my name is Shabaka. I am a descendant of the Ethiopian king of
Egypt of that same name.”
“It seems from all I hear that there are too many descendants of kings in
Egypt. When I visit that land which perhaps soon I must do with an army at my
back,” here he stared at me coldly, “it may be well to lessen their
number. There is a certain Peroa for instance.”
He paused, but I made no answer, since Peroa was my father’s cousin and
of the fallen Royal House; also the protector of my youth.
“Well, Shabaka,” he went on, “in Persia royal blood is common
also, though some of us think it looks best when it is shed. What else are
you?”
“A slayer of royal beasts, O King of kings, a hunter of lions and of
elephants,” (this statement interested me, Allan Quatermain, intensely,
showing me as it did that our tastes are very persistent); “also when I
am at home, a breeder of cattle and a grower of grain.”
“Good trades, all of them, Shabaka. But why came you here?”
“Idernes the satrap of Egypt, servant of the King of kings, sought for
one who would travel to the East because the King of kings desired to hear of
the hunting of lions in the lands that lie to the south of Egypt towards the
beginnings of the great river. Then I, who desired to see new countries, said,
‘Here am I. Send me.’ So I came and for three moons have dwelt in
the royal city, but till this hour have scarcely so much as seen the face of
the great King, although by many messengers I have announced my presence,
showing them the letters of Idernes giving me safe-conduct. Therefore I propose
to-morrow or the next day to return to Egypt.”
The King said a word and a scribe appeared whom he commanded to take note of my
words and let the matter be inquired of, since some should suffer for this
neglect, a saying at which I saw Houman and certain of the nobles turn pale and
whisper to each other.
“Now I remember,” he exclaimed, “that I did desire Idernes to
send me an Egyptian hunter. Well, you are here and we are about to hunt the
lion of which there are many in yonder reeds, hungry and fierce beasts, since
for three days they have been herded in so that they can kill no food. How many
lions have you slain, Shabaka?”
“Fifty and three in all, O King, not counting the cubs.”
He stared at me, answering with a sneer,
“You Egyptians have large mouths. I have always heard it of you. Well,
to-day we will see whether you can kill a fifty-fourth. In an hour when the sun
begins to sink, the hounds will be loosed in yonder reeds and since the water
is behind them, the lions will come out, and then we shall see.”
Now I saw that the King thought me to be a liar and the blood rose to my head.
“Why wait till the sun begins to sink, O King of kings?” I said.
“Why not enter the reeds, as is our fashion in the Land of Kush, and
rouse the lions from sleep in their own lair?”
Now the King laughed outright and called in a loud voice to his courtiers,
“Do ye hear this boasting Egyptian, who talks of entering the reeds and
facing the lions in their lair, a thing that no man dare do where none can see
to shoot? What say ye now? Shall we ask him to prove his words?”
Some great lord stepped forward, one who was a hunter though he looked little
like it, for the scent on his hair reached me from four paces away and there
was paint upon his face.
“Yes, O King,” he said in a mincing voice, “let him enter and
kill a lion. But if he fail, then let a lion kill him. There are some hungry in
the palace den and it is not fit that the King’s ears should be filled
with empty words by foreigners from Egypt.”
“So be it,” said the King. “Egyptian, you have brought it on
your own head. Prove that you can do what you say and I will give you great
honour. Fail, and to the lions with him who lies of lions. Still,” he
added, “it is not right that you should go alone. Choose therefore one of
these lords to keep you company; he who would put you to the test, if you
will.”
Now I looked at the scented noble who turned pale beneath his paint. Then I
looked at the fat eunuch, Houman, who opened his mouth and gasped like a fish,
and when I had looked, I shook my head and said as though to myself,
“Not so, no woman and no eunuch shall be my companion on this
quest,” whereat the King and all the rest laughed out loud. “The
dwarf and I will go alone.”
“The dwarf!” said the King. “Can he hunt lions also?”
“No, O King, but perchance he can smell them, for otherwise how shall I
find them in that thicket within an hour?”
“Perchance they can smell him. How is the ape-man named?” asked the
King.
“Bes, O King, after the god of the Egyptians whom he resembles.”
“Dare you accompany your master on this hunt, O Bes?” inquired the
King.
Then Bes looked up, rolling his yellow eyes, and answered in his thick and
guttural voice,
“I am my master’s slave and dare I refuse to accompany him? If I
did he might kill me, as the King of kings kills his slaves. It is better to
die with honour by the teeth of a lion, than with dishonour beneath the whip of
a master. So at least we think in Ethiopia.”
“Well spoken, dwarf Bes!” exclaimed the King. “So would I
have all men think throughout the East. Let the words of this Ethiop be written
down and copies of them sent to the satraps of all the provinces that they may
be read to the peoples of the earth. I the King have decreed it.”
CHAPTER V.
THE WAGER
While the scribes were at their work I bowed before the King and prayed his
leave that I and the dwarf Bes might get to ours.
“Go,” he said, “and return here within an hour. If you do not
return tidings of your death shall be sent to the satrap of Egypt to be told to
your wives.”
“I thank the King, but it is needless, for I have no wives, which are ill
company for a hunter.”
“Strange,” he said, “since many women would be glad to name
such a man their husband, at least here among us Easterns.”
Walking backwards and bowing as we went, Bes and I returned to our chariot.
There we stripped off our outer garments till Bes was naked save for his
waistcloth and I was clad only in a jerkin. Then I took my bow, my arrows and
my knife, and Bes took two spears, one light for throwing and the other short,
broad and heavy for stabbing. Thus armed we passed back before the Easterns who
stared at us, and advanced to the edge of the thicket of tall reeds that was
full of lions.
Here Bes took dust and threw it into the air that we might learn from which
quarter the light wind blew.
“We will go against the breeze, Lord,” he said, “that I may
smell the lions before they smell us.”
I nodded, and answered,
“Hearken, Bes. Well may it be that we kill no lions in this place where
it is hard to shoot. Yet I would not return to be thrown to wild beasts by
yonder evil king. Therefore if we fail in this or in any other way, do you kill
me, if you still live.”
He rolled his eyes and grinned.
“Not so, Master. Then we will win through the reeds and lie hid in their
edge till darkness comes, for in them those half-men will never dare to seek
for us. Afterwards we will swim the water and disguise ourselves as jugglers
and try to reach the coast, and so back to Egypt, having learned much. Never
stretch out your hand to Death till he stretches out his to you, which he will
do soon enough, Master.”
Again I nodded and said,
“And if a lion should kill me, Bes, what then?”
“Then, Master, I will kill that lion if I can and go report the matter to
the King.”
“And if he should wish to throw you to the beasts, Bes, what then?”
“Then, first I will drag him down to the greatest of all beasts, he who
waits to devour evil-doers in the Under-world, be they kings or slaves,”
and he stretched out his long arms and made a motion as of clutching a man by
the throat. “Oh! have no fear, Master, I can break him like a stick, and
afterwards we will talk the matter over among the dead, for I shall swallow my
tongue and die also. It is a good trick, Master, which I wish you would
learn.”
Then he took my hand and kissed it and we entered the reeds, I, who was a
hunter, feeling more happy than I had done since we set foot in the East.
Yet the quest was desperate for the reeds were tall and often I could not see
more than a bow’s length in front of me. Presently, however, we found a
path made perchance by game coming down to drink, or by crocodiles coming up to
sleep, and followed it, I with an arrow on my string and Bes with the throwing
spear in his right hand and the stabbing spear in his left, half a pace ahead
of me. On we crept, Bes drawing in the air through his great nostrils as a
hound might do, till suddenly he stopped and sniffed towards the north.
“I smell lion near,” he whispered, searching among the reed stems
with his eyes. “I see lion,” he whispered again, and pointed, but I
could see nothing save the stems of the reeds.
“Rouse him,” I whispered back, “and I will shoot as he
bounds.”
Then Bes poised the spear, shook it till it quivered, and threw. There was a
roar and a lioness appeared with the spear fast in her flank. I loosed the
arrow but it cut into the thick reeds and stuck there.
“Forward!” whispered Bes, “for where woman is, there look for
man. The lion will be near.”
We crept on, Bes stopping to cut the arrow from a reed and set it back in the
quiver, for it was a good arrow made by himself. But now he shifted the broad
spear to his right hand and in his left held his knife. We heard the wounded
lioness roar not far away.
“She calls her man to help her,” whispered Bes, and as the words
left his lips the reeds down wind began to sway, for we were smelt.
They swayed, they parted and, half seen, half hid between their stems, appeared
the head of a great, black-maned lion. I drew the string and shot, this time
not in vain, for I heard the arrow thud upon his hide. Then before I could set
another he was on us, reared upon his hind legs and roaring. As I drew my
dagger he struck at me, but I bent down and his paw went over my head. Then his
weight came against me and I fell beneath him, stabbing him in the belly as I
fell. I saw his mighty jaws open to crush my head. Then they shut again and
through them burst a whine like that of a hurt dog.
Bes had driven his spear into the lion’s breast, so deep that the point
of it came out through the back. Still he was not dead, only now it was Bes he
sought. The dwarf ran at him as he reared up again, and casting his great arms
about the brute’s body, wrestled with him as man with man.
Then it was, for the first time I think, that I learned all the
Ethiopian’s strength. For he, a dwarf, threw that lion on its back and
thrusting his big head beneath the jaws, struggled with it madly. I was up, the
knife still in my hand, and oh! I too was strong. Into the throat I drove it,
dragging it this way and that, and lo! the lion moaned and died and his blood
gushed out over both of us. Then Bes sat up and laughed, and I too laughed,
since neither of us had more than scratches and we had done what men could
scarcely do.
“Do you remember, Master,” said Bes when he had finished laughing,
as he wiped his brow with some damp moss, “how, once far away up the Nile
you charged a mad elephant with a spear and saved me who had fallen, from being
trampled to death?”
I, Shabaka, answered that I did. (And I, Allan Quatermain, observing all these
things in my psychic trance in the museum of Ragnall Castle, reflected that I
also remembered how a certain Hans had saved me from a certain mad elephant, to
wit, Jana, not so long before, which just shows how things come round.)
“Yes,” went on Bes, “you saved me from that elephant, though
it seemed death to you. And, Master, I will tell you something now. That very
morning I had tried to poison you, only you would not wait to eat because the
elephants were near.”
“Did you?” I asked idly. “Why?”
“Because two years before you captured me in battle with some of my
people, and as I was misshapen, or for pity’s sake, spared my life and
made me your slave. Well, I who had been a chief, a very great chief, Master,
did not wish to remain a slave and did wish to avenge my people’s blood.
Therefore I tried to poison you, and that very day you saved my life, offering
for it your own.”
“I think it was because I wanted the tusks of the elephant, Bes.”
“Perhaps, Master, only you will remember that this elephant was a young
cow and had no tusks worth anything. Still had it carried tusks, it might have
been so, since one white tusk is worth many black dwarfs. Well, to-day I have
paid you back. I say it lest you should forget that had it not been for me,
that lion would have eaten you.”
“Yes, Bes, you have paid me back and I thank you.”
“Master, hitherto I always thought you one who worshipped Maat, goddess
of Truth. Now I see that you worship the god of Lies, whoever he may be, that
god who dwells in the breasts of women and most men, but has no name. For,
Master, it was you who saved me from the lion and not I you,
since you cut its throat at the last. So that debt of mine is still to pay and
by the great Grasshopper which we worship in my country, who is much better
than all the gods of the Egyptians put together, I swear that I will pay it
soon, or mayhap ten thousand years hence. At the last it shall be paid.”
“Why do you worship a grasshopper and why is he better than the gods of
the Egyptians?” I asked carelessly, for I was tired and his talk amused
me while we rested.
“We worship the Grasshopper, Master, because he jumps with men’s
spirits from one life to another, or from this world to the next, yes, right
through the blue sky. And he is better than your Egyptian gods because they
leave you to find your own way there, and then eat you alive, that is if you
have tried to poison people, as of course we have all done. But, Master, we are
fresh again now, so let us be going, for the hour will soon be finished. Also
when she has eaten the spear handle, that lioness may return.”
“Yes,” I said; “let us go and report to the King of kings
that we have killed a lion.”
“Master, it is not enough. Even common kings believe little that they do
not see, wherefore it is certain that a King of kings will believe nothing and
still more certain that he will not come here to look. So as we cannot carry
the lion, we must take a bit of it,” and straightway he cut off the end
of the brute’s tail.
Following the crocodile path, presently we reached the edge of the reeds
opposite to the camp where the King now sat in state beneath a purple pavilion
that had been reared, eating a meal, with his courtiers standing at a distance
and looking very hungry.
Out of the reeds bounded Bes, naked and bloody, waving the lion’s tail
and singing some wild Ethiopian chant, while I, also bloody and half naked, for
the lion’s claws had torn my jerkin off me, followed with bow unstrung.
The King looked up and saw us.
“What! Do you live, Egyptian?” he asked. “Of a surety I
thought that by now you would be dead.”
“It was the lion that died, O King,” I answered, pointing to Bes
who, having ceased from his song, was jumping about carrying the beast’s
tail in his mouth as a dog carries a bone.
“It seems that this Egyptian has killed a lion,” said the King to
one of his lords, him of the painted face and scented hair.
“May it please the King,” he answered, bowing, “a tail is not
the whole beast and may have been taken thither, or cut from a lion lying dead
already. The King knows that the Egyptians are great liars.”
So he spoke because he was jealous of the deed.
“These men look as though they had met a live one, not one that is
dead,” said the King, scanning our blood-stained shapes. “Still, as
you doubt it, you will wish to put the matter to the proof. Therefore, Cousin,
take six men with you, enter the reeds and search. In that soft ground it will
be easy to follow their footmarks.”
“It is dangerous, O King,” began the prince, for such he was, no
less.
“And therefore the task will be the more to your taste, Cousin. Go now,
and be swift.”
So six hunters were called and the prince went, cursing me beneath his breath
as he passed us. For he was terribly afraid, and with reason. Suddenly Bes
ceased from his antics and prostrating himself, cried,
“A boon, O King. This noble lord throws doubt upon my master’s
word. Suffer that I may lead him to where the lion lies dead, since otherwise
wandering in those reeds the great King’s cousin might come to harm and
the great King be grieved.”
“I have many cousins,” said the King. “Still go if you wish,
Dwarf.”
So Bes ran after the prince and catching him up, tapped him on the shoulder
with the lion’s tail to point out the way. Then they vanished into the
reeds and I went to the chariot to wash off the blood from my body and clothes.
As I fastened my robe I heard a sound of roaring, then one scream, after which
all grew still. Now I drew near to the reeds and stood between them and the
King’s camp.
Presently on their edge appeared Bes dancing and singing as before, but this
time he held a lion’s tail in either hand. After him came the six hunters
dragging between them the body of the lion we had killed. They staggered with
it towards the King, and I followed.
“I see the dwarf,” he said. “I see the dead lion and I see
the hunters. But where is my cousin? Make report, O Bes.”
“O King of kings,” replied Bes, “the mighty prince your
cousin lies flat yonder beneath the body of that lion’s wife. She sprang
upon him and killed him, and I sprang upon her and killed her with my spear.
Here is her tail, O King of kings.”
“Is this true?” he asked of the hunters.
“It is true, O King,” answered their captain. “The lioness,
which was wounded, leapt upon the prince, choosing him although he was behind
us all. Then this dwarf leapt upon the lioness, being behind the prince and
nearest to him, and drove his spear through her shoulders to her heart. So we
brought the first lion as the King commanded us, since we could carry no
more.”
The face of the King grew red with rage.
“Seven of my people and one black dwarf!” he exclaimed. “Yet
the lioness kills my cousin and the dwarf kills the lioness. Such is the tale
that will go to Egypt concerning the hunters of the King of the world. Seize
those men, Guards, and let them be fed to the wild beasts in the palace
dens.”
At once the unfortunates were seized and led away. Then the King called Bes to
him, and taking the gold chain he wore about his neck, threw it over his head,
thereby, though I knew nothing of it at the time, conferring upon him some
noble rank. Next he called to me and said,
“It would seem that you are skilled in the use of the bow and in the
hunting of lions, Egyptian. Therefore I will honour you, for this afternoon
your chariot shall drive with my chariot, and we will hunt side by side.
Moreover, I will lay you a wager as to which of us will kill the most lions,
for know, Shabaka, that I also am skilled in the use of the bow, more skilled
than any among the millions of my subjects.”
“Then, O King, it is of little use for me to match myself against you,
seeing that I have met men who can shoot better than I do, or, since in the
East all must speak nothing but the truth, not being liars as the dead prince
said we Egyptians are, one man.”
“Who was that man, Shabaka?”
“The Prince Peroa, O King.”
The King frowned as though the name displeased him, then answered,
“Am I not greater than this Peroa and cannot I therefore shoot
better?”
“Doubtless, O King of kings, and therefore how can I who shoot worse than
Peroa, match myself against you?”
“For which reason I will give you odds, Shabaka. Behold this rope of
rose-hued pearls I wear. They are unequalled in the whole world, for twenty
years the merchants sought them in the days of my father; half of them would
buy a satrapy. I wager them”—here the listening nobles gasped and
the fat eunuch, Houman, held up his hands in horror.
“Against what, O King?”
“Your slave Bes, to whom I have taken a fancy.”
Now I trembled and Bes rolled his yellow eyes.
“Your pardon, O King of kings,” I said, “but it is not
enough. I am a hunter and to such, priceless pearls are of little use. But to
me that dwarf is of much use in my hunting.”
“So be it, Shabaka, then I will add to the wager. If you win, together
with the pearls I will give you the dwarf’s weight in solid gold.”
“The King is bountiful,” I answered, “but it is not enough,
for even if I win against one who can shoot better than Peroa, which is
impossible, what should I do with so much gold? Surely for the sake of it I
should be murdered or ever I saw the coasts of Egypt.”
“What shall I add then?” asked the King. “The most beauteous
maiden in the House of Women?”
I shook my head. “Not so, O King, for then I must marry who would remain
single.”
“There is no need, you might sell her to your friend, Peroa. A
satrapy?”
“Not so, O King, for then I must govern it, which would keep me from my
hunting, until it pleased the King to take my head.”
“By the name of the holy ones I worship what then do you ask added to the
pearls and the pure gold?”
Now I tried to bethink me of something that the King could not grant, since I
had no wish for this match which my heart warned me would end in trouble. As no
thought came to me I looked at Bes and saw that he was rolling his eyes towards
the six doomed hunters who were being led away, also in pretence of driving off
a fly, pointing to them with one of the lion tails. Then I remembered that a
decree once uttered by the King of the East could not be altered, and saw a
road of escape.
“O King,” I said, “together with the pearls and the gold I
ask that the lives of those six hunters be added to the wager, to be spared if
by chance I should win.”
“Why?” asked the King amazed.
“Because they are brave men, O King, and I would not see the bones of
such cracked by tame beasts in a cage.”
“Is my judgment registered?” asked the King.
“Not yet, O King,” answered the head scribe.
“Then it has no weight and can be suspended without the breaking of the
law. Shabaka, thus stands our wager. If I kill more lions than you do this day,
or, should but two be slain, I kill the first, or should none be slain, I plant
more arrows in their bodies, I take your slave, Bes the dwarf, to be my slave.
But should you have the better of me in any of these ways, then I give to you
this girdle of rose pearls and the weight of the dwarf Bes in gold and the six
hunters free of harm, to do with what you will. Let it be recorded, and to the
hunt.”
Soon Bes and I were in our chariot which by command took place in line with
that of the King, but at a distance of some thirty steps. Bending over the
dwarf who drove, I spoke with him, saying,
“Our luck is ill to-day, Bes, seeing that before the end of it we may
well be parted.”
“Not so, Master, our luck is good to-day seeing that before the end of it
you will be the richer by the finest pearls in the whole world, by my weight in
pure gold (and Master, I am twice as heavy as the king thought and will stuff
myself with twenty pounds of meat before the weighing, if I have the chance, or
at least with water, though in this hot place that will not last for long), and
by six picked huntsmen, brave men as you thought, who will serve to escort us
and our treasure to the coast.”
“First I must win the match, Bes.”
“Which you could do with one eye blinded, Master, and a sore finger.
Kings think that they can shoot because all the worms that crawl about them and
are named men, dare not show themselves their betters. Oh! I have heard tales
in yonder city. There have been days when this Lord of the world has missed six
lions with as many arrows, and they seated smiling in his face, being but tamed
brutes brought from far in cages of wood, yes, smiling like cats in the sun.
Look you, Master, he drinks too much wine and sits up too late in his
Women’s house—there are three hundred of them there,
Master—to shoot as you and I can. If you doubt it, look at his eyes and
hands. Oh! the pearls and the gold and the men are yours, and that painted
prince who mocked us is where he ought to be—dead in the mud.
“Did I tell you how I managed that, Master? As you know better than I do,
lions hate those that have on them the smell of their own blood. Therefore,
while I pointed out the way to him, I touched the painted prince with the
bleeding tail of that which we killed, pretending that it was by chance, for
which he cursed me, as well he might. So when we came to the dead lion and, as
I had expected, met there the lioness you had wounded, she charged through the
hunters at him who smelt of her husband, and bit his head off.”
“But, Bes, you smelt of him also, and worse.”
“Yes, Master, but that painted cousin of the King came first. I kept well
behind him, pretending to be afraid,” and he chuckled quietly, adding,
“I expect that he is now telling an angry tale about me to Osiris, or to
the Grasshopper that takes him there, as it may happen.”
“These Easterns worship neither Osiris, nor your Grasshopper, Bes, but a
flame of fire.”
“Then he is telling the tale to the fire, and I hope that it will get
tired and burn him.”
So we talked merrily enough because we had done great deeds and thought that we
had outwitted the Easterns and the King, not knowing all their craft. For none
had told us that that man who hunted with the King and yet dared to draw arrow
upon the quarry before the King should be put to death as one who had done
insult to his Majesty. This that royal fox remembered and therefore was sure
that he would win the wager.
Now the chariots turned and passing down a path came to an open space that was
cleared of reeds. Here they halted, that of the King and my own side by side
with ten paces between them, and those of the court behind. Meanwhile huntsmen
with dogs entered the great brake far away to the right and left of us, also in
front, so that the lions might be driven backwards and forwards across the open
space.
Soon we heard the hounds baying on all sides. Then Bes made a sucking noise
with his great lips and pointed to the edge of the reeds in front of us some
sixty paces away. Looking, I saw a yellow shape creeping along between their
dark stems, and although the shot was far, forgetting all things save I was a
hunter and there was my game, I drew the arrow to my ear, aimed and loosed,
making allowance for its fall and for the wind.
Oh! that shot was good. It struck the lion in the body and pierced him through.
Out he came, roaring, rolling, and tearing at the ground. But by now I had
another arrow on the string, and although the King lifted his bow, I loosed
first. Again it struck, this time in the throat, and that lion groaned and
died.
The King looked at me angrily, and from the court behind rose a murmur of
wonder mingled with wrath, wonder at my marksmanship, and wrath because I had
dared to shoot before the King.
“The wager looks well for us,” muttered Bes, but I bade him be
silent, for more lions were stirring.
Now one leapt across the open space, passing in front of the King and within
thirty paces of us. He shot and missed it, sending his shaft two spans above
its back. Then I shot and drove the arrow through it just where the head joins
the neck, cutting the spine, so that it died at once.
Again that murmur went up and the King struck the charioteer on the head with
his clenched fist, crying out that he had suffered the horses to move and
should be scourged for causing his hand to shake.
This charioteer, although he was a lord—since in the East men of high
rank waited on the King like slaves and even clipped his nails and
beard—craved pardon humbly, admitting his fault.
“It is a lie,” whispered Bes. “The horses never stirred. How
could they with those grooms holding their heads? Nevertheless, Master, the
pearls are as good as round your neck.”
“Silence,” I answered. “As we have heard, in the East all men
speak the truth; it is only Egyptians who lie. Also in the East men’s
necks are encircled with bowstrings as well as pearls, and ears are
long.”
The hounds continued to bay, drawing nearer to us. A lioness bounded out of the
reeds, ran towards the King’s chariot and as though amazed, sat down like
a dog, so near that a man might have hit it with a stone. The King shot short,
striking it in the fore-paw only, whereon it shook out the arrow and rushed
back into the reeds, while the court behind cried,
“May the King live for ever! The beast is dead.”
“We shall see if it is dead presently,” said Bes, and I nodded.
Another lion appeared to the right of the King. Again he shot and missed it,
whereon he began to curse and to swear in his own royal oaths, and the
charioteer trembled. Then came the end.
One of the hounds drew quite close and roused the lioness that had been pricked
in the foot. She turned and killed it with a blow of her paw, then, being mad,
charged straight at the King’s chariot. The horses reared, lifting the
grooms off their feet. The King shot wildly and fell backwards out of the
chariot, as even Kings of the world must do when they have nothing left to
stand on. The lioness saw that he was down and leapt at him, straight over the
chariot. As she leapt I shot at her in the air and pierced her through the
loins, paralysing her, so that although she fell down near the King, she could
not come at him to kill him.
I sprang from my chariot, but before I could reach the lioness hunters had run
up with spears and stabbed her, which was easy as she could not move.
The King rose from the ground, for he was unharmed, and said in a loud voice,
“Had not that shaft of mine gone home, I think that the East would have
bowed to another lord to-night.”
Now, forgetting that I was speaking to the King of the earth, forgetting the
wager and all besides, I exclaimed,
“Nay, your shaft missed; mine went home,” whereon one of the
courtiers cried,
“This Egyptian is a liar, and calls the King one!”
“A liar?” I said astonished. “Look at the arrow and see from
whose quiver it came,” and I drew one from my own of the Egyptian make
and marked with my mark.
Then a tumult broke out, all the courtiers and eunuchs talking at once, yet all
bowing to the mud-stained person of the King, like ears of wheat to a tree in a
storm. Not wishing to urge my claims further, for my part I returned to the
chariot and the hunting being done, as I supposed, unstrung my bow which I
prized above all things, and set it in its case.
While I was thus employed the eunuch Houman approached me with a sickly smile,
saying,
“The King commands your presence, Egyptian, that you may receive your
reward.”
I nodded, saying that I would come, and he returned.
“Bes,” I said when he was out of hearing, “my heart sinks. I
do not trust that King who I think means mischief.”
“So do I, Master. Oh! we have been great fools. When a god and a man
climb a tree together, the man should allow the god to come first to the top,
and thence tell the world that he is a god.”
“Yes,” I answered, “but who ever sees Wisdom until she is
flying away? Now perhaps, the god being the stronger, will cast down the
man.”
Then both together we advanced towards the King, leaving the chariot in charge
of soldiers. He was seated on a gilded chair which served him as a throne, and
behind him were his officers, eunuchs and attendants, though not all of them,
since at a little distance some of them were engaged in beating the lord who
had served as his charioteer upon the feet with rods. We prostrated ourselves
before him and waited till he spoke. At length he said,
“Shabaka the Egyptian, we made a wager with you, of which you will
remember the terms. It seems that you have won the wager, since you slew two
lions, whereas we, the King, slew but one, that which leapt upon us in the
chariot.”
Here Bes groaned at my side and I looked up.
“Fear nothing,” he went on, “it shall be paid.” Here he
snatched off the girdle of priceless, rose-hued pearls and threw it in my face.
“At the palace too,” he went on, “the dwarf shall be set in
the scales and his full weight in pure gold shall be given to you. Moreover,
the lives of the six hunters are yours, and with them the men
themselves.”
“May the King live for ever!” I exclaimed, feeling that I must say
something.
“I hope so,” he answered cruelly, “but, Egyptian, you shall
not, who have broken the laws of the land.”
“In what way, O King?” I asked.
“By shooting at the lions before the King had time to draw his bow, and
by telling the King that he lied to his face, for both of which things the
punishment is death.”
Now my heart swelled till I thought it would burst with rage. Then of a sudden,
a certain spirit entered into me and I rose to my feet and said,
“O King, you have declared that I must die and as this is so, I will
kneel to you no more who soon shall sup at the table of Osiris, and there be
far greater than any king, going before him with clean hands. Is it not your
law that he who is condemned to die has first the right to set out his case for
the honour of his name?”
“It is,” said the King, I think because he was curious to hear what
I had to say. “Speak on.”
“O King, although my blood is as high as your own, of that I say nothing,
for at the wish of your satrap I came to the East from Egypt as a hunter, to
show you how we of Egypt kill lions and other beasts. For three months I have
waited in the royal city seeking admission to the presence of the King, and in
vain. At length I was bidden to this hunt when I was about to depart to my own
land, and being taunted by your servants, entered the reeds with my slave, and
there slew a lion. Then it pleased you to thrust a wager upon me which I did
not wish to take, as to which of us would shoot the most lions; a wager as I
now understand you did not mean that I should win, whatever might be my skill,
since you thought I knew that I must shoot at nothing till you had first shot
and killed the beasts or scared them away.
“So I matched myself against you, as hunter against hunter, for in the
field, as before the gods, all are equal, not as a slave against a king who is
determined to avenge defeat by death. We were posted and the lions came. I shot
at those which appeared opposite to me, or upon my side, leaving those that
appeared opposite to you, or on your side unshot at, as is the custom of
hunters. My skill, or my fortune, was better than yours and I killed, whereas
you missed or only wounded. In the end a lioness sprang at you and I shot it
lest it should kill you; as could easily be proved by the arrow in its body.
Now you say that I must die because I have broken some laws of yours which men
should be ashamed to make, and to save your honour, pay me what I have won,
knowing that pearls and gold and slaves are of no value to a dying man and can
be taken back again. That is all the story.
“Yet I would add one word. You Easterns have two sayings which you teach
to your children; that they should learn to shoot with the bow, and to tell the
truth. O King, they are my last lessons to you. Learn to shoot with the
bow—which you cannot do, and to tell the truth which you have not done.
Now I have spoken and am ready to die and I thank you for the patience with
which you have heard my words, that, as the King does not live for ever,
I hope one day to repeat to you more fully beyond the grave.”
Now at this bold speech of mine all those nobles and attendants gasped, for
never had they heard such words addressed to his Majesty. The King turned red
as though with shame, but made no answer, only he asked of those about him.
“What fate for this man?”
“Death, O King!” they cried with one voice.
“What death?” he asked again.
Then his Councillors consulted together and one of them answered,
“The slowest known to our law, death by the boat.”
Hearing this and not knowing what was meant, it came into my mind that I was to
be turned adrift in a boat and there left to starve.
“Behold the reward of good hunting!” I mocked in my rage. “O
King, because of this deed of shame I call upon you the curse of all the gods
of all the peoples. Henceforth may your sleep be ever haunted by evil dreams of
what shall follow the last sleep, and in the end may you also die in
blood.”
The King opened his mouth as though to answer, but from it came nothing but a
low cry of fear. Then guards rushed up and seized me.
CHAPTER VI.
THE DOOM OF THE BOAT
The guards led me to my chariot and thrust me into it, and with me Bes. I asked
them if they would murder him also, to which the eunuch, Houman, answered No,
since he had committed no crime, but that he must go with me to be weighed.
Then soldiers took the horses by the bridles and led them, while others, having
first snatched away my bow and all our other weapons, surrounded the chariot
lest we should escape. So Bes and I were able to talk together in a Libyan
tongue that none of them understood, even if they heard our words.
“Your life is spared,” I said to him, “that the King may take
you as a slave.”
“Then he will take an ill slave, Master, since I swear by the Grasshopper
that within a moon I will find means to kill him, and afterwards come to join
you in a land where men hunt fair.”
I smiled and Bes went on,
“Now I wish I had time to teach you that trick of swallowing your own
tongue, since perhaps you will need it in this boat of which they talk.”
“Did you not say to me an hour or two ago, Bes, that we are fools to
stretch out our hands to Death until he stretches out his to us? I will not die
until I must—now.”
“Why ‘now,’ Master, seeing that only this afternoon you bade
me kill you rather than let you be thrown to the wild beasts?” he asked
peering at me curiously.
“Do you remember the old hermit, the holy Tanofir, who dwells in a cell
over the sepulchre of the Apis bulls in the burial ground of the desert near to
Memphis, Bes?”
“The magician and prophet who is the brother of your grandfather, Master,
and the son of a king; he who brought you up before he became a hermit? Yes, I
know him well, though I have seldom been very near to him because his eyes
frighten me, as they frightened Cambyses the Persian when Tanofir cursed him
and foretold his doom after he had stabbed the holy Apis, saying that by a
wound from that same sword in his own body he should die himself, which thing
came to pass. As they have frightened many another man also.”
“Well, Bes, when yonder king told me that I must die, fear filled me who
did not wish to die thus, and after the fear came a blackness in my mind. Then
of a sudden in that blackness I saw a picture of Tanofir, my great uncle,
seated in a sepulchre looking towards the East. Moreover I heard him speak, and
to me, saying, ‘Shabaka, my foster-son, fear nothing. You are in great
danger but it will pass. Speak to the great King all that rises in your heart,
for the gods of Vengeance make use of your tongue and whatever you prophesy to
him shall be fulfilled.’ So I spoke the words you heard and I feared
nothing.”
“Is it so, Master? Then I think that the holy Tanofir must have entered
my heart also. Know that I was minded to leap upon that king and break his
neck, so that all three of us might end together. But of a sudden something
seemed to tell me to leave him alone and let things go as they are fated. But
how can the holy Tanofir who grows blind with age, see so far?”
“I do not know, Bes, save that he is not as are other men, for in him is
gathered all the ancient wisdom of Egypt. Moreover he lives with the gods while
still upon earth, and like the gods can send his Ka, as we Egyptians
call the spirit, or invisible self which companions all from the cradle to the
grave and afterwards, whither he will. So doubtless to-day he sent it hither to
me whom he loves more than anything on earth. Also I remember that before I
entered on this journey he told me that I should return safe and sound.
Therefore, Bes, I say I fear nothing.”
“Nor do I, Master. Yet if you see me do strange things, or hear me speak
strange words, take no note of them, since I shall be but playing a part as I
think wisest.”
After this we talked of that day’s adventure with the lions, and of
others that we had shared together, laughing merrily all the while, till the
soldiers stared at us as though we were mad. Also the fat eunuch, Houman, who
was mounted on an ass, rode up and said,
“What, Egyptian who dared to twist the beard of the Great King, you
laugh, do you? Well, you will sing a different song in the boat to that which
you sing in the chariot. Think of my words on the eighth day from this.”
“I will think of them, Eunuch,” I answered, looking at him fiercely
in the eyes, “but who knows what kind of a song you will be singing
before the eighth day from this?”
“What I do is done under the authority of the ancient and holy Seal of
Seals,” he answered in a quavering voice, touching the little cylinder of
white shell which I had noted upon the person of the King, but that now hung
from a gold chain about the eunuch’s neck.
Then he made the sign which Easterns use to avert evil and rode off again,
looking very frightened.
So we came to the royal city and went up to a wonderful palace. Here we were
taken from the chariot and led into a room where food and drink in plenty were
given to me as though I were an honoured guest, which caused me to wonder. Bes
also, seated on the ground at a distance, ate and drank, for his own reasons
filling himself to the throat as though he were a wineskin, until the serving
slaves mocked at him for a glutton.
When we had finished eating, slaves appeared bearing a wooden framework from
which hung a great pair of scales. Also there appeared officers of the
King’s Treasury, carrying leather bags which they opened, breaking the
seals to show that the contents were pure gold coin. They set a number of these
bags on one of the scales, and then ordered Bes to seat himself in the other.
So much heavier did he prove than they expected him to be, that they were
obliged to send back to the Treasury to fetch more bags of gold, for although
Bes was so short in height, his weight was that of a large man. One of the
treasurers grumbled, saying he should have been weighed before he had eaten and
drunk. But the officer to whom he spoke grinned and answered that it mattered
little, since the King was heir to criminals and that these bags would soon
return to the Treasury, only they would need washing first, a remark that made
me wonder.
At length, when the scales were even, the six hunters whose lives I had won and
who had been given to me as slaves, were brought in and ordered to shoulder the
bags of gold. I too was seized and my hands were bound behind me. Then I was
led out in charge of the eunuch Houman, who informed me with a leer that it
would be his duty to attend to my comfort till the end. With him were four
black men all dressed in the same way. These, he said, were the executioners.
Lastly came Bes watched by three of the king’s guards armed with spears,
lest he should attempt to rescue me or to do anyone a mischief.
Now my heart began to sink and I asked Houman what was to happen to me.
“This, O Egyptian slayer of lions. You will be laid upon a bed in a
little boat upon the river and another boat will be placed over you, for these
boats are called the Twins, Egyptian, in such a fashion that your head and your
hands will project at one end and your feet at the other. There you will be
left, comfortable as a baby in its cradle, and twice every day the best of food
and drink will be brought to you. Should your appetite fail, moreover, it will
be my duty to revive it by pricking your eyes with the point of a knife until
it returns. Also after each meal I shall wash your face, your hands and your
feet with milk and honey, lest the flies that buzz about them should suffer
hunger, and to preserve your skin from burning by the sun. Thus slowly you will
grow weaker and at length fall asleep. The last one who went into the
boat—he, unlucky man, had by accident wandered into the court of the
House of Women and seen some of the ladies there unveiled—only lived for
twelve days, but you, being so strong, may hope to last for eighteen. Is there
anything more that I can tell you? If so, ask it quickly for we draw near to
the river.”
Now when I heard this and understood all the horror of my fate, I forgot the
vision of my great uncle, the holy Tanofir, and his comfortable prophecies, and
my heart failed me altogether, so that I stood stock still.
“What, Lion-hunter and Bearder of kings, do you think it is too early to
go to bed?” mocked this devilish eunuch. “On with you!” and
he began to beat me about the face with the handle of his fly-whisk.
Then my manhood came back to me.
“When did the King tell you to touch me, you fatted swine?” I
roared, and turning, since I could not reach him with my bound hands, kicked
him in the body with all my strength, so that he fell down, writhing and
screaming with agony. Indeed, had not the executioners leapt upon me, I would
have trampled the life out of him where he lay. But they held me fast and
presently, after he had been sick, Houman recovered enough to come forward
leaning on the shoulders of two guards. Only now he mocked me no more.
We reached a quay just as the sun was setting. There in charge of a one-eyed
black slave, a little square-ended boat floated at the river’s edge,
while on the quay itself lay a similar but somewhat shorter boat, bottom
uppermost. Now the hunters whom I had won in the wager, with many glances of
compassion, for they were brave men and knew that it was I who had saved their
lives, placed the bags of gold in the bottom of the floating boat, and on the
top of these a mattress stuffed with straw. Then the girdle of rose-hued pearls
was made fast about my middle, my hands were untied, I was seized by the
executioners and laid on my back on the mattress, and my wrists and ankles were
fixed by cords to iron rings that were screwed to the thwarts of the boat.
After this the other, shorter boat was laid over me in such a manner that it
did not touch me, leaving my head, my hands and my feet exposed as the eunuch
had said.
While this wicked work was going forward Bes sat on the quay, watching, till
presently, after I had been made fast and covered up, he burst into shouts of
laughter, clapped his hands and began to dance about as though with joy, till
the eunuch, who had now recovered somewhat from my kick, grew curious and asked
him why he behaved thus.
“O noble Eunuch,” he answered, “once I was free and that man
made me a slave, so that for many years I have been obliged to toil for him
whom I hate. Moreover, often he has beaten me and starved me, which was why you
saw me eat so much not long ago, and threatened to kill me, and now at last I
have my revenge upon him who is about to die miserably. That is why I laugh and
sing and dance and clap my hands, O most noble Eunuch, I who shall become the
follower and servant of the glorious King of all the earth, and perhaps your
friend, too, O Eunuch of eunuchs, whose sacred person my brutal master dared to
kick.”
“I understand,” said Houman smiling, though with a twisted face,
“and will make report of all you say to the King, and ask him to grant
that you shall sometimes prick this Egyptian in the eye. Now go spit in his
face and tell him what you think of him.”
So Bes waded into the water which was quite shallow here, and spat into my
face, or pretended to, while amid a torrent of vile language, he interpolated
certain words in the Libyan tongue, which meant,
“O my most beloved father, mother, and other relatives, have no fear.
Though things look very black, remember the vision of the holy Tanofir, who
doubtless allows these things to happen to you to try your faith by direct
order of the gods. Be sure that I will not leave you to perish, or if there
should be no escape, that I will find a way to put you out of your misery and
to avenge you. Yes, yes, I will yet see that accursed swine, Houman, take your
place in this boat. Now I go to the Court to which it seems that this gold
chain gives me a right of entry, or so the eunuch says, but soon I will be back
again.”
Then followed another stream of most horrible abuse and more spitting, after
which he waded back to land and embraced Houman, calling him his best friend.
They went, leaving me alone in the boat save for the guard upon the quay who,
now that darkness had come, soon grew silent. It was lonely, very lonely, lying
there staring at the empty sky with only the stinging gnats for company, and
soon my limbs began to ache. I thought of the poor wretches who had suffered in
this same boat and wondered if their lot would be my lot.
Bes was faithful and clever, but what could a single dwarf do among all these
black-hearted fiends? And if he could do nothing, oh! if he could do nothing!
The seconds seemed minutes, the minutes seemed hours, and the hours seemed
years. What then would the days be, passed in torture and agony while waiting
for a filthy death? Where now were the gods I had worshipped and—was
there any god? Or was man but a self-deceiver who created gods instead of the
gods creating him, because he did not love to think of an eternal blackness in
which he would soon be swallowed up and lost? Well, at least that would mean
sleep, and sleep is better than torment of mind or body.
It came to me, I think, who was so weary. At any rate I opened my eyes to see
that the low moon had vanished and that some of the stars which I knew as a
hunter who had often steered his way by them, had moved a little. While I was
wondering idly why they moved, I heard the tramp of soldiers on the quay and
the voice of an officer giving a command. Then I felt the boat being drawn in
by the cord with which it was attached to the quay. Next the other boat that
lay over me was lifted off, the ropes that bound me were undone and I was set
upon my feet, for already I was so stiff that I could scarcely stand. A voice
which I recognised as that of the eunuch Houman, addressed me in respectful
tones, which made me think I must be dreaming.
“Noble Shabaka,” said the voice, “the Great King commands
your presence at his feast.”
“Is it so?” I answered in my dream. “Then my absence from
their feast will vex the gnats of the river,” a saying at which Houman
and others with him laughed obsequiously.
Next I heard the bags of gold being removed from the boat, after which we
walked away, guards supporting me by either elbow until I found my strength
again, and Houman following just behind, perhaps because he feared my foot if
he went in front.
“What has chanced, Eunuch,” I asked presently, “that I am
disturbed from the bed where I was sleeping so well?”
“I do not know, Lord,” he answered. “I only know that the
King of kings has suddenly commanded that you should be brought before him as a
guest clothed in a robe of honour, even if to do so, you must be awakened from
your rest, yes, to his own royal table, for he holds a feast this night.
Lord,” he went on in a whining voice, “if perchance fortune should
have changed her face to you, I pray you bear no malice to those who, when she
frowned, were forced, yes, under the private Seal of Seals, against their will
to carry out the commands of the King. Be just, O Lord Shabaka.”
“Say no more. I will try to be just,” I answered. “But what
is justice in the East? I only know of it in Egypt.”
Now we reached one of the doors of the palace and I was taken to a chamber
where slaves who were waiting, washed and anointed me with scents, after which
they clad me in a beautiful robe of silk, setting the girdle of rose-hued
pearls about me.
When they had finished, preceded by Houman I was led to a great pillared hall
closed in with silk hangings, where many feasted. Through them I went to a dais
at the head of the hall where between half-drawn curtains surrounded by
cup-bearers and other officers, the King sat in all his glory upon a cushioned
golden throne. He had a glittering wine-cup in his hand and at a glance I saw
that he was drunk, as it is the fashion for these Easterns to be at their great
feasts, for he looked happy and human which he did not do when he was sober. Or
perchance, as sometimes I thought afterwards, he only pretended to be drunk.
Also I saw something else, namely, Bes, wondrously attired with the gold chain
about his neck and wearing a red headdress. He was seated on the carpet before
the throne, and saying things that made the King laugh and even caused the
grave officers behind to smile.
I came to the dais and at a little sign from Bes who yet did not seem to see
me, such a sign as he often made when he caught sight of game before I did, I
prostrated myself. The King looked at me, then asked,
“Who is this?” adding, “Oh, I remember, the Egyptian whose
arrows do not miss, the wonderful hunter whom Idernes sent to me from Memphis,
which I hope to visit ere long. We quarrelled, did we not, Egyptian, something
about a lion?”
“Not so, King,” I answered. “The King was angry and with
justice, because I could not kill a lion before it frightened his
horses.”
This I said because my hours in the boat had made me humble, also because the
words came to my lips.
“Yes, yes, something like that, or at least you lie well. Whatever it may
have been, it is done with now, a mere hunters’ difference,” and
taking from his side his long sceptre that was headed with the great emerald,
he stretched it out for me to touch in token of pardon.
Then I knew that I was safe for he to whom the King has extended his sceptre is
forgiven all crimes, yes, even if he had attempted the royal life. The Court
knew it also, for every man who saw bowed towards me, yes, even the officers
behind the King. One of the cup-bearers too brought me a goblet of the
King’s own wine, which I drank thankfully, calling down health on the
King.
“That was a wonderful shot of yours, Egyptian,” he said,
“when you sent an arrow through the lioness that dared to attack my
Majesty. Yes, the King owes his life to you and he is grateful as you shall
learn. This slave of yours,” and he pointed to Bes in his gaudy attire,
“has brought the whole matter to my mind whence it had fallen, and,
Shabaka,” here he hiccupped, “you may have noted how differently
things look to the naked eye and when seen through a wine goblet. He has told
me a wonderful story—what was the story, Dwarf?”
“May it please the great King,” answered Bes, rolling his big eyes,
“only a little tale of another king of my own country whom I used to
think great until I came to the East and learned what kings could be. That king
had a servant with whom he used to hunt, indeed he was my own father. One day
they were out together seeking a certain elephant whose tusks were bigger than
those of any other. Then the elephant charged the king and my father, at the
risk of his life, killed it and claimed the tusks, as is the custom among the
Ethiopians. But the king who greatly desired those tusks, caused my father to
be poisoned that he might take them as his heir. Only before he died, my
father, who could talk the elephant language, told all the other elephants of
this wickedness, at which they were very angry, because they knew well that
from the beginning of time their tusks have belonged to him who killed them,
and the elephants are a people who do not like ancient laws to be altered. So
the elephants made a league together and when the king next went out hunting,
taking heed of nothing else they rushed at the king and tore him into pieces no
bigger than a finger, and then killed the prince his son, who was behind him.
That is the tale of the elephants who love Law, O King.”
“Yes, yes,” said his Majesty, waking up from a little doze,
“but what became of the great tusks? I should like to have them.”
“I inherited them as my father’s son, O King, and gave them to my
master, who doubtless will send them to you when he gets back to Egypt.”
“A strange tale,” said the King. “A very strange tale which
seems to remind me of something that happened not long ago. What was it? Well,
it does not matter. Egyptian, do you seek any reward for that shot of yours at
the lioness? If so, it shall be given to you. Have you a grudge against anyone,
for instance?”
“O King,” I answered, “I do seek justice against a certain
man. This evening I was led to the bank of the river in charge of the eunuch
Houman, who desired to take me for a row in a boat. On the road, for no offence
he struck me on the head with the handle of his fly-whip. See, here are the
marks of it, O King. Unless the King commanded him to strike me which I do not
remember, I seek justice against this eunuch.”
Now the King grew very angry and cried,
“What! Did the dog dare to strike a freeborn noble Egyptian?”
Here Houman threw himself upon his face in terror and began to babble out I
know not what about the punishment of the boat, which was unlucky for him, for
it put the matter into the King’s mind.
“The boat!” he cried. “Ah! yes, the boat; being so fat you
will fit it well, Eunuch. To the boat with him, and before he enters it a
hundred blows upon the feet with the rods,” and he pointed at him with
his sceptre.
Then guards sprang upon Houman and dragged him away. As he went he clutched at
Bes, but hissing something into his ear, the dwarf bit him through the hand
till he let go. So Houman departed and the King’s guests laughed at the
sight, for he had worked mischief to many.
When he had gone the King stared at me and asked,
“But why did I disturb you from your sleep, Egyptian? Oh! I remember.
This dwarf says that he has seen the fairest woman in the whole world, and the
most learned, some lady of Egypt, but that he does not know her name, that you
alone know her name. I disturbed you that you might tell it to me but if you
have forgotten it, you can go back to your bed and rest there till it returns
to you. There are plenty of boats in the river, Egyptian.”
“The fairest and most learned woman in the world?” I said
astonished. “Who can that be, unless he means the lady Amada?” and
I paused, wishing I had bitten out my tongue before I spoke, for I smelt a
trap.
“Yes, Master,” said Bes in a clear voice. “That was the name,
the lady Amada.”
“Who is this lady Amada?” asked the King, seeming to grow suddenly
sober. “And what is she like?”
“I can tell you that, O King,” said Bes. “She is like a
willow shaken in the wind for slenderness and grace. She has eyes like those of
a buck at gaze; she has lips like rosebuds; she has hair black as the night and
soft as silk, the odour of which floats round her like that of flowers. She has
a voice that whispers like the evening wind, and yet is rich as honey. Oh! she
is beautiful as a goddess and when men see her their hearts melt like wax in
the sun and for a long while they can look upon no other woman, not till the
next day indeed if they meet her in the evening,” and Bes smacked his
thick lips and gazed upwards.
“By the holy Fire,” laughed the King, “I feel my heart
melting already. Say, Shabaka, what do you know of this Amada? Is she married
or a maiden?”
Now I answered because I must, for after all that boat was not far away, nor
did I dare to lie.
“She is married, O King of kings, to the goddess Isis whom she loves
alone.”
“A woman married to a woman, or rather to the Queen of women,” he
answered laughing, “well, that matters little.”
“Nay, O King, it matters much since she is under the protection of Isis
and inviolate.”
“That remains to be seen, Shabaka. I think that I would dare the wrath of
every false goddess in heaven to win such a prize. Learned also, you say,
Shabaka.”
“Aye, O King, full of learning to the finger tips, a prophetess also, one
in whom the divine fire burns like a lamp in a vase of alabaster, one to whom
visions come and who can read the future and the past.”
“Still better,” said the King. “One, then, who would be a
fitting consort for the King of kings, who wearies of fat, round-eyed,
sweetmeat-sucking fools whereof there are hundreds yonder,” and he
pointed towards the House of Women. “Who is this maid’s
father?”
“He is dead but she is the niece of the Prince Peroa, and by birth the
Royal Lady of Egypt, O King.”
“Good, then she is well born also. Hearken, O Shabaka, to-morrow you
start back to Egypt, bearing letters from me to my vassal Peroa, and to my
Satrap Idernes, bidding Peroa to hand over this lady Amada to Idernes and
bidding Idernes to send her to the East with all honour and without delay, that
she may enter my household as one of my wives.”
Now I was filled with rage and horror, and about to refuse this mission when
Bes broke in swiftly,
“Will the King of kings be pleased to give command as to my
master’s safe and honourable escort to Egypt?”
“It is commanded with all things necessary for Shabaka the Egyptian and
the dwarf his servant, with the gold and gems and slaves he won from me in a
wager, and everything else that is his. Let it be recorded.”
Scribes sprang forward and wrote the King’s words down, while like one in
a dream I thought to myself that they could not now be altered. The King
watched them sleepily for a while, then seemed to wake up and grow clear-minded
again. At least he said to me,
“Fortune has shown you smiles and frowns to-day, Egyptian, and the smiles
last. Yet remember that she has teeth behind her lips wherewith to tear out the
throat of the faithless. Man, if you play me false or fail in your mission, be
sure that you shall die and in such a fashion that will make you think of
yonder boat as a pleasant bed, and with you this woman Amada and her uncle
Peroa, and all your kin and hers; yes,” he added with a burst of
shrewdness, “and even that abortion of a dwarf to whom I have listened
because he amused me, but who perhaps is more cunning than he seems.”
“O King of kings,” I said, “I will not be false.” But I
did not add to whom I would be true.
“Good. Ere long I shall visit Egypt, as I have told you, and there I
shall pass judgment on you and others. Till then, farewell. Fear nothing, for
you have my safe-conduct. Begone, both of you, for you weary me. But first
drink and keep the cup, and in exchange, give me that bow of yours which shoots
so far and straight.”
“It is the King’s,” I answered as I pledged him in the
golden, jewelled cup which a butler had handed to me.
Then the curtain fell in front of the throne and chamberlains came forward to
lead me and Bes back to our lodging, one of whom took the cup and bore it in
front of us. Down the hall we went between the feasting nobles who all bowed to
one to whom the Great King had shown favour, and so out of the palace through
the quiet night back to the house where I had dwelt while waiting audience of
the King. Here the chamberlains bade me farewell, giving the cup to Bes to
carry, and saying that on the morrow early my gold should be brought to me
together with all that was needed for my journey, also one who would receive
the bow I had promised to the King, which had already been returned to my
lodgings with everything that was ours. Then they bowed and went.
We entered the house, climbing a stair to an upper chamber. Here Bes barred the
door and the shutters, making sure that none could see or hear us.
Then he turned, threw his arms about me, kissed my hand and burst into tears.
CHAPTER VII.
BES STEALS THE SIGNET
“Oh! my Master,” gulped Bes, “I weep because I am tired, so
take no notice. The day was long and during it twice at least there has been
but the twinkling of an eyelid, but the thickness of a finger nail, but the
weight of a hair between you and death.”
“Yes,” I said, “and you were the eyelid, the finger nail and
the hair.”
“No, Master, not I, but something beyond me. The tool carves the statue
and the hand holds the tool but the spirit guides the hand. Not once only since
the sun rose has my mind been empty as a drum. Then something struck on it,
perhaps the holy Tanofir, perhaps another, and it knew what note to sound. So
it was when I cursed you in the boat. So it was when I walked back with the
eunuch, meaning to kill him on the road, and then remembered that the death of
one vile eunuch would not help you at all, whereas alive he could bring me to
the presence of the King, if I paid him, as I did out of the gold in your purse
which I carried. Moreover he earned his hire, for when the King grew dull, wine
not yet having taken a hold on him, it was he who brought me to his mind as one
who might amuse him, being so ugly and different from others, if only for a few
minutes, after the women dancers had failed to do so.”
“And what happened then, Bes?”
“Then I was fetched and did my juggling tricks with that snake I caught
and tamed, which is in my pouch now. You should not hate it any more, Master,
for it played your game well. After this the King began to talk to me and I saw
that his mind was ill at ease about you whom he knew that he had wronged. So I
told him that story of an elephant that my father killed to save a
king—it grew up in my mind like a toadstool in the night, Master, did
this story of an ungrateful king and what befell him. Then the King became
still more unquiet in his heart about you and asked the eunuch, Houman, where
you were, to which he answered that by his order you were sleeping in a boat
and might not be disturbed. So that arrow of mine missed its mark because the
King did not like to eat his own words and cause you to be brought from out the
boat, whither he had sent you. Now when everything seemed lost, some god, or
perhaps the holy Tanofir who is ever present with me to see that I have not
forgotten him, put it into the King’s mouth to begin to talk about women
and to ask me if I had ever seen any fairer than those dancers whom I met going
out as I came in. I answered that I had not noticed them much because they were
so ugly, as indeed all women had seemed to me since once upon the banks of Nile
I had looked upon one who was as Hathor herself for beauty. The King asked me
who this might be and I answered that I did not know since I had never dared to
ask the name of one whom even my master held to be as a goddess, although as
boy and girl they had been brought up together.
“Then the King saw his opportunity to ease his conscience and inquired of
an old councillor if there were not a law which gave the king power to alter
his decree if thereby he could satisfy his soul and acquire knowledge. The
councillor answered that there was such a law and began to give examples of its
working, till the King cut him short and said that by virtue of it he commanded
that you should be brought out of your bed in the boat and led before him to
answer a question.
“So you were sent for, Master, but I did not go with the messengers,
fearing lest if I did the King would forget all about the matter before you
came. Therefore I stayed and amused him with tales of hunting, till I could not
think of any more, for you were long in coming. Indeed I began to fear lest he
should declare the feast at an end. But at the last, just as he was yawning and
spoke to one of his councillors, bidding him send to the House of Women that
they might make ready to receive him there, you came, and the rest you
know.”
Now I looked at Bes and said,
“May the blessing of all the gods of all the lands be on your head, since
had it not been for you I should now lie in torment in that boat. Hearken,
friend: If ever we reach Egypt again, you will set foot on it, not as a slave
but as a free man. You will be rich also, Bes, that is, if we can take the gold
I won with us, since half of it is yours.”
Bes squatted down upon the floor and looked up at me with a strange smile on
his ugly face.
“You have given me three things, Master,” he said. “Gold,
which I do not want at present; freedom, which I do not want at present and
mayhap, never shall while you live and love me; and the title of friend. This I
do want, though why I should care to hear it from your lips I am not sure,
seeing that for a long while I have known that it was spoken in your heart.
Since you have said it, however, I will tell you something which hitherto I
have hid even from you. I have a right to that name, for if your blood is high,
O Shabaka, so is mine. Know that this poor dwarf whom you took captive and
saved long years ago was more than the petty chief which he declared himself to
be. He was and is by right the King of the Ethiopians and that throne with all
its wealth and power he could claim to-morrow if he would.”
“The King of the Ethiopians!” I said. “Oh! friend Bes, I pray
you to remember that we no longer stand in yonder court lying for our
lives.”
“I speak no lie, O Shabaka, I before you am King of the Ethiopians.
Moreover, I laid that kingship down of my own will and should I so desire, can
take it up again when I will, since the Ethiopians are faithful to their
kings.”
“Why?” I asked, astonished.
“Master, for so I will still call you who am not yet upon the land of
Egypt where you have promised me freedom, do you remember anything strange
about the people of that tribe from among whom you and the Egyptian soldiers
captured me by surprise, because they wished to drive you and your following
from their country?”
Now I thought and answered,
“Yes, one thing. I saw no women in their camp, nor any sign of children.
This I know because I gave orders that such were to be spared and it was
reported to me that there were none, so I supposed that they had fled
away.”
“There were none to fly, Master. That tribe was a brotherhood which had
abjured women. Look on me now. I am misshapen, hideous, am I not? Born thus, it
is said, because before my birth my mother was frightened by a dwarf. Yet the
law of the Ethiopians is that their kings must marry within a year of their
crowning. Therefore I chose a woman to be the queen whom I had long desired in
secret. She scorned me, vowing that not for all the thrones of all the world
would she be mated to a monster, and that if it were done by force she would
kill herself, a saying that went abroad throughout the land. I said that she
had spoken well and sent her in safety from the country, after which I too laid
down my crown and departed with some who loved me, to form a brotherhood of
women-haters further down the Nile, beyond the borders of Ethiopia. There the
Egyptian force of which you were in command, attacked us unprepared, and you
made me your slave. That is all.”
“But why did you do this, Bes, seeing that maidens are many and all would
not have thought thus?”
“Because I wished for that one only, Master; also I feared lest I should
become the father of a breed of twisted dwarfs. So I who was a king am now a
slave, and yet, who knows which way the Grasshopper will jump? One day from a
slave I may again grow into a king. And now let us seek that wherein kings are
as slaves and slaves as kings—sleep.”
So we lay down and slept, I thanking the gods that my bed was not yonder in the
boat upon the great river.
When I woke refreshed, though after all I had gone through on the yesterday my
brain still swam a little, the light was pouring through the carved work of the
shuttered windows. By it I saw Bes seated on the floor engaged in doing
something to his bow, which, as I have said, had been restored to us with our
other weapons, and asked him sleepily what it was.
“Master,” he said, “yonder King demanded your bow and
therefore a bow must be sent to him. But there is no need for it to be that
with which you shot the lions, which, too, you value above anything you have,
seeing that it came down to you from your forefather who was a Pharaoh of
Egypt, and has been your companion from boyhood ever since you were strong
enough to draw it. As you may remember I copied that bow out of a somewhat
lighter wood, which I could bend with ease, and it is the copy that we will
give to the King. Only first I must set your string upon it, for that may have
been noted; also make one or two marks that are on your bow which I am
finishing now, having begun the task with the dawn.”
“You are clever,” I said laughing, “and I am glad. The holy
Tanofir, looking on my bow, once had a vision. It was that an arrow loosed from
it would drink the blood of a great king and save Egypt. But what king and
when, he did not see.”
The dwarf nodded and answered,
“I have heard that tale and so have others. Therefore I play this trick
since it is better that yonder palace dweller should get the arrow than the
bow. There, it is finished to the last scratch, and none, save you and I, would
know them apart. Till we are clear of this cursed land your bow is mine,
Master, and you must find you another of the Eastern make.”
“Master,” I repeated after him. “Say, Bes, did I dream or did
you in truth tell me last night that you are by birth and right the king of a
great country?”
“I told you that, Master and it is true, no dream, since joy and
suffering mixed unseal the lips and from them comes that at times which the
heart would hide. Now I ask a favour of you, that you will speak no more of
this matter either to me or to any other, man or woman, unless I should speak
of it first. Let it be as though it were indeed a dream.”
“It is granted,” I said as I rose and clothed myself, not in my own
garments which had been taken from me in the palace, but in the splendid silken
robes that had been set upon me after I was loosed from the boat. When this was
done and I had washed and combed my long, curling hair, we descended to a lower
chamber and called for the woman of the house to bring us food, of which I ate
heartily. As we finished our meal we heard shouts in the street outside of,
“Make way for the servants of the King!” and looking through the
window-place, saw a great cavalcade approaching, headed by two princes on
horseback.
“Now I pray that yonder Tyrant has not changed his mind and that these do
not come to take me back to the boat,” I said in a low voice.
“Have no fear, Master,” answered Bes, “seeing that you have
touched his sceptre and drunk from his cup which he gave to you. After these
things no harm can happen to you in any land he rules. Therefore be at ease and
deal with these fellows proudly.”
A minute later two princes entered followed by slaves who bore many things,
among them those hide bags filled with gold that had been set beneath me in the
boat. The elder of them bowed, greeting me with the title of
“Lord,” and I bowed back to him. Then he handed me certain rolls
tied up with silk and sealed, which he said I was to deliver as the King had
commanded to the King’s Satrap in Egypt, and to the Prince Peroa. Also he
gave me other letters addressed to the King’s servants on the road and
written on tablets of clay in a writing I could not read, with all of which I
touched my forehead in the Eastern fashion.
After this he told me that by noon all would be ready for my journey which I
should make with the rank of the King’s Envoy, duly provisioned and
escorted by his servants, with liberty to use the royal horses from post to
post. Then he ordered the slaves to bring in the gifts which the King sent to
me, and these were many, including even suits of flexible armour that would
turn any sword-thrust or arrow.
I thanked him, saying that I would be ready to start by noon, and asked whether
the King wished to see me before I rode. He replied that he had so wished, but
that as he was suffering in his head from the effects of the sun, he could not.
He bade me, however, remember all that he had said to me and to be sure that
the beauteous lady Amada, of whom I had spoken, was sent to him without delay.
In that case my reward should be great; but if I failed to fulfil his commands,
then his wrath would be greater and I should perish miserably as he had
promised.
I bowed and made no answer, after which he and his companions opened the bags
of gold to show me that it was there, offering to weigh it again against my
servant, the dwarf, so that I could see that nothing had been taken away.
I replied that the King’s word was truer than any scale, whereon the bags
were tied up again and sealed. Then I produced the bow, or rather its
counterfeit, and having shown it to the princes, wrapped it and six of my own
arrows in a linen cloth, to be taken to the King, with a message that though
hard to draw it was the deadliest weapon in the world. The elder of them took
it, bowed and bade me farewell, saying that perhaps we should meet again ere
long in Egypt, if my gods gave me a safe journey. So we parted and I was glad
to see the last of them.
Scarcely had they gone when the six hunters whom I had won in the wager and
thereby saved from death, entered the chamber and fell upon their knees before
me, asking for orders as to making ready my gear for the journey. I inquired of
them if they were coming also, to which their spokesman replied that they were
my slaves to do what I commanded.
“Do you desire to come?” I inquired.
“O Lord Shabaka,” answered their spokesman, “we do, though
some of us must leave wives and children behind us.”
“Why?” I asked.
“For two reasons, Lord. Here we are men disgraced, though through no
fault of our own and if you were to leave us in this land, soon the anger of
the King would find us out and we should lose not only our wives and children,
but with them our lives. Whereas in another land we may get other wives and
more children, but never shall we get another life. Therefore we would leave
those dear ones to our friends, knowing that soon the women will forget and
find other husbands, and that the children will grow up to whatever fate is
appointed them, thinking of us, their fathers, as dead. Secondly we are hunters
by trade, and we have seen that you are a great hunter, one whom we shall
always be proud to serve in the chase or in war, one, too, who went out of his
path to save our lives, because he saw that we had been unjustly doomed to a
cruel death. Therefore we desire nothing better than to be your slaves, hoping
that perchance we may earn our liberty from you in days to come by our good
service.”
“Is that the wish of all of you?” I asked.
Speaking one by one, they said that it was, though tears rose in the eyes of
some of them who were married at the thought of parting from their women and
their little ones, who, it seemed might not be brought with them because they
were the people of the King and had not been named in the bet. Moreover, horses
could not be found for so many, nor could they travel fast.
“Come then,” I said, “and know that while you are faithful to
me, I will be good to you, men of my own trade, and perhaps in the end set you
free in a land where brave fellows are not given to be torn to pieces by wild
beasts at the word of any king. But if you fail me or betray me, then either I
will kill you, or sell you to those who deal in slaves, to work at the oar, or
in the mines till you die.”
“Henceforth we have no lord but you, O Shabaka,” they said, and one
after another took my hand and pressed it to their foreheads, vowing to be true
to me in all things while we lived.
So I bade them begone to bid farewell to those they loved and return again
within half an hour of noon, never expecting, to tell the truth, that they
would come. Indeed I did this to give them the opportunity of escaping if they
saw fit, and hiding themselves where they would. But as I have often noted, the
trade of hunting breeds honesty in the blood and at the hour appointed all of
these men appeared, one of them with a woman who carried a child in her arms,
clinging to him and weeping bitterly. When her veil slipped aside I saw that
she was young and very fair to look on.
So at noon we left the city of the Great King in the charge of two of his
officers who brought me his thanks for the bow I had sent him, which he said he
should treasure above everything he possessed, a saying at which Bes rolled his
yellow eyes and grinned. We were mounted on splendid stallions from the royal
stables and clad in the shirts of mail that had been presented to us, though
when we were clear of the city we took these off because of the heat, also
because that which Bes wore chafed him, being too long for his squat shape. Our
goods together with the bags of gold were laden on sumpter horses which were
led by my six hunter slaves. Four picked soldiers brought up the rear, mighty
men from the King’s own bodyguard, and two of the royal postmen who
served us as guides. Also there were cooks and grooms with spare horses.
Thus we started in state and a great crowd watched us go. Our road ran by the
river which we must cross in barges lower down, so that in a few minutes we
came to that quay whither I had been led on the previous night to die. Yes,
there were the watching guards, and there floated the hateful double boat, at
the prow of which appeared the tortured face of the eunuch Houman, who rolled
his head from side to side to rid himself of the torment of the flies. He
caught sight of us and began to scream for pity and forgiveness, whereat Bes
smiled. The officers halted our cavalcade and one of them approaching me said,
“It is the King’s command, O Lord Shabaka, that you should look
upon this villain who traduced you to the King and afterwards dared to strike
you. If you will, enter the water and blind him, that your face may be the last
thing he sees before he passes into darkness.”
I shook my head, but Bes into whose mind some thought had come, whispered to
me,
“I wish to speak with yonder eunuch, so give me leave and fear nothing. I
will do him no hurt, only good, if I find the chance.”
Then I said to the officer,
“It is not for great lords to avenge themselves upon the fallen. Yet my
slave here was also wronged and would say a word to yonder Houman.”
“So be it,” said the officer, “only let him be careful not to
hurt him too sorely, lest he should die before the time and escape his
punishment.”
Then Bes tucked up his robes and waded into the river, flourishing a great
knife, while seeing him come, Houman began to scream with fear. He reached the
boat and bent over the eunuch, talking to him in a low voice. What he did there
I could not see because his cloak was spread out on either side of the
man’s head. Presently, however, I caught sight of the flash of a knife
and heard yells of agony followed by groans, whereat I called to him to return
and let the fellow be. For when I remembered that his fate was near to being my
own, those sounds made me sick at heart and I grew angry with Bes, though the
cruel Easterns only laughed.
At length he came back grinning and washing the blade of his knife in the
water. I spoke fiercely to him in my own language, and still he grinned on,
making no answer. When we were mounted again and riding away from that horrible
boat with its groaning prisoner, watching Bes whose behaviour and silence I
could not understand, I saw him sweep his hand across his great mouth and
thrust it swiftly into his bosom. After this he spoke readily enough, though in
a low voice lest someone who understood Egyptian should overhear him.
“You are a fool, Master,” he said, “to think that I should
wish to waste time in torturing that fat knave.”
“Then why did you torture him?” I asked.
“Because my god, the Grasshopper, when he fashioned me a dwarf, gave me a
big mouth and good teeth,” he answered, whereon I stared at him, thinking
that he had gone mad.
“Listen, Master. I did not hurt Houman. All I did was to cut his cords
nearly through from the under side, so that when night comes he can break them
and escape, if he has the wit. Now, Master, you may not have noticed, but I
did, that before the King doomed you to death by the boat yesterday, he took a
certain round, white seal, a cylinder with gods and signs cut on it, which hung
by a gold chain from his girdle, and gave it to Houman to be his warrant for
all he did. This seal Houman showed to the Treasurer whereon they produced the
gold that was weighed in the scales against me, and to others when he ordered
the boat to be prepared for you to lie in. Moreover he forgot to return it, for
when he himself was dragged off to the boat by direct command of the King, I
caught sight of the chain beneath his robe. Can you guess the rest?”
“Not quite,” I answered, for I wished to hear the tale in his own
words.
“Well, Master, when I was walking with Houman after he had put you in the
boat, I asked him about this seal. He showed it to me and said that he who bore
it was for the time the king of all the Empire of the East. It seems that there
is but one such seal which has descended from ancient days from king to king,
and that of it every officer, great or small, has an impress in all lands. If
the seal is produced to him, he compares it with the impress and should the two
agree, he obeys the order that is brought as though the King had given it in
person. When we reached the Court doubtless Houman would have returned the
seal, but seeing that the King was, or feigned to be drunk, waited for fear
lest it should be lost, and with it his life. Then he was seized as you saw,
and in his terror forgot all about the seal, as did the King and his
officers.”
“But, surely, Bes, those who took Houman to the boat would have removed
it.”
“Master, even the most clear-sighted do not see well at night. At any
rate my hope was that they had not done so, and that is why I waded out to
prick the eyes of Houman. Moreover, as I had hoped, so it was; there beneath
his robe I saw the chain. Then I spoke to him, saying,
“‘I am come to put out your eyes, as you deserve, seeing how you
have treated my master. Still I will spare you at a price. Give me the
King’s ancient white seal that opens all doors, and I will only make a
pretence of blinding you. Moreover I will cut your cords nearly through, so
that when the night comes you can break them, roll into the river and
escape.’
“‘Take it if you can,’ he said, ‘and use it to injure
or destroy that accursed one.’”
“So you took it, Bes.”
“Yes, Master, but not easily. Remember, it was on a chain about the
man’s neck, and I could not draw it over his head, for, like his hands,
his throat was tied by a cord, as you remember yours was.”
“I remember very well,” I said, “for my throat is still sore
from the rope that ran to the same staples to which my hands were
fastened.”
“Yes, Master, and therefore if I drew the chain off his neck, it would
still have been on the ropes. I thought of trying to cut it with the knife, but
this was not easy because it is thick, and if I had dragged it up on the blade
of the knife it would have been seen, for many eyes were watching me, Master.
Then I took another counsel. While I pretended to be putting out the eyes of
Houman, I bent down and getting the chain between my teeth I bit it through.
One tooth broke—see, but the next finished the business. I ate through
the soft gold, Master, and then sucked up the chain and the round white seal
into my mouth, and that is why I could not answer you just now, because my
cheeks were full of chain. So we have the King’s seal that all the
subject countries know and obey. It may be useful, yonder in Egypt, and at
least the gold is of value.”
“Clever!” I exclaimed, “very clever. But you have forgotten
something, Bes. When that knave escapes, he will tell the whole story and the
King will send after us and kill us who have stolen his royal seal.”
“I don’t think so, Master. First, it is not likely that Houman will
escape. He is very fat and soft and already suffers much. After a day in the
sun also he will be weak. Moreover I do not think that he can swim, for eunuchs
hate the water. So if he gets out of the boat it is probable that he will drown
in the river, since he dare not wade to the quay where the guards will be
waiting. But if he does escape by swimming across the river, he will hide for
his life’s sake and never be seen again, and if by chance he is caught,
he will say that the seal fell into the water when he was taken to the boat, or
that one of the guards had stolen it. What he will not say is that he had
bargained it away with someone who in return, cut his cords, since for that
crime he must die by worse tortures than those of the boat. Lastly we shall
ride so fast that with six hours’ start none will catch us. Or if they do
I can throw away the chain and swallow the seal.”
As Bes said, so it happened. The fate of Houman I never learned, and of the
theft of the seal I heard no more until a proclamation was issued to all the
kingdoms that a new one was in use. But this was not until long afterwards when
it had served my turn and that of Egypt.
CHAPTER VIII.
THE LADY AMADA
Now day by day, hour by hour and minute by minute every detail of that journey
appeared before me, but to set it all down is needless. As I, Allan Quatermain,
write the record of my vision, still I seem to hear the thunder of our
horses’ hoofs while we rushed forward at full gallop over the plains,
over the mountain passes and by the banks of rivers. The speed at which we
travelled was wonderful, for at intervals of about forty miles were post-houses
and at these, whatever might be the hour of day or night, we found fresh horses
from the King’s stud awaiting us. Moreover, the postmasters knew that we
were coming, which astonished me until we discovered that they had been warned
of our arrival by two King’s messengers who travelled ahead of us.
These men, it would seem, although our officers and guides professed ignorance
of the matter, must have left the King’s palace at dawn on the day of our
departure, whereas we did not mount in the city till a little after noon.
Therefore they had six hours good start of us, and what is more, travelled
lighter than we did, having no sumpter beasts with them, and no cooks or
servants. Moreover, always they had the pick of the horses and chose the three
swiftest beasts, leading the third in case one of their own should founder or
meet with accident. Thus it came about that we never caught them up although we
covered quite a hundred miles a day. Only once did I see them, far off upon the
skyline of a mountain range which we had to climb, but by the time we had
reached its crest they were gone.
At length we came to the desert without accident and crossed it, though more
slowly. But even here the King had his posts which were in charge of Arabs who
lived in tents by wells of water, or sometimes where there was none save what
was brought to them. So still we galloped on, parched by the burning sand
beneath and the burning sand above, and reached the borders of Egypt.
Here, upon the very boundary line, the two officers halted the cavalcade saying
that their orders were to return thence and make report to the King. There then
we parted, Bes and I with the six hunters who still chose to cling to me, going
forward and the officers of the King with the guides and servants going back.
The good horses that we rode from the last post they gave to us by the
King’s command, together with the sumpter beasts, since horses broken to
the saddle were hard to come by in Egypt where they were trained to draw
chariots. These we took, sending back my thanks to the King, and started on
once more, Bes leading that beast which bore the gold and the hunters serving
as a guard.
Indeed I was glad to see the last of those Easterns although they had brought
us safely and treated us well, for all the while I was never sure but that they
had some orders to lead us into a trap, or perhaps to make away with us in our
sleep and take back the gold and the priceless, rose-hued pearls, any two of
which were worth it all. But such was not their command nor did they dare to
steal them on their own account, since then, even if they escaped the vengeance
of the King, their wives and all their families would have paid the price.
Now we entered Egypt near the Salt Lakes that are not far from the head of the
Gulf, crossing the canal that the old Pharaohs had dug, which proved easy for
it was silted up. Before we reached it we found some peasant folk labouring in
their gardens and I heard one of them call to another,
“Here come more of the Easterns. What is toward, think you,
neighbour?”
“I do not know,” answered the other, “but when I passed down
the canal this morning, I saw a body of the Great King’s guards gathering
from the fort. Doubtless it is to meet these men of whose coming the other two
who went by fifty hours ago, have warned the officers.”
“Now what does that mean?” I asked of Bes.
“Neither more nor less than we have heard, Master. The two King’s
messengers who have gone ahead of us all the way from the city, have told the
officer of the frontier fort that we are coming, so he has advanced to the ford
to meet us, for what purpose I do not know.”
“Nor do I,” I said, “but I wish we could take another road,
if there were one.”
“There is none, Master, for above and below the canal is full of water
and the banks are too steep for horses to climb. Also we must show no doubt or
fear.”
He thought a while, then added,
“Take the royal seal, Master. It may be useful.”
He gave it to me, and I examined it more closely than I had done before. It was
a cylinder of plain white shell hung on a gold chain, that which Bes had bitten
through, but now mended again by taking out the broken link. On this cylinder
were cut figures; as I think of a priest presenting a noble to a god, over whom
was the crescent of the moon, while behind the god stood a man or demon with a
tall spear. Also between the figures were mystic signs, meaning I know not
what. The workmanship of the carving was grown shallow with time and use for
the cylinder seemed to be very ancient, a sacred thing that had descended from
generation to generation and was threaded through with a bar of silver on which
it turned.
I put the seal which was like no other that I had seen, being the work of an
early and simpler age, round my neck beneath my mail and we went on.
Descending the steep bank of the canal we came to the ford where the sand that
had silted in was covered by not more than a foot of water. As we entered it,
on the top of the further bank appeared a body of about thirty armed and
mounted men, one of whom carried the Great King’s banner, on which I
noted was blazoned the very figures that were cut upon the cylinder. Now it was
too late to retreat, so we rode through the water and met the soldiers. Their
officer advanced, crying,
“In the name of the Great King, greeting, my lord Shabaka!
“In the name of the Great King, greeting!” I answered. “What
would you with Shabaka, Officer of the King?”
“Only to do him honour. The word of the King has reached us and we come
to escort you to the Court of Idernes, the Satrap of the King and Governor of
Egypt who sits at Sais.”
“That is not my road, Officer. I travel to Memphis to deliver the
commands of the King to my cousin, Peroa, the ruler of Egypt under the King.
Afterwards, perchance, I shall visit the high Idernes.”
“To whom our commands are to take you now, my lord Shabaka, not
afterwards,” said the officer sternly, glancing round at his armed
escort.
“I come to give commands, not to receive them, Captain of the
King.”
“Seize Shabaka and his servants,” said the officer briefly, whereon
the soldiers rode forward to surround us.
I waited till they were near at hand. Then suddenly I plunged my hand beneath
my robe and drew out the small, white seal which I held before the eyes of the
officer, saying,
“Who is it that dares to lay a finger upon the holder of the King’s
White Seal? Surely that man is ready for death.”
The officer stared at it, then leapt from his horse and flung himself face
downwards on the ground, crying,
“It is the ancient signet of the Kings of the East, given to their first
forefather by Samas the Sungod, on which hangs the fortunes of the Great House!
Pardon, my lord Shabaka.”
“It is granted,” I answered, “because what you did you did in
ignorance. Now go to the Satrap Idernes and say to him that if he would have
speech with the bearer of the King’s seal which all must obey, he will
find him at Memphis. Farewell,” and with Bes and the six hunters I rode
through the guards, none striving to hinder me.
“That was well done, Master,” said Bes.
“Yes,” I said. “Those two messengers who went ahead of us
brought orders to the frontier guard of Idernes that I should be taken to him
as a prisoner. I do not know why, but I think because things are passing in
Egypt of which we know nothing and the King did not desire that I should see
the Prince Peroa and give him news that I might have gathered. Mayhap we have
been outwitted, Bes, and the business of the lady Amada is but a pretext to
pick a quarrel suddenly before Peroa can strike the first blow.”
“Perhaps, Master, for these Easterns are very crafty. But, Master, what
happens to those who make a false use of the King’s ancient, sacred
signet? I think they have cut the ropes which tie them to earth,” and he
looked upwards to the sky rolling his yellow eyes.
“They must find new ropes, Bes, and quickly, before they are caught.
Hearken. You have sat upon a throne and I can speak out to you. Think you that
my cousin, the Prince Peroa, loves to be the servant of this distant, Eastern
king, he who by right is Pharaoh of Egypt? Peroa must strike or lose his niece
and perchance his life. Forward, that we may warn him.”
“And if he will not strike, Master, knowing the King’s might and
being somewhat slow to move?”
“Then, Bes, I think that you and I had best go hunting far away in those
lands you know, where even the Great King cannot follow us.”
“And where, if only I can find a woman who does not make me ill to look
on, and whom I do not make ill, I too can once more be a king, Master, and the
lord of many thousand brave armed men. I must speak of that matter to the holy
Tanofir.”
“Who doubtless will know what to advise you, Bes; or, if he does not, I
shall.”
For a while we rode on in silence, each thinking his own thoughts. Then Bes
said,
“Master, before so very long we shall reach the Nile, and having with us
gold in plenty can buy boats and hire crews. It comes into my mind that we
should do well for our own safety and comfort to start at once on a hunting
journey far from Egypt; in the land of the Ethiopians, Master. There perchance
I could gather together some of the wise men in whose hands I left the rule of
my kingdom, and submit to them this question of a woman to marry me. The
Ethiopians are a faithful people, Master, and will not reject me because I have
spent some years seeing the world afar, that I might learn how to rule them
better.”
“I have remembered that it cannot be, Bes,” I said.
“Why not, Master?”
“For this reason. You left your country because of a woman? I cannot
leave mine again because of a woman.”
Bes rolled his eyes around as though he thought to see that woman in the
desert. Not discovering her, he stared upwards and there found light.
“Is she perchance named the lady Amada, Master?”
I nodded.
“So. The lady Amada who you told the Great King is the most beautiful one
in the whole world, causing the fire of Love to burn up in his royal heart, and
with it many other things of which we do not know at present.”
“You told him, Bes,” I said angrily.
“I told him of a beautiful one; I did not tell him her name, Master, and
although I never thought of it at the time, perhaps she will be angry with him
who told her name.”
Now fear took hold of me, and Bes saw it in my face.
“Do not be afraid, Master. If there is trouble I will swear that I told
the Great King that lady’s name.”
“Yes, Bes, but how would that fit in with the story, seeing that I was
brought out of the boat for this very purpose?”
“Quite easily, Master, since I will say that you were led from the boat
to confirm my tale. Oh! she will be angry with me, no doubt, but in Egypt even
a dwarf cannot be killed because he has declared a certain lady to be the most
beautiful in the world. But, Master, tell me, when did you learn to love
her?”
“When we were boy and girl, Bes. We used to play together, being cousins,
and I used to hold her hand. Then suddenly she refused to let me hold her hand
any more, and I being quite grown up then, though she was younger, understood
that I had better go away.”
“I should have stopped where I was, Master.”
“No, Bes. She was studying to be a priestess and my great uncle, the holy
Tanofir, told me that I had better go away. So I went down south hunting and
fighting in command of the troops, and met you, Bes.”
“Which perhaps was better for you, Master, than to stop to watch the lady
Amada acquire learning. Still, I wonder whether the holy Tanofir is
always right. You see, Master, he thinks a great deal of priests and
priestesses, and is so very old that he has forgotten all about love and that
without it there never would have been a holy Tanofir.”
“The holy Tanofir thinks of souls, not of bodies, Bes.”
“Yes, Master. Still, oil is of no use without a lamp, or a soul without a
body, at least here underneath the sun, or so we were taught who worship the
Grasshopper. But, Master, when you came back from all your hunting, what
happened then?”
“Then I found, Bes, that the lady Amada, having acquired all the learning
possible, had taken her first vows to Isis, which she said she would not break
for any man on earth although she might have done so without crime. Therefore,
although I was dear to her, as a brother would have been had she had one, and
she swore that she had never even thought of another man, she refused so much
as to think of marrying who dreamed only of the heavenly perfections of the
lady Isis.”
“Ump!” said Bes. “We Ethiopians have Priestesses of the
Grasshopper, or the Grasshopper’s wife, but they do not think of her like
that. I hope that one day something stronger than herself will not cause the
lady Amada to break her vows to the heavenly Isis. Only then, perhaps, it may
be for the sake of another man who did not go off to the East on account of
such fool’s talk. But here is a village and the horses are spent. Let us
stop and eat, as I suppose even the lady Amada does sometimes.”
On the following afternoon we crossed the Nile, and towards sunset entered the
vast and ancient city of Memphis. On its white walls floated the banners of the
Great King which Bes pointed out to me, saying that wherever we went in the
whole world, it seemed that we could never be free from those accursed symbols.
“May I live to spit upon them and cast them into the moat,” I
answered savagely, for as I drew near to Amada they grew ten times more hateful
to me than they had been before.
In truth I was nearer to Amada than I thought, for after we had passed the
enclosure of the temple of Ptah, the most wonderful and the mightiest in the
whole world, we came to the temple of Isis. There near to the pylon gate we met
a procession of her priests and priestesses advancing to offer the evening
sacrifice of song and flowers, clad, all of them, in robes of purest white. It
was a day of festival, so singers went with them. After the singers came a band
of priestesses bearing flowers, in front of whom walked another priestess
shaking a sistrum that made a little tinkling music.
Even at a distance there was something about the tall and slender shape of this
priestess that stirred me. When we came nearer I saw why, for it was Amada
herself. Through the thin veil she wore I could see her dark and tender eyes
set beneath the broad brow that was so full of thought, and the sweet, curved
mouth that was like no other woman’s. Moreover there could be no doubt
since the veil parting above her breast showed the birth-mark for which she was
famous, the mark of the young moon, the sign of Isis.
I sprang from my horse and ran towards her. She looked up and saw me. At first
she frowned, then her face grew wondering, then tender, and I thought that her
red lips shaped my name. Moreover in her confusion she let the sistrum
fall.
I muttered “Amada!” and stepped forward, but priests ran between us
and thrust me away. Next moment she had recovered the sistrum and passed
on with her head bowed. Nor did she lift her eyes to look back.
“Begone, man!” cried a priest, “Begone, whoever you may be.
Because you wear Eastern armour do you think that you can dare the curse of
Isis?”
Then I fell back, the holy image of the goddess passed and the procession
vanished through the pylon gate. I, Shabaka the Egyptian, stood by my horse and
watched it depart. I was happy because the lady Amada was alive, well, and more
beautiful than ever; also because she had shown signs of joy and confusion at
seeing me again. Yet I was unhappy because I met her still filling a holy
office which built a wall between us, also because it seemed to me an evil omen
that I should have been repelled from her by a priest of Isis who talked of the
curse of the goddess. Moreover the sacred statue, I suppose by accident, turned
towards me as it passed and perhaps by the chance of light, seemed to frown
upon me.
Thus I thought as Shabaka hundreds of years before the Christian era, but as
Allan Quatermain the modern man, to whom it was given so marvellously to behold
all these things and who in beholding them, yet never quite lost the sense of
his own identity of to-day, I was amazed. For I knew that this lady Amada was
the same being though clad in different flesh, as that other lady with whom I
had breathed the magical Taduki fumes which had power to rend the
curtain of the past, or, perhaps, only to breed dreams of what it might have
been.
To the outward eye, indeed she was different, as I was different, taller, more
slender, larger-eyed, with longer and slimmer hands than those of any Western
woman, and on the whole even more beautiful and alluring. Moreover that
mysterious look which from time to time I had seen on Lady Ragnall’s
face, was more constant on that of the lady Amada. It brooded in the deep eyes
and settled in a curious smile about the curves of the lips, a smile that was
not altogether human, such a smile as one might wear who had looked on hidden
things and heard voices that spoke beyond the limits of the world.
Somehow neither then nor at any other time during all my dream, could I imagine
this Amada, this daughter of a hundred kings, whose blood might be traced back
through dynasty on dynasty, as nothing but a woman who nurses children upon her
breast. It was as though something of our common nature had been bred out of
her and something of another nature whereof we have no ken, had entered to fill
its place. And yet these two women were the same, that I knew, or at any
rate, much of them was the same, for who can say what part of us we leave
behind as we flit from life to life, to find it again elsewhere in the abysms
of Time and Change? One thing too was quite identical—the birthmark of
the new moon above the breast which the priests of the Kendah had declared was
always the seal that marked their prophetess, the guardian of the Holy Child.
When the procession had quite departed and I could no longer hear the sound of
singing, I remounted and rode on to my house, or rather to that of my mother,
the great lady Tiu, which was situated beneath the wall of the old palace
facing towards the Nile. Indeed my heart was full of this mother of mine whom I
loved and who loved me, for I was her only child, and my father had been long
dead; so long that I could not remember him. Eight months had gone by since I
saw her face and in eight months who knew what might have happened? The thought
made me cold for she, who was aged and not too strong, perhaps had been
gathered to Osiris. Oh! if that were so!
I shook my tired horse to a canter, Bes riding ahead of me to clear a road
through the crowded street in which, at this hour of sundown, all the idlers of
Memphis seemed to have gathered. They stared at me because it was not common to
see men riding in Memphis, and with little love, since from my dress and escort
they took me to be some envoy from their hated master, the Great King of the
East. Some even threatened to bar the way; but we thrust through and presently
turned into a thoroughfare of private houses standing in their own gardens.
Ours was the third of these. At its gate I leapt from my horse, pushed open the
closed door and hastened in to seek and learn.
I had not far to go for, there in the courtyard, standing at the head of our
modest household and dressed in her festal robes, was my mother, the stately
and white-haired lady Tiu, as one stands who awaits the coming of an honoured
guest. I ran to her and kneeling, kissed her hand, saying,
“My mother! My mother, I have come safe home and greet you.”
“I greet you also, my son,” she answered, bending down and kissing
me on the brow, “who have been in far lands and passed so many dangers. I
greet you and thank the guardian gods who have brought you safe home again.
Rise, my son.”
I rose and kissed her on the face, then looked at the servants who were bowing
their welcome to me, and said,
“How comes it, Lady of the House, that all are gathered here? Did you
await some guest?”
“We awaited you, my son. For an hour have we stood here listening for the
sound of your feet.”
“Me!” I exclaimed. “That is strange, seeing that I have
ridden fast and hard from the East, tarrying only a few minutes, and those
since I entered Memphis, when I met——” and I stopped.
“Met whom, Shabaka?”
“The lady Amada walking in the procession of Isis.”
“Ah! the lady Amada. The mother waits that the son may stop to greet the
lady Amada!”
“But why did you wait, my mother? Who but a spirit or a bird of
the air could have told you that I was coming, seeing that I sent no messenger
before me?”
“You must have done so, Shabaka, since yesterday one came from the holy
Tanofir, our relative who dwells in the desert in the burial-ground of Sekera.
He bore a message from Tanofir to me, telling me to make ready since before
sundown to-night you, my son, would be with me, having escaped great dangers,
accompanied by the dwarf Bes, your servant, and six strange Eastern men. So I
made ready and waited; also I prepared lodging for the six strange men in the
outbuildings behind the house and sent a thank offering to the temple. For
know, my son, I have suffered much fear for you.”
“And not without cause, as you will say when I tell you all,” I
answered laughing. “But how Tanofir knew that I was coming is more than I
can guess. Come, my mother, greet Bes here, for had it not been for him, never
should I have lived to hold your hand again.”
So she greeted him and thanked him, whereon Bes rolled his eyes and muttered
something about the holy Tanofir, after which we entered the house. Thence I
despatched a messenger to the Prince Peroa saying that if it were his pleasure
I would wait on him at once, seeing that I had much to tell him. This done I
bathed and caused my hair and beard to be trimmed and, discarding the Eastern
garments, clothed myself in those of Egypt, and so felt that I was my own man
again. Then I came out refreshed and drank a cup of Syrian wine and the night
having fallen, sat down by my mother in the chamber with a lamp between us,
and, holding her hand, told her something of my story, showing her the sacks of
gold that had come with me safely from the East, and the chain of priceless,
rose-hued pearls that I had won in a wager from the Great King.
Now when she learned how Bes by his wit had saved me from a death of torment in
the boat, my mother clapped her hands to summon a servant and sent for Bes, and
said to him,
“Bes, hitherto I have looked on you as a slave taken by my son, the noble
Shabaka, in one of his far journeys that it pleases him to make to fight and to
hunt. But henceforth I look upon you as a friend and give you a seat at my
table. Moreover it comes into my mind that although so strangely shaped by some
evil god, perhaps you are more than you seem to be.”
Now Bes looked at me to see if I had told my mother anything, and when I shook
my head answered,
“I thank you, O Lady of the House, who have but done my duty to my
master. Still it is true that as a goatskin often holds good wine, so a dwarf
should not always be judged by what can be seen of him.”
Then he went away.
“It seems that we are rich again, Son, who have been somewhat poor of
late years,” said my mother, looking at the bags of gold. “Also,
there are the pearls which doubtless are worth more than the gold. What are you
going to do with them, Shabaka?”
“I thought of offering them as a gift to the lady Amada,” I replied
hesitatingly, “that is unless you——”
“I? No, I am too old for such gems. Yet, Son, it might be well to keep
them for a time, seeing that while they are your own they may give you more
weight in the eyes of the Prince Peroa and others. Whereas if you gave them to
the lady Amada and she took them, perchance it might only be to see them return
to the East, whither you tell me she is summoned by one whose orders may not be
disobeyed.”
Now I turned white with rage and answered,
“While I live, Mother, Amada shall never go to the East to be the woman
of yonder King.”
“While you live, Son. But those who cross the will of a great king, are
apt to die. Also this is a matter which her uncle, the Prince Peroa, must
decide as policy dictates. Now as ever the woman is but a pawn in the game. Oh!
my son,” she went on, “do not pin all your heart to the robe of
this Amada. She is very fair and very learned, but is she one who will love?
Moreover, if so she is a priestess and it would be difficult for her to wed who
is sworn to Isis. Lastly, remember this: If Egypt were free, she would be its
heiress, not her uncle, Peroa. For hers is the true blood, not his. Would he,
therefore, be willing to give her to any man who, according to the ancient
custom, through her would acquire the right to rule?”
“I do not seek to rule, Mother; I only seek to wed Amada whom I
love.”
“Amada whom you love and whose name you, or rather your servant Bes,
which is the same thing since it will be held that he did it by your order,
gave to the King of the East, or so I understand. Here is a pretty tangle,
Shabaka, and rather would I be without all that gold and those priceless pearls
than have the task of its unravelling.”
Before I could answer and explain all the truth to her, the curtain was swung
aside and through it came a messenger from the Prince Peroa, who bade me come
to eat with him at once at the palace, since he must see me this night.
So my mother having set the rope of rose-hued pearls in a double chain about my
neck, I kissed her and went, with Bes who was also bidden. Outside a chariot
was waiting into which we entered.
“Now, Master,” said Bes to me as we drove to the palace, “I
almost wish that we were back in another chariot hunting lions in the
East.”
“Why?” I asked.
“Because then, although we had much to fear, there was no woman in the
story. Now the woman has entered it and I think that our real troubles are
about to begin. Oh! to-morrow I go to seek counsel of the holy Tanofir.”
“And I come with you,” I answered, “for I think it will be
needed.”
CHAPTER IX.
THE MESSENGERS
We descended at the great gate of the palace and were led through empty halls
that were no longer used now when there was no king in Egypt, to the wing of
the building in which dwelt the Prince Peroa. Here we were received by a
chamberlain, for the Prince of Egypt still kept some state although it was but
small, and had about him men who bore the old, high-sounding titles of the
“Officers of Pharaoh.”
The chamberlain led me and Bes to an ante-chamber of the banqueting hall and
left us, saying that he would summon the Prince who wished to see me before he
ate. This, however, was not necessary since while he spoke Peroa, who as I
guessed had been waiting for me, entered by another door. He was a
majestic-looking man of middle age, for grey showed in his hair and beard, clad
in white garments with a purple hem and wearing on his brow a golden circlet,
from the front of which rose the uræus in the shape of a hooded snake
that might be worn by those of royal blood alone. His face was full of thought
and his black and piercing eyes looked heavy as though with sleeplessness.
Indeed I could see that he was troubled. His gaze fell upon us and his features
changed to a pleasant smile.
“Greeting, Cousin Shabaka,” he said. “I am glad that you have
returned safe from the East, and burn to hear your tidings. I pray that they
may be good, for never was good news more needed in Egypt.”
“Greeting, Prince,” I answered, bowing my knee. “I and my
servant here are returned safe, but as for our tidings, well, judge of them for
yourself,” and drawing the letter of the Great King from my robe, I
touched my forehead with the roll and handed it to him.
“I see that you have acquired the Eastern customs, Shabaka,” he
said as he took it. “But here in my own house which once was the palace
of our forefathers, the Pharaohs of Egypt, by your leave I will omit them. Amen
be my witness,” he added bitterly, “I cannot bear to lay the letter
of a foreign king against my brow in token of my country’s
vassalage.”
Then he broke the silk of the seals and read, and as he read his face grew
black with rage.
“What!” he cried, casting down the roll and stamping on it.
“What! Does this dog of an Eastern king bid me send my niece, by birth
the Royal Princess of Egypt, to be his toy until he wearies of her? First I
will choke her with my own hands. How comes it, Shabaka, that you care to bring
me such a message? Were I Pharaoh now I think your life would pay the
price.”
“As it would certainly have paid the price, had I not done so. Prince, I
brought the letter because I must. Also a copy of it has gone, I believe, to
Idernes the Satrap at Sais. It is better to face the truth, Prince, and I think
that I may be of more service to you alive than dead. If you do not wish to
send the lady Amada to the King, marry her to someone else, after which he will
seek her no more.”
He looked at me shrewdly and said,
“To whom then? I cannot marry her, being her uncle and already married.
Do you mean to yourself, Shabaka?”
“I have loved the lady Amada from a child, Prince,” I answered
boldly. “Also I have high blood in me and having brought much gold from
the East, am rich again and one accustomed to war.”
“So you have brought gold from the East! How? Well, you can tell me
afterwards. But you fly high. You, a Count of Egypt, wish to marry the Royal
Lady of Egypt, for such she is by birth and rank, which, if ever Egypt were
free again, would give you a title to the throne.”
“I ask no throne, Prince. If there were one to fill I should be content
to leave that to you and your heirs.”
“So you say, no doubt honestly. But would the children of Amada say the
same? Would you even say it if you were her husband, and would she say it?
Moreover she is a priestess, sworn not to wed, though perhaps that trouble
might be overcome, if she wishes to wed, which I doubt. Mayhap you might
discover. Well, you are hungry and worn with long travelling. Come, let us eat,
and afterwards you can tell your story. Amada and the others will be glad to
hear it, as I shall. Follow me, Count Shabaka.”
So we went to the lesser banqueting-hall, I filled with joy because I should
see Amada, and yet, much afraid because of that story which I must tell.
Gathered there, waiting for the Prince, we found the Princess his wife, a large
and kindly woman, also his two eldest daughters and his young son, a lad of
about sixteen. Moreover, there were certain officers, while at the tables of
the lower hall sat others of the household, men of smaller rank, and their
wives, since Peroa still maintained some kind of a shadow of the Court of old
Egypt.
The Princess and the others greeted me, and Bes also who had always been a
favourite with them, before he went to take his seat at the lowest table, and I
greeted them, looking all the while for Amada whom I did not see. Presently,
however, as we took our places on the couches, she entered dressed, not as a
priestess, but in the beautiful robes of a great lady of Egypt and wearing on
her head the uræus circlet that signified her royal blood. As it chanced
the only seat left vacant was that next to myself, which she took before she
recognized me, for she was engaged in asking pardon for her lateness of the
Prince and Princess, saying that she had been detained by the ceremonies at the
temple. Seeing suddenly that I was her neighbour, she made as though she would
change her place, then altered her mind and stayed where she was.
“Greeting, Cousin Shabaka,” she said, “though not for the
first time to-day. Oh! my heart was glad when looking up, outside the temple, I
caught sight of you clad in that strange Eastern armour, and knew that you had
returned safe from your long wanderings. Yet afterwards I must do penance for
it by saying two added prayers, since at such a time my thoughts should have
been with the goddess only.”
“Greeting, Cousin Amada,” I answered, “but she must be a
jealous goddess who grudges a thought to a relative—and friend—at
such a time.”
“She is jealous, Shabaka, as being the Queen of women she must be who
demands to reign alone in the hearts of her votaries. But tell me of your
travels in the East and how you came by that rope of wondrous pearls, if indeed
there can be pearls so large and beautiful.”
This at the time I had little chance of doing, however, since the young
Princess on the other side of her began to talk to Amada about some forthcoming
festival, and the Prince’s son next to me who was fond of hunting, to
question me about sport in the East and when, unhappily, I said that I had shot
lions there, gave me no peace for the rest of that feast. Also the Princess
opposite was anxious to learn what food noble people ate in the East, and how
it was cooked and how they sat at table, and what was the furniture of their
rooms and did women attend feasts as in Egypt, and so forth. So it came about
that what between these things and eating and drinking, which, being well-nigh
starved, I was obliged to do, for, save a cup of wine, I had taken nothing in
my mother’s house, I found little chance of talking with the lovely
Amada, although I knew that all the while she was studying me out of the
corners of her large eyes. Or perhaps it was the rose-hued pearls she studied,
I was not sure.
Only one thing did she say to me when there was a little pause while the cup
went round, and she pledged me according to custom and passed it on. It was,
“You look well, Shabaka, though somewhat tired, but sadder than you used,
I think.”
“Perhaps because I have seen things to sadden me, Amada. But you too look
well but somewhat lovelier than you used, I think, if that be possible.”
She smiled and blushed as she replied,
“The Eastern ladies have taught you how to say pretty things. But you
should not waste them upon me who have done with women’s vanities and
have given myself to learning and—religion.”
“Have learning and religion no vanities of their own?” I began,
when suddenly the Prince gave a signal to end the feast.
Thereon all the lower part of the hall went away and the little tables at which
we ate were removed by servants, leaving us only wine-cups in our hands which a
butler filled from time to time, mixing the wine with water. This reminded me
of something, and having asked leave, I beckoned to Bes, who still lingered
near the door, and took from him that splendid, golden goblet which the Great
King had given me, that by my command he had brought wrapped up in linen and
hidden beneath his robe. Having undone the wrappings I bowed and offered it to
the Prince Peroa.
“What is this wondrous thing?” asked the Prince, when all had
finished admiring its workmanship. “Is it a gift that you bring me from
the King of the East, Shabaka?”
“It is a gift from myself, O Prince, if you will be pleased to accept
it,” I answered, adding, “Yet it is true that it comes from the
King of the East, since it was his own drinking-cup that he gave me in exchange
for a certain bow, though not the one he sought, after he had pledged
me.”
“You seem to have found much favour in the eyes of this king, Shabaka,
which is more than most of us Egyptians do,” he exclaimed, then went on
hastily, “Still, I thank you for your splendid gift, and however you came
by it, shall value it much.”
“Perhaps my cousin Shabaka will tell us his story,” broke in Amada,
her eyes still fixed upon the rose-hued pearls, “and of how he came to
win all the beauteous things that dazzle our eyes to-night.”
Now I thought of offering her the pearls, but remembering my mother’s
words, also that the Princess might not like to see another woman bear off such
a prize, did not do so. So I began to tell my story instead, Bes seated on the
ground near to me by the Prince’s wish, that he might tell his.
The tale was long for in it was much that went before the day when I saw myself
in the chariot hunting lions with the King of kings, which I, the modern man
who set down all this vision, now learned for the first time. It told of the
details of my journey to the East, of my coming to the royal city and the rest,
all of which it is needless to repeat. Then I came to the lion hunt, to my
winning of the wager, and all that happened to me; of my being condemned to
death, of the weighing of Bes against the gold, and of how I was laid in the
boat of torment, a story at which I noticed Amada turn pale and tremble.
Here I ceased, saying that Bes knew better than I what had chanced at the Court
while I was pinned in the boat, whereon all present cried out to Bes to take up
the tale. This he did, and much better than I could have done, bringing out
many little things which made the scene appear before them, as Ethiopians have
the art of doing. At last he came to the place in his story where the king
asked him if he had ever seen a woman fairer than the dancers, and went on
thus:
“O Prince, I told the Great King that I had; that there dwelt in Egypt a
lady of royal blood with eyes like stars, with hair like silk and long as an
unbridled horse’s tail, with a shape like to that of a goddess, with
breath like flowers, with skin like milk, with a voice like honey, with
learning like to that of the god Thoth, with wit like a razor’s edge,
with teeth like pearls, with majesty of bearing like to that of the king
himself, with fingers like rosebuds set in pink seashells, with motion like
that of an antelope, with grace like that of a swan floating upon water,
and—I don’t remember the rest, O Prince.”
“Perhaps it is as well,” exclaimed Peroa. “But what did the
King say then?”
“He asked her name, O Prince.”
“And what name did you give to this wondrous lady who surpasses all the
goddesses in loveliness and charm, O dwarf Bes?” inquired Amada much
amused.
“What name, O High-born One? Is it needful to ask? Why, what name could I
give but your own, for is there any other in the world of whom a man whose
heart is filled with truth could speak such things?”
Now hearing this I gasped, but before I could speak Amada leapt up, crying,
“Wretch! You dared to speak my name to this king! Surely you should be
scourged till your bones are bare.”
“And why not, Lady? Would you have had me sit still and hear those fat
trollops of the East exalted above you? Would you have had me so disloyal to
your royal loveliness?”
“You should be scourged,” repeated Amada stamping her foot.
“My Uncle, I pray you cause this knave to be scourged.”
“Nay, nay,” said Peroa moodily. “Poor simple man, he knew no
better and thought only to sing your praises in a far land. Be not angry with
the dwarf, Niece. Had it been Shabaka who gave your name, the thing would be
different. What happened next, Bes?”
“Only this, Prince,” said Bes, looking upwards and rolling his
eyes, as was his fashion when unloading some great lie from his heart.
“The King sent his servants to bring my master from the boat, that he
might inquire of him whether he had always found me truthful. For, Prince,
those Easterns set much store by truth which here in Egypt is worshipped as a
goddess. There they do not worship her because she lives in the heart of every
man, and some women.”
Now all stared at Bes who continued to stare at the ceiling, and I rose to say
something, I know not what, when suddenly the doors opened and through them
appeared heralds, crying,
“Hearken, Peroa, Prince of Egypt by grace of the Great King. A message
from the Great King. Read and obey, O Peroa, Prince of Egypt by grace of the
Great King!”
As they cried thus from between them emerged a man whose long Eastern robes
were stained with the dust of travel. Advancing without salute he drew out a
roll, touched his forehead with it, bowing deeply, and handed it to the prince,
saying,
“Kiss the Word. Read the Word. Obey the Word, O servant of our Master,
the King of kings, beneath whose feet we are all but dust.”
Peroa took the roll, made a semblance of lifting it to his forehead, opened and
read it. As he did so I saw the veins swell upon his neck and his eyes flash,
but he only said,
“O Messenger, to-night I feast, to-morrow an answer shall be given to you
to convey to the Satrap Idernes. My servants will find you food and lodging.
You are dismissed.”
“Let the answer be given early lest you also should be dismissed, O
Peroa,” said the man with insolence.
Then he turned his back upon the prince, as one does on an inferior, and walked
away, accompanied by the herald.
When they were gone and the doors had been shut, Peroa spoke in a voice that
was thick with fury, saying,
“Hearken, all of you, to the words of the writing.”
Then he read it.
“From the King of kings, the Ruler of all the earth, to Peroa, one of his
servants in the Satrapy of Egypt,
“Deliver over to my servant Idernes without delay, the person of
Amada, a lady of the blood of the old Pharaohs of Egypt, who is your relative
and in your guardianship, that she may be numbered among the women of my
house.”
Now all present looked at each other, while Amada stood as though she had been
frozen into stone. Before she could speak, Peroa went on,
“See how the King seeks a quarrel against me that he may destroy me and
bray Egypt in his mortar, and tan it like a hide to wrap about his feet. Nay,
hold your peace, Amada. Have no fear. You shall not be sent to the East; first
will I kill you with my own hands. But what answer shall we give, for the
matter is urgent and on it hang all our lives? Bethink you, Idernes has a great
force yonder at Sais, and if I refuse outright, he will attack us, which indeed
is what the King means him to do before we can make preparation. Say then,
shall we fight, or shall we fly to Upper Egypt, abandoning Memphis, and there
make our stand?”
Now the Councillors present seemed to find no answer, for they did not know
what to say. But Bes whispered in my ear,
“Remember, Master, that you hold the King’s seal. Let an answer be
sent to Idernes under the White Seal, bidding him wait on you.”
Then I rose and spoke.
“O Peroa,” I said, “as it chances I am the bearer of the
private signet of the Great King, which all men must obey in the north and in
the south, in the east and in the west, wherever the sun shines over the
dominions of the King. Look on it,” and taking the ancient White Seal
from about my neck, I handed it to him.
He looked and the Councillors looked. Then they said almost with one voice,
“It is the White Seal, the very signet of the Great Kings of the
East,” and they bowed before the dreadful thing.
“How you came by this we do not know, Shabaka,” said Peroa.
“That can be inquired of afterwards. Yet in truth it seems to be the old
Signet of signets, that which has come down from father to son for countless
generations, that which the King of kings carries on his person and affixes to
his private orders and to the greatest documents of State, which afterwards can
never be recalled, that of which a copy is emblazoned on his banner.”
“It is,” I answered, “and from the King’s person it
came to me for a while. If any doubt, let the impress be brought, that is
furnished to all the officers throughout the Empire, and let the seal be set in
the impress.”
Now one of the officers rose and went to bring the impress which was in his
keeping, but Peroa continued,
“If this be the true seal, how would you use it, Shabaka, to help us in
our present trouble?”
“Thus, Prince,” I answered. “I would send a command under the
seal to Idernes to wait upon the holder of the seal here in Memphis. He will
suspect a trap and will not come until he has gathered a great army. Then he
will come, but meanwhile, you, Prince, can also collect an army.”
“That needs gold, Shabaka, and I have little. The King of kings takes all
in tribute.”
“I have some, Prince, to the weight of a heavy man, and it is at the
service of Egypt.”
“I thank you, Shabaka. Believe me, such generosity shall not go
unrewarded,” and he glanced at Amada who dropped her eyes. “But if
we can collect the army, what then?”
“Then you can put Memphis into a state of defence. Then too when Idernes
comes I will meet him and, as the bearer of the seal, command him under the
seal to retreat and disperse his army.”
“But if he does, Shabaka, it will only be until he has received fresh
orders from the Great King, whereon he will advance again.”
“No, Prince, he will not advance, or that army either. For when
they are in retreat we will fall on them and destroy them, and declare you, O
Prince, Pharaoh of Egypt, though what will happen afterwards I do not
know.”
When they heard this all gasped. Only Amada whispered,
“Well said!” and Bes clapped his big hands softly in the Ethiopian
fashion.
“A bold counsel,” said Peroa, “and one on which I must have
the night to think. Return here, Shabaka, an hour after sunrise to-morrow, by
which time I can gather all the wisest men in Memphis, and we will discuss this
matter. Ah! here is the impress. Now let the seal be tried.”
A box was brought and opened. In it was a slab of wood on which was an impress
of the King’s seal in wax, surrounded by those of other seals certifying
that it was genuine. Also there was a writing describing the appearance of the
seal. I handed the signet to Peroa who, having compared it with the description
in the writing, fitted it to the impress on the wax.
“It is the same,” he said. “See, all of you.”
They looked and nodded. Then he would have given it back to me but I refused to
take it, saying,
“It is not well that this mighty symbol should hang about the neck of a
private man whence it might be stolen or lost.”
“Or who might be murdered for its sake,” interrupted Peroa.
“Yes, Prince. Therefore take it and hide it in the safest and most secret
place in the palace, and with it these pearls that are too priceless to be
flaunted about the streets of Memphis at night, unless
indeed——” and I turned to look for Amada, but she was gone.
So the seal and the pearls were taken and locked in the box with the impress
and borne away. Nor was I sorry to see the last of them, wisely as it happened.
Then I bade the Prince and his company good night, and presently was driving
homeward with Bes in the chariot.
Our way led us past some large houses once occupied by officers of the Court of
Pharaoh, but now that there was no Court, fallen into ruins. Suddenly from out
of these houses sprang a band of men disguised as common robbers, whose faces
were hidden by cloths with eye-holes cut in them. They seized the horses by the
bridles, and before we could do anything, leapt upon us and held us fast. Then
a tall man speaking with a foreign accent, said,
“Search that officer and the dwarf. Take from them the seal upon a gold
chain and a rope of rose-hued pearls which they have stolen. But do them no
harm.”
So they searched us, the tall man himself helping and, aided by others, holding
Bes who struggled with them, and searched the chariot also, by the light of the
moon, but found nothing. The tall man muttered that I must be the wrong
officer, and at a sign they left us and ran away.
“That was a wise thought of mine, Bes, which caused me to leave certain
ornaments in the palace,” I said. “As it is they have taken
nothing.”
“Yes, Master,” he answered, “though I have taken something
from them,” a saying that I did not understand at the time. “Those
Easterns whom we met by the canal told Idernes about the seal, and he ordered
this to be done. That tall man was one of the messengers who came to-night to
the palace.”
“Then why did they not kill us, Bes?”
“Because murder, especially of one who holds the seal, is an ugly
business, that is easily tracked down, whereas thieves are many in Memphis and
who troubles about them when they have failed? Oh! the Grasshopper, or Amen, or
both, have been with us to-night.”
So I thought although I said nothing, for since we had come off scatheless,
what did it matter? Well, this. It showed me that the signet of the Great King
was indeed to be dreaded and coveted, even here in Egypt. If Idernes could get
it into his possession, what might he not do with it? Cause himself to be
proclaimed Pharaoh perhaps and become the forefather of an independent dynasty.
Why not, when the Empire of the East was taxed with a great war elsewhere? And
if this was so why should not Peroa do the same, he who had behind him all Old
Egypt, maddened with its wrongs and foreign rule?
That same night before I slept, but after Bes and I had hidden away the bags of
gold by burying them beneath the clay floor, I laid the whole matter before my
mother who was a very wise woman. She heard me out, answering little, then
said,
“The business is very dangerous, and of its end I will not speak until I
have heard the counsel of your great-uncle, the holy Tanofir. Still, things
having gone so far, it seems to me that boldness may be the best course, since
the great King has his Grecian wars to deal with, and whatever he may say,
cannot attack Egypt yet awhile. Therefore if Peroa is able to overcome Idernes
and his army he may cause himself to be proclaimed Pharaoh and make Egypt free
if only for a time.”
“Such is my mind, Mother.”
“Not all your mind, Son, I think,” she answered smiling, “for
you think more of the lovely Amada than of these high policies, at any rate
to-night. Well, marry your Amada if you can, though I misdoubt me somewhat of a
woman who is so lost in learning and thinks so much about her soul. At least if
you marry her and Egypt should become free, as it was for thousands of years,
you will be the next heir to the throne as husband of the Great Royal
Lady.”
“How can that be, Mother, seeing that Peroa has a son?”
“A vain youth with no more in him than a child’s rattle. If once
Amada ceases to think about her soul she will begin to think about her throne,
especially if she has children. But all this is far away and for the present I
am glad that neither she nor the thieves have got those pearls, though perhaps
they might be safer here than where they are. And now, my son, go rest for you
need it, and dream of nothing, not even Amada, who for her part will dream of
Isis, if at all. I will wake you before the dawn.”
So I went, being too tired to talk more, and slept like a crocodile in the sun,
till, as it seemed to me, but a few minutes later I saw my mother standing over
me with a lamp, saying that it was time to rise. I rose, unwillingly enough,
but refreshed, washed and dressed myself, by which time the sun had begun to
appear. Then I ate some food and, calling Bes, made ready to start for the
palace.
“My son,” said my mother, the lady Tiu, before we parted,
“while you have been sleeping I have been thinking, as is the way of the
old. Peroa, your cousin, will be glad enough to make use of you, but he does
not love you over much because he is jealous of you and fears lest you should
become his rival in the future. Still he is an honest man and will keep a
bargain which he once has made. Now it seems that above everything on earth you
desire Amada on whom you have set your heart since boyhood, but who has always
played with you and spoken to you with her arm stretched out. Also life is
short and may come to an end any day, as you should know better than most men
who have lived among dangers, and therefore it is well that a man should take
what he desires, even if he finds afterwards that the rose he crushes to his
breast has thorns. For then at least he will have smelt the rose, not only have
looked on and longed to smell it. Therefore, before you hand over your gold,
and place your wit and strength at the service of Peroa, make your bargain with
him; namely, that if thereby you save Amada from the King’s House of
Women and help to set Peroa on the throne, he shall promise her to you free of
any priestly curse, you giving her as dowry the priceless rose-hued pearls that
are worth a kingdom. So you will get your rose till it withers, and if the
thorns prick, do not blame me, and one day you may become a king—or a
slave, Amen knows which.”
Now I laughed and said that I would take her counsel who desired Amada and
nothing else. As for all her talk about thorns, I paid no heed to it, knowing
that she loved me very much and was jealous of Amada who she thought would take
her place with me.
CHAPTER X.
SHABAKA PLIGHTS HIS TROTH
Bes and I went armed to the palace, walking in the middle of the road, but now
that the sun was up we met no more robbers. At the gate a messenger summoned me
alone to the presence of Peroa, who, he said, wished to talk with me before the
sitting of the Council. I went and found him by himself.
“I hear that you were attacked last night,” he said after greeting
me.
I answered that I was and told him the story, adding that it was fortunate I
had left the White Seal and the pearls in safe keeping, since without doubt the
would-be thieves were Easterns who desired to recover them.
“Ah! the pearls,” he said. “One of those who handled them,
who was once a dealer in gems, says that they are without price, unmatched in
the whole world, and that never in all his life has he seen any to equal the
smallest of them.”
I replied that I believed this was so. Then he asked me of the value of the
gold of which I had spoken. I told him and it was a great sum, for gold was
scarce in Egypt. His eyes gleamed for he needed wealth to pay soldiers.
“And all this you are ready to hand over to me, Shabaka?”
Now I bethought me of my mother’s words, and answered,
“Yes, Prince, at a price.”
“What price, Shabaka?”
“The price of the hand of the Royal Lady, Amada, freed from her vows.
Moreover, I will give her the pearls as a marriage dowry and place at your
service my sword and all the knowledge I have gained in the East, swearing to
stand or fall with you.”
“I thought it, Shabaka. Well, in this world nothing is given for nothing
and the offer is a fair one. You are well born, too, as well as myself, and a
brave and clever man. Further, Amada has not taken her final vows and therefore
the high priests can absolve her from her marriage to the goddess, or to her
son Horus, whichever it may be, for I do not understand these mysteries. But,
Shabaka, if Fortune should chance to go with us and I should became the first
Pharaoh of a new dynasty in Egypt, he who was married to the Royal Princess of
the true blood might become a danger to my throne and family.”
“I shall not be that man, Prince, who am content with my own station, and
to be your servant.”
“And my son’s, Shabaka? You know that I have but one lawful
son.”
“And your son’s, Prince.”
“You are honest, Shabaka, and I believe you. But how about your sons, if
you have any, and how about Amada herself? Well, in great businesses something
must be risked, and I need the gold and the rest which I cannot take for
nothing, for you won them by your skill and courage and they are yours. But how
you won the seal you have not told us, nor is there time for you to do so
now.”
He thought a little, walking up and down the chamber, then went on,
“I accept your offer, Shabaka, so far as I can.”
“So far as you can, Prince?”
“Yes; I can give you Amada in marriage and make that marriage easy, but
only if Amada herself consents. The will of a Royal Princess of Egypt of full
age cannot be forced, save by her father if he reigns as Pharaoh, and I am not
her father, but only her guardian. Therefore it stands thus. Are you willing to
fulfil your part of the bargain, save only as regards the pearls, if she does
not marry you, and to take your chance of winning Amada as a man wins a woman,
I on my part promising to do all in my power to help your suit?”
Now it was my turn to think for a moment. What did I risk? The gold and perhaps
the pearls, no more, for in any case I should fight for Peroa against the
Eastern king whom I hated, and through him for Egypt. Well, these came to me by
chance, and if they went by chance what of it? Also I was not one who desired
to wed a woman, however much I worshipped her, if she desired to turn her back
on me. If I could win her in fair love—well. If not, it was my
misfortune, and I wanted her in no other way. Lastly, I had reason to think
that she looked on me more favourably than she had ever done on any other man,
and that if it had not been for what my mother called her soul and its
longings, she would have given herself to me before I journeyed to the East.
Indeed, once she had said as much, and there was something in her eyes last
night which told me that in her heart she loved me, though with what passion at
the time I did not know. So very swiftly I made up my mind and answered,
“I understand and I accept. The gold shall be delivered to you to-day,
Prince. The pearls are already in your keeping to await the end.”
“Good!” he exclaimed. “Then let the matter be reduced to
writing and at once, that afterwards neither of us may have cause to complain
of the other.”
So he sent for his secret scribe and dictated to him, briefly but clearly, the
substance of our bargain, nothing being added, and nothing taken away. This
roll written on papyrus was afterwards copied twice, Peroa taking one copy, I
another, and a third being deposited according to custom, in the library of the
temple of Ptah.
When all was done and Peroa and I had touched each other’s breasts and
given our word in the name of Amen, we went to the hall in which we had dined,
where those whom the Prince had summoned were assembled. Altogether there were
about thirty of them, great citizens of Memphis, or landowners from without who
had been called together in the night. Some of these men were very old and
could remember when Egypt had a Pharaoh of its own before the East set its heel
upon her neck, of noble blood also.
Others were merchants who dealt with all the cities of Egypt; others hereditary
generals, or captains of fleets of ships; others Grecians, officers of
mercenaries who were supposed to be in the pay of the King of kings, but hated
him, as did all the Greeks. Then there were the high priests of Ptah, of Amen,
of Osiris and others who were still the most powerful men in the land, since
there was no village between Thebes and the mouths of the Nile in which they
had not those who were sworn to the service of their gods.
Such was the company representing all that remained or could be gathered there
of the greatness of Egypt the ancient and the fallen.
To these when the doors had been closed and barred and trusty watchmen set to
guard them, Peroa expounded the case in a low and earnest voice. He showed them
that the King of the East sought a new quarrel against Egypt that he might
grind her to powder beneath his heel, and that he did this by demanding the
person of Amada, his own niece and the Royal Lady of Egypt, to be included in
his household like any common woman. If she were refused then he would send a
great army under pretext of taking her, and lay the land waste as far as
Thebes. And if she were granted some new quarrel would be picked and in the
person of the royal Amada all of them be for ever shamed.
Next he showed the seal, telling them that I—who was known to many of
them, at least by repute—had brought it from the East, and repeating to
them the plan that I had proposed upon the previous night. After this he asked
their counsel, saying that before noon he must send an answer to Idernes, the
King’s Satrap at Sais.
Then I was called upon to speak and, in answer to questions, answered frankly
that I had stolen the ancient White Seal from the King’s servant who
carried it as a warrant for the King’s private vengeance on one who had
bested him. How I did not mention. I told them also of the state of the Great
King’s empire and that I had heard that he was about to enter upon a war
with the Greeks which would need all its strength, and that therefore if they
wished to strike for liberty the time was at hand.
Then the talk began and lasted for two hours, each man giving his judgment
according to precedence, some one way and some another. When all had done and
it became clear that there were differences of opinion, some being content to
live on in slavery with what remained to them and others desiring to strike for
freedom, among whom were the high priests who feared lest the Eastern heretics
should utterly destroy their worship, Peroa spoke once more.
“Elders of Egypt,” he said briefly, “certain of you think one
way, and certain another, but of this be sure, such talk as we have held
together cannot be hid. It will come to the ears of spies and through them to
those of the Great King, and then all of us alike are doomed. If you refuse to
stir, this very day I with my family and household and the Royal Lady Amada,
and all who cling to me, fly to Upper Egypt and perhaps beyond it to Ethiopia,
leaving you to deal with the Great King, as you will, or to follow me into
exile. That he will attack us there is no doubt, either over the pretext of
Amada or some other, since Shabaka has heard as much from his own lips. Now
choose.”
Then, after a little whispering together, every man of them voted for
rebellion, though some of them I could see with heavy hearts, and bound
themselves by a great oath to cling together to the last.
The matter being thus settled such a letter was written to Idernes as I had
suggested on the night before, and sealed with the Signet of signets. Of the
yielding up of Amada it said nothing, but commanded Idernes, under the private
White Seal that none dared disobey, to wait upon the Prince Peroa at Memphis
forthwith, and there learn from him, the Holder of the Seal, what was the will
of the Great King. Then the Council was adjourned till one hour after noon, and
most of them departed to send messengers bearing secret word to the various
cities and nomes of Egypt.
Before they went, however, I was directed to wait upon my relative, the holy
Tanofir, whom all acknowledged to be the greatest magician in Egypt, and to ask
of him to seek wisdom and an oracle from his Spirit as to the future and
whether in it we should fare well or ill. This I promised to do.
When most of the Council were gone the messengers of Idernes were summoned, and
came proudly, and with them, or rather before them, Bes for whom I had sent as
he was not present at the Council.
“Master,” he whispered to me, “the tallest of those
messengers is the man who captained the robbers last night. Wait and I will
prove it.”
Peroa gave the roll to the head messenger, bidding him bear it to the Satrap in
answer to the letter which he had delivered to him. The man took it insolently
and thrust it into his robe, as he did so revealing a silver chain that had
been broken and knotted together, and asked whether there were words to bear
besides those written in the roll. Before Peroa could answer Bes sprang up
saying,
“O Prince, a boon, the boon of justice on this man. Last night he and
others with him attacked my master and myself, seeking to rob us, but finding
nothing let us go.”
“You lie, Abortion!” said the Eastern.
“Oh! I lie, do I?” mocked Bes. “Well, let us see,” and
shooting out his long arm, he grasped the chain about the messenger’s
neck and broke it with a jerk. “Look, O Prince,” he said,
“you may have noted last night, when that man entered the hall, that
there hung about his neck this chain to which was tied a silver key.”
“I noted it,” said Peroa.
“Then ask him, O Prince, where is the key now.”
“What is that to you, Dwarf?” broke in the man. “The key is
my mark of office as chief butler to the High Satrap. Must I always bear it for
your pleasure?”
“Not when it has been taken from you, Butler,” answered Bes.
“See, here it is,” and from his sleeve he produced the key hanging
to a piece of the chain. “Listen, O Prince,” he said. “I
struggled with this man and the key was in my left hand though he did not know
it at the time, and with it some of the chain. Compare them and judge. Also his
mask slipped and I saw his face and knew him again.”
Peroa laid the pieces of the chain together and observed the workmanship which
was Eastern and rare. Then he clapped his hands, at which sign armed men of his
household entered from behind him.
“It is the same,” he said. “Butler of Idernes, you are a
common thief.”
The man strove to answer, but could not for the deed was proved against him.
“Then, O Prince,” asked Bes, “what is the punishment of those
thieves who attack passers-by with violence in the streets of Memphis, for such
I demand on him?”
“The cutting off of the right hand and scourging,” answered Peroa,
at which words the butler turned to fly. But Bes leapt on him like an ape upon
a bird, and held him fast.
“Seize that thief,” said Peroa to his servants, “and let him
receive fifty blows with the rods. His hand I spare because he must
travel.”
They laid the man down and the rods having been fetched, gave him the blows
until at the thirtieth he howled for mercy, crying out that it was true and
that it was he who had captained the robbers, words which Peroa caused to be
written down. Then he asked him why he, a messenger from the Satrap, had robbed
in the streets of Memphis, and as he refused to answer, commanded the officer
of justice to lay on. After three more blows the man said,
“O Prince, this was no common robbery for gain. I did what I was
commanded to do, because yonder noble had about him the ancient White Seal of
the Great King which he showed to certain of the Satrap’s servants by the
banks of the canal. That seal is a holy token, O Prince, which, it is said, has
descended for twice a thousand years in the family of the Great King, and as
the Satrap did not know how it had come into the hands of the noble Shabaka, he
ordered me to obtain it if I could.”
“And the pearls too, Butler?”
“Yes, O Prince, since those gems are a great possession with which any
Satrap could buy a larger satrapy.”
“Let him go,” said Peroa, and the man rose, rubbing himself and
weeping in his pain.
“Now, Butler,” he went on, “return to your master with a
grateful heart, since you have been spared much that you deserve. Say to him
that he cannot steal the Signet, but that if he is wise he will obey it, since
otherwise his fate may be worse than yours, and to all his servants say the
same. Foolish man, how can you, or your master, guess what is in the mind of
the Great King, or for what purpose the Signet of signets is here in Egypt?
Beware lest you fall into a pit, all of you together, and let Idernes beware
lest he find himself at the very bottom of that pit.”
“O Prince, I will beware,” said the humbled butler, “and
whatever is written over the seal, that I will obey, like many others.”
“You are wise,” answered Peroa; “I pray for his own sake that
the Satrap Idernes may be as wise. Now begone, thanking whatever god you
worship that your life is whole in you and that your right hand remains upon
your wrist.”
So the butler and those with him prostrated themselves before Peroa and bowed
humbly to me and even to Bes because in their hearts now they believed that we
were clothed by the Great King with terrible powers that might destroy them
all, if so we chose. Then they went, the butler limping a little and with no
pride left in him.
“That was good work,” said Peroa to me afterwards when we were
alone, “for now yonder knave is frightened and will frighten his
master.”
“Yes,” I answered, “you played that pipe well, Prince. Still,
there is no time to lose, since before another moon this will all be reported
in the East, whence a new light may arise and perchance a new signet.”
“You say you stole the White Seal?” he asked.
“Nay, Prince, the truth is that Bes bought it—in a certain
fashion—and I used it. Perhaps it is well that you should know no more at
present.”
“Perhaps,” he answered, and we parted, for he had much to do.
That afternoon the Council met again. At it I gave over the gold and by help of
it all was arranged. Within a week ten thousand armed men would be in Memphis
and a hundred ships with their crews upon the Nile; also a great army would be
gathering in Upper Egypt, officered for the most part by Greeks skilled in war.
The Greek cities too at the mouths of the Nile would be ready to revolt, or so
some of their citizens declared, for they hated the Great King bitterly and
longed to cast off his yoke.
For my part, I received the command of the bodyguard of Peroa in which were
many Greeks, and a generalship in the army; while to Bes, at my prayer, was
given the freedom of the land which he accepted with a smile, he who was a king
in his own country.
At length all was finished and I went out into the palace garden to rest myself
before I rode into the desert to see my great uncle, the holy Tanofir. I was
alone, for Bes had gone to bring our horses on which we were to ride, and sat
myself down beneath a palm-tree, thinking of the great adventure on which we
had entered with a merry heart, for I loved adventures.
Next I thought of Amada and was less merry. Then I looked up and lo! she stood
before me, unaccompanied and wearing the dress, not of a priestess, but of an
Egyptian lady with the little circlet of her rank upon her hair. I rose and
bowed to her and we began to walk together beneath the palms, my heart beating
hard within me, for I knew that my hour had come to speak.
Yet it was she who spoke the first, saying,
“I hear that you have been playing a high part, Shabaka, and doing great
things for Egypt.”
“For Egypt and for you who are Egypt,” I answered.
“So I should have been called in the old days, Cousin, because of my
blood and the rank it gives, though now I am but as any other lady of the
land.”
“And so you shall be called in days to come, Amada, if my sword and wit
can win their way.”
“How so, Cousin, seeing that you have promised certain things to my uncle
Peroa and his son?”
“I have promised those things, Amada, and I will abide by my promise; but
the gods are above all, and who knows what they may decree?”
“Yes, Cousin, the gods are above all, and in their hands we will let
these matters rest, provoking them in no manner and least of all by treachery
to our oaths.”
We walked for a little way in silence. Then I spoke.
“Amada, there are more things than thrones in the world.”
“Yes, Cousin, there is that in which all thrones end—death, which
it seems we court.”
“And, Amada, there is that in which all thrones begin—love, which I
court from you.”
“I have known it long,” she said, considering me gravely,
“and been grateful to you who are more to me than any man has been or
ever will be. But, Shabaka, I am a priestess bound to set the holy One I serve
above a mortal.”
“That holy One was wed and bore a child, Amada, who avenged his father,
as I trust that we shall avenge Egypt. Therefore she looks with a kind eye upon
wives and mothers. Also you have not taken your final vows and can be
absolved.”
“Yes,” she said softly.
“Then, Amada, will you give yourself into my keeping?”
“I think so, Shabaka, though it has been in my mind for long, as you know
well, to give myself only to learning and the service of the heavenly Lady. My
heart calls me to you, it is true, day and night it calls, how loudly I will
not tell; yet I would not yield myself to that alone. But Egypt calls me also,
since I have been shown in a dream while I watched in the sanctuary, that you
are the only man who can free her, and I think that this dream came from on
high. Therefore I will give myself, but not yet.”
“Not yet,” I said dismayed. “When?”
“When I have been absolved from my vows, which must be done on the night
of the next new moon, which is twenty-seven days from this. Then, if nothing
comes between us during those twenty-seven days, it shall be announced that the
Royal Lady of Egypt is to wed the noble Shabaka.”
“Twenty-seven days! In such times much may happen in them, Amada. Still,
except death, what can come between us?”
“I know of nothing, Shabaka, whose past is shadowless as the noon.”
“Or I either,” I replied.
Now we were standing in the clear sunlight, but as I said the words a wind
stirred the palm-trees and the shadow from one of them fell full upon me, and
she who was very quick, noted it.
“Some might take that for an omen,” she said with a little laugh,
pointing to the line of the shadow. “Oh! Shabaka, if you have aught to
confess, say it now and I will forgive it. But do not leave me to discover it
afterwards when I may not forgive. Perchance during your journeyings in the
East——”
“Nothing, nothing,” I exclaimed joyfully, who during all that time
had scarcely spoken to a youthful woman.
“I am glad that nothing happened in the East that could separate us,
Shabaka, though in truth my thought was not your own, for there are more things
than women in the world. Only it seems strange to me that you should return to
Egypt laden with such priceless gifts from him who is Egypt’s greatest
enemy.”
“Have I not told you that I put my country before myself? Those gifts
were won fairly in a wager, Amada, whereof you heard the story but last night.
Moreover you know the purpose to which they are to be put,” I replied
indignantly.
“Yes, I know and now I am sure. Be not angry, Shabaka, with her who loves
you truly and hopes ere long to call you husband. But till that day take it not
amiss if I keep somewhat aloof from you, who must break with the past and learn
to face a future of which I did not dream.”
For the rest she stretched out her hand and I kissed it, for while she was
still a priestess her lips she would not suffer me to touch. Another moment and
smiling happily, she had glided away, leaving me alone in the garden.
Then it was for the first time that I bethought me of the warnings of Bes and
remembered that it was I, not he, who had told the Great King the name of the
most beautiful woman in Egypt, although in all innocence. Yes, I remembered,
and felt as if all the shadows on the earth had wrapped me round. I thought of
finding her, but she had gone whither I knew not in that great palace. So I
determined that the next time we were alone I would tell her of the matter,
explaining all, and with this thought I comforted myself who did not know that
until many days were past we should be alone no more.
After this I went home and told my mother all my joy, for in truth there was no
happier man in Egypt. She listened, then answered, smiling a little.
“When your father wished to take me to wife, Shabaka, it was not my hand
that I gave him to kiss, and as you know, I too have the blood of kings in me.
But then I was not a priestess of Isis, so doubtless all is well. Only in
twenty-seven days much may happen, as you said to Amada. Now I wonder why did
she——? Well, no matter, since priestesses are not like other women
who only think of the man they have won and of naught before or after. The
blessing of the gods and mine be on you both, my son,” and she went away
to attend to her household matters.
As we rode to Sekera to find the holy Tanofir I told Bes also, adding that I
had forgotten to reveal that it was I who had spoken Amada’s name to the
king, but that I intended to do so ere long.
Bes rolled his eyes and answered,
“If I were you, Master, as I had forgotten, I should continue to forget,
for what is welcome in one hour is not always welcome in another. Why speak of
the matter at all, which is one hard to explain to a woman, however wise and
royal? I have already said that I spoke the name to the King and that
you were brought from the boat to say whether I was noted for my truthfulness.
Is not that enough?”
While I considered, Bes went on,
“You may remember, Master, that when I told, well—the truth about
this story, the lady Amada asked earnestly that I should be scourged, even to
the bones. Now if you should tell another truth which will make mine dull as
tarnished silver, she will not leave me even my bones, for I shall be proved a
liar, and what will happen to you I am sure I do not know. And, Master, as I am
no longer a slave here in Egypt, to say nothing of what I may be elsewhere, I
have no fancy for scourgings, who may not kiss the hand that smites me as you
can.”
“But, Bes,” I said, “what is, is and may always be learned in
this way or in that.”
“Master, if what is were always learned, I think the world would fall to
pieces, or at least there would be no men left on it. Why should this matter be
learned? It is known to you and me alone, leaving out the Great King who
probably has forgotten as he was drunk at the time. Oh! Master, when you have
neither bow nor spear at hand, it is not wise to kick a sleeping lion in the
stomach, for then he will remember its emptiness and sup off you. Beside, when
first I told you that tale I made a mistake. I did tell the Great King, as I
now remember quite clearly, that the beautiful lady was named Amada, and he
only sent for you to ask if I spoke the truth.”
“Bes,” I exclaimed, “you worshippers of the Grasshopper wear
virtue easily.”
“Easily as an old sandal, Master, or rather not at all, since the
Grasshopper has need of none. For ages they have studied the ways of those who
worship the gods of Egypt, and from them have learned——”
“What?”
“Amongst other things, Master, that woman, being modest, is shocked at
the sight of the naked Truth.”
CHAPTER XI.
THE HOLY TANOFIR
We entered the City of Graves that is called Sekera. In the centre towered
pyramids that hid the bones of ancient and forgotten kings, and everywhere
around upon the desert sands was street upon street of monuments, but save for
a priest or two hurrying to patter his paid office in the funeral chapels of
the departed, never a living man. Bes looked about him and sniffed with his
wide nostrils.
“Is there not death enough in the world, Master,” he asked,
“that the living should wish to proclaim it in this fashion, rolling it
on their tongues like a morsel they are loth to swallow, because it tastes so
good? Oh! what a waste is here. All these have had their day and yet they need
houses and pyramids and painted chambers in which to sleep, whereas if they
believed the faith they practised, they would have been content to give their
bones to feed the earth they fed on, and fill heaven with their souls.”
“Do your people thus, Bes?”
“For the most part, Master. Our dead kings and great ones we enclose in
pillars of crystal, but we do this that they may serve a double purpose. One is
that the pillars may support the roof of their successors, and the other, that
those who inherit their goods may please themselves by reflecting how much
handsomer they are than those who went before them. For no mummy looks really
nice, Master, at least with its wrappings off, and our kings are put naked into
the crystal.”
“And what becomes of the rest, Bes?”
“Their bodies go to the earth or the water and the Grasshopper carries
off their souls to—where, Master?”
“I do not know, Bes.”
“No, Master, no one knows, except the lady Amada and perhaps the holy
Tanofir. Here I think is the entrance to his hole,” and he pulled up his
beast with a jerk at what looked like the doorway of a tomb.
Apparently we were expected, for a tall and proud-looking girl clad in white
and with extraordinarily dark eyes, appeared in the doorway and asked in a soft
voice if we were the noble Shabaka and Bes, his slave.
“I am Shabaka,” I answered, “and this is Bes, who is not my
slave but a free citizen of Egypt.”
The girl contemplated the dwarf with her big eyes, then said,
“And other things, I think.”
“What things?” inquired Bes with interest, as he stared at this
beautiful lady.
“A very brave and clever man and one perhaps who is more than he seems to
be.”
“Who has been telling you about me?” exclaimed Bes anxiously.
“No one, O Bes, at least not that I can remember.”
“Not that you can remember! Then who and what are you who learn things
you know not how?”
“I am named Karema and desert-bred, and my office is that of Cup to the
holy Tanofir.”
“If hermits drink from such a cup I shall turn hermit,” said Bes,
laughing. “But how can a woman be a man’s cup and what kind of a
wine does he drink from her?”
“The wine of wisdom, O Bes,” she replied colouring a little, for
like many Arabs of high blood she was very fair in hue.
“Wine of wisdom,” said Bes. “From such cups most drink the
wine of folly, or sometimes of madness.”
“The holy Tanofir awaits you,” she interrupted, and turning,
entered the doorway.
A little way down the passage was a niche in which stood three lamps ready
lighted. One of these she took and gave the others to us. Then we followed her
down a steep incline of many steps, till at length we found ourselves in a hot
and enormous hall hewn from the living rock and filled with blackness.
“What is this place?” said Bes, who looked frightened, and although
he spoke in a low whisper, our guide overheard him and turning, answered,
“This is the burial place of the Apis bulls. See, here lies the last, not
yet closed in,” and holding up her lamp she revealed a mighty sarcophagus
of black granite set in a niche of the mausoleum.
“So they make mummies of bulls as well as of men,” groaned Bes.
“Oh! what a land. But when I have seen the holy Tanofir it was in a brick
cell beneath the sky.”
“Doubtless that was at night, O Bes,” answered Karema, “for
in such a house he sleeps, spending his days in the Apis tomb, because of all
the evil that is worked beneath the sun.”
“Hump,” said Bes, “I should have thought that more was worked
beneath the moon, but doubtless the holy Tanofir knows better, or being asleep
does not mind.”
Now in front of each of the walled-up niches was a little chapel, and at the
fourth of these whence a light came, the maiden stopped, saying,
“Enter. Here dwells the holy Tanofir. He tended this god during its
life-days in his youth, and now that the god is dead he prays above its
bones.”
“Prays to the bones of a dead bull in the dark! Well, give me a live
grasshopper in the light; he is more cheerful,” muttered Bes.
“O Dwarf,” cried a deep and resounding voice from within the
chapel, “talk no more of things you do not understand. I do not pray to
the bones of a dead bull, as you in your ignorance suppose. I pray to the
spirit whereof this sacred beast was but one of the fleshly symbols, which in
this haunted place you will do well not to offend.”
Then for once I saw Bes grow afraid, for his great jaw dropped and he trembled.
“Master,” he said to me, “when next you visit tombs where
maidens look into your heart and hermits hear your very thoughts, I pray you
leave me behind. The holy Tanofir I love, if from afar, but I like not his
house, or his——” Here he looked at Karema who was regarding
him with a sweet smile over the lamp flame, and added, “There is
something the matter with me, Master; I cannot even lie.”
“Cease from talking follies, O Shabaka and Bes, and enter,” said
the tremendous voice from within.
So we entered and saw a strange sight. Against the back wall of the chapel
which was lit with lamps, stood a life-sized statue of Maat, goddess of Law and
Truth, fashioned of alabaster. On her head was a tall feather, her hair was
covered with a wig, on her neck lay a collar of blue stones; on her arms and
wrists were bracelets of gold. A tight robe draped her body. In her right hand
that hung down by her side, she held the looped Cross of Life, and in her left
which was advanced, a long, lotus-headed sceptre, while her painted eyes stared
fixedly at the darkness. Crouched upon the ground, at the feet of the statue,
scribe fashion, sat my great-uncle Tanofir, a very aged man with sightless eyes
and long hands, so thin that one might see through them against the lamp-flame.
His head was shaven, his beard was long and white; white too was his robe. In
front of him was a low altar, on which stood a shallow silver vessel filled
with pure water, and on either side of it a burning lamp.
We knelt down before him, or rather I knelt, for Bes threw himself flat upon
his face.
“Am I the King of kings whom you have so lately visited, that you should
prostrate yourselves before me?” said Tanofir in his great voice, which,
coming from so frail and aged a man seemed most unnatural. “Or is it to
the goddess of Truth beyond that you bow yourselves? If so, that is well, since
one, if not both of you, greatly needs her pardon and her help. Or is it to the
sleeping god beyond who holds the whole world on his horns? Or is it to the
darkness of this hallowed place which causes you to remember the nearness of
the awaiting tomb?”
“Nay, my Uncle,” I said, “we would greet you, no more, who
are so worthy of our veneration, seeing we believe, both of us, that you saved
us yonder in the East, from that tomb of which you speak, or rather from the
jaws of lions or a cruel death by torments.”
“Perchance I did, I or the gods of which I am the instrument. At least I
remember that I sent you certain messages in answer to a prayer for help that
reached me, here in my darkness. For know that since we parted I have gone
quite blind so that I must use this maiden’s eyes to read what is written
in yonder divining-cup. Well, it makes the darkness of this sepulchre easier to
bear and prepares me for my own. ‘Tis full a hundred and twenty years
since first I looked upon the light, and now the time of sleep draws near. Come
hither, my nephew, and kiss me on the brow, remembering in your strength that a
day will dawn when as I am, so shall you be, if the gods spare you so
long.”
So I kissed him, not without fear, for the old man was unearthly. Then he sent
Karema from the place and bade me tell him my story, which I did. Why he did
this I cannot say, since he seemed to know it already and once or twice
corrected me in certain matters that I had forgotten, for instance as to the
exact words that I had used to the Great King in my rage and as to the fashion
in which I was tied in the boat. When I had done, he said,
“So you gave the name of Amada to the Great King, did you? Well, you
could have done nothing else if you wished to go on living, and therefore
cannot be blamed. Yet before all is finished I think it will bring you into
trouble, Shabaka, since among many gifts, the gods did not give that of reason
to women. If so, bear it, since it is better to have trouble and be alive than
to have none and be dead, that is, for those whose work is still to do in the
world. And you, or rather Bes, stole the White Signet of signets of which,
although it is so simple and ancient, there is not the like for power in the
whole world. That was well done since it will be useful for a while. And now
Peroa has determined to rebel against the King, which also is well done. Oh!
trouble not to tell me of that business for I know all. But what would you
learn of me, Shabaka?”
“I am instructed to learn from you the end of these great matters, my
Uncle.”
“Are you mad, Shabaka, that you should think me a god who can read the
future?”
“Not at all, my Uncle, who know that you can if you will.”
“Call the maiden,” he said.
So Bes went out and brought her in.
“Be seated, Karema, there in front of the altar, and look into my
eyes.”
She obeyed and presently seemed to go to sleep for her head nodded. Then he
said,
“Wake, woman, look into the water in the bowl upon the altar and tell me
what you see.”
She appeared to wake, though I perceived that this was not really so, for she
seemed a different woman with a fixed face that frightened me, and wide and
frozen eyes. She stared into the silver bowl, then spoke in a new voice, as
though some spirit used her tongue.
“I see myself crowned a queen in a land I hate,” she said coldly, a
saying at which I gasped. “I am seated on a throne beside yonder
dwarf,” a saying at which Bes gasped. “Although so hideous, this
dwarf is a great man with a good heart, a cunning mind and the courage of a
lion. Also his blood is royal.”
Here Bes rolled his eyes and smiled, but Tanofir did not seem in the least
astonished, and said,
“Much of this is known to me and the rest can be guessed. Pass on to what
will happen in Egypt, before the spirit leaves you.”
“There will be war in Egypt,” she answered. “I see fightings;
Shabaka and others lead the Egyptians. The Easterns are driven away or slain.
Peroa rules as Pharaoh, I see him on his throne. Shabaka is driven away in his
turn, I see him travelling south with the dwarf and with myself, looking very
sad. Time passes. I see the moons float by; I see messengers reach Shabaka,
sent by Peroa and you O holy Tanofir; they tell of trouble in Egypt. I see
Shabaka and the dwarf coming north at the head of a great army of black men
armed with bows. With them I come rejoicing, for my heart seems to shine. He
reaches a temple on the Nile about which is camped another great army, a
countless army of Easterns under the command of the King of kings. Shabaka and
the dwarf give battle to that army and the fray is desperate. They destroy it,
they drive it into the Nile; the Nile runs red with blood. The Great King
falls, an arrow from the bow of Shabaka is in his heart. He enters the temple,
a conqueror, and there lies Peroa, dying or dead. A veiled priestess is there
before an image, I cannot see her face. Shabaka looks on her. She stretches out
her arms to him, her eyes burn with woman’s love, her breast heaves, and
above the image frowns and threatens. All is done, for Tanofir, Master of
spirits, you die, yonder in the temple on the Nile, and therefore I can see no
more. The power that comes through you, has left me.”
Then once more she became as a woman asleep.
“You have heard, Shabaka and Bes,” said Tanofir quietly and
stroking his long white beard, “and what that maiden seemed to read in
the water you may believe or disbelieve as you will.”
“What do you believe, O holy Tanofir?” I asked.
“The only part of the story whereof I am sure,” he replied, evading
a direct answer, “is that which said that I shall die, and that when I am
dead I shall no longer be able to cause the maiden Karema to see visions. For
the rest I do not know. These things may happen or they may not. But,” he
added with a note of warning in his voice, “whether they happen or not,
my counsel to you both is that you say nothing of them beforehand.”
“What then shall we report to those who bid me seek the oracle of your
wisdom, O Tanofir?”
“You can tell them that my wisdom declared that the omens were mixed with
good and evil, but that time would show the truth. Hush now, the maiden is
about to awake and must not be frightened. Also it is time for me to be led
from this sepulchre to where I sleep, for I think that Ra has set and I am
weary. Oh! Shabaka, why do you seek to peer into the future, which from day to
day will unroll itself as does a scroll? Be content with the present, man, and
take what Fate gives you of good or ill, not seeking to learn what offerings he
hides beneath his robe in the days and the years and the centuries to
come.”
“Yet you have sought to learn those things, O Tanofir, and not in
vain.”
“Aye and what have they made of me? A blind old hermit weighed down with
the weight of years and holding in my fingers but some few threads that with
pain and grief I have plucked from the fringe of Wisdom’s robe. Be warned
by me, Nephew. While you are a man, live the life of a man, and when you become
a spirit, live the life of a spirit. But do not seek to mix the two together
like oil and wine, and thus spoil both. I am glad to learn, O Bes, that you are
going to make a king’s, or a slave’s wife, whichever it may be, of
this maiden, seeing that I love her well and hold this trade unwholesome for
her. She will be better bearing babes than reading visions in a diviner’s
cup, and I will pray the gods that they may not be dwarfs as you are, but take
on the likeness of their mother, who tells me that she is fair. Hush! she
stirs.
“Karema, are you awake? Good. Then lead me from the sepulchre, that I may
make my evening prayer beneath the stars. Go, Shabaka and Bes, you are brave
men, both of you, and I am glad to have the one for nephew and the other for
pupil. My greetings to your mother, Tiu. She is a good woman and a true, one to
whom you will do well to hearken. To the lady Amada also, and bid her study her
beauteous face in a mirror and not be holy overmuch, since too great holiness
often thwarts itself and ends in trouble for the unholy flesh. Still she loves
pearls like other women, does she not, and even the statue of Isis likes to be
adorned. As for you, Bes, though I think that is not your name, do not lie
except when you are obliged, for jugglers who play with too many knives are apt
to cut their fingers. Also give no more evil counsel to your Master on matters
that have to do with woman. Now farewell. Let me hear how fortune favours you
from time to time, Shabaka, for you take part in a great game, such as I loved
in my youth before I became a holy hermit. Oh! if they had listened to me,
things would have been different in Egypt to-day. But it was written otherwise,
and as ever, women were the scribes. Good night, good night, good night! I am
glad that my thought reached you yonder in the East, and taught you what to say
and do. It is well to be wise sometimes, for others’ sake, but not for
our own, oh! not for our own.”
“Master,” said Bes as we ambled homewards beneath the stars,
“the holy Tanofir is a man for thought to feed on, since having climbed
to the topmost peak of holiness, he does not seem to like its cold air and
warns off those who would follow in his footsteps.”
“Then he might have spared himself the pains in your case, Bes, or in my
own for that matter, since we shall never come so high.”
“No, Master, and I am glad to have his leave to stay lower down, since
that hot place of dead bulls is not one which I wish to inhabit in my age,
making use of a maiden to stare into a pot of water, and there read marvels,
which I could invent better for myself after a jug or two of wine. Oh! the holy
Tanofir is quite right. If these things are going to happen let them happen,
for we cannot change them by knowing of them beforehand. Who wishes to know,
Master, if his throat will be cut?”
“Or that he will be married,” I suggested.
“Just so, Master, seeing that such prophecies end in becoming truths
because we make them true, feeling that we must. Thus, now I must marry yonder
Karema if she will marry me for fear lest I should prove the holy Tanofir to be
what he called me—a liar.”
I laughed and then asked Bes if he had taken note of what the seeress said of
our flight south and our return thence with a great army of black men armed
with bows.
“Yes, Master,” he answered gravely, “and I think this army
can be none other than that of the Ethiopians of whom by right I am the King.
This very night I send messengers to tell those who rule in my place that I
still live and am changing my mind on the matter of marriage. Also that if I do
change it I may return to them, the wisest man who ever wore the crown of
Ethiopia, having journeyed all about the world and collected much
knowledge.”
“Perhaps, Bes, those who rule in your place may not wish to give it up to
you. Perhaps they will kill you.”
“Have no fear, Master; as I have told you, the Ethiopians are a faithful
people. Moreover they know that such a deed would bring the curse of the
Grasshopper on them, since then the locusts would appear and eat up all their
land, and when they were starving their enemies would attack them. Lastly they
are a very tall folk and simple-minded and would not wish to miss the chance of
being ruled over by the wisest dwarf in all the world, if only because it would
be something new to them, Master.”
Again I laughed thinking that Bes was jesting according to his fashion. But
when that night, chancing to go round the corner of the house, I came upon him
with a circlet of feathers round his head and his big bow in his hand,
addressing three great black men who knelt before him as though he were a god,
I changed my mind. As I withdrew he caught sight of me and said,
“I pray you, my lord Shabaka, stay one moment.” Then he spoke to
the three men in his own language, translating sentence by sentence to me what
he said to them. Briefly it was this:—
“Say to the Lords and Councillors of the Ancient Kingdom that I, the
Karoon” (for such it seemed was his title) “have a friend named the
lord Shabaka, he whom you see before you, who again and again has saved my
life, nursing me in his arms as a mother nurses her babe, and who is, after me,
the bravest and the wisest man in all the world. Say to them that if indeed I
double myself by marriage and return having fulfilled the law, I will beg this
mighty prince to accompany me, and that if he consents that will be the most
joyful day which the Ethiopians have seen for a thousand years, since he will
teach them wisdom and lead their armies in great and glorious battles. Let the
priests of the Grasshopper pray therefore that he may consent to do so. Now
salute the mighty lord Shabaka who can send one arrow through all three of you
and two more behind, and depart, tarrying not day or night till you reach the
land of Ethiopia. Then when you have delivered the message of Karoon to the
Captains and the Councillors, return, or let others return and seek me out
wherever I may be, bringing of the gold of Ethiopia and other gifts, together
with their answer, seeing that I and the lord Shabaka who have the world
beneath our feet, will not come to a land where we are not welcome.”
So these great men saluted me as though I were the King of kings himself, after
which they rubbed their foreheads in the dust before Bes, said something which
I did not understand, leapt to their feet, crying “Karoon” and
sprang away into the night.
“It is good to have been a slave, Master,” said Bes when they had
gone, “since it teaches one that it is even better to be a king, at least
sometimes.”
Here I may add that during the days which followed Bes was often absent. When I
asked him where he had gone, he would answer, to drink in the wisdom of the
holy Tanofir by help of a certain silver vessel that the maiden Karema held to
his lips. From all of which I gathered that he was wooing the lady who had
called herself the Cup of Tanofir, and wondered how the business went, though
as he said no more I did not ask him.
Indeed I had little time to talk with Bes about such light matters, since
things moved apace in Memphis. Within six days all the great lords left in
Upper Egypt were sworn to the revolt under the leadership of Peroa, and hour by
hour their vassals or hired mercenaries flowed into the city. These it was my
duty to weld into an army, and at this task I toiled without cease, separating
them into regiments and drilling them, also arranging for the arming and
victualling of the boats of war. Then news came that Idernes was advancing from
Sais with a great force of Easterns, all the garrison of Lower Egypt indeed, as
his messengers said, to answer the summons conveyed to him under the private
Seal of seals.
Of Amada during this time I saw little, only meeting her now and again at the
table of Peroa, or elsewhere in public. For the rest it pleased her to keep
away from me. Once or twice I tried to find her alone, only to discover that
she was engaged in the service of the goddess. Once, too, as she left
Peroa’s table, I whispered into her ear that I wished to speak with her.
But she shook her head, saying,
“After the new moon, Shabaka. Then you shall speak with me as much as you
wish.”
Thus it came about that never could I find opportunity to tell her of that
matter of what had happened at the court of the Great King. Still every morning
she sent me some token, flowers or trifling gifts, and once a ring that must
have belonged to her forefathers, since on its bezel was engraved the royal
uræus, together with the signs of long life and health, which ring I
wore hung about my neck but not upon my finger, fearing lest that emblem of
royalty might offend Peroa or some of his House, if they chanced to see it. So
in answer I also sent her flowers and other gifts, and for the rest was content
to wait.
All of which things my mother noted with a smile, saying that the lady Amada
showed a wonderful discretion, such as any man would value in a wife of so much
beauty, which also must be most pleasing to her mistress, the goddess Isis. To
this I answered that I valued it less as a lover than I might do as a husband.
My mother smiled again and spoke of something else.
Thus things went on while the storm-clouds gathered over Egypt.
One night I could not sleep. It was that of the new moon and I knew that during
those hours of darkness, before the solemn conclave of the high priests, with
pomp and ceremony in the sanctuary of the temple, Amada had undergone
absolution of her vows to Isis and been given liberty to wed as other women do.
Indeed my mother, in virtue of her rank as a Singer of Amen, had been present
at the rite, and returning, told me all that happened.
She described how Amada had appeared, clad as a priestess, how she had put up
her prayer to the four high priests seated in state, demanding to be loosed
from her vow “for the sake of her heart and of Egypt.”
Then one of the high priests, he of Amen, I think, as the chief of them all,
had advanced to the statue of the goddess Isis and whispered the prayer to it,
whereon after a pause the goddess nodded thrice in the sight of all present,
thereby signifying her assent. This done the high priest returned and
proclaimed the absolution in the ancient words “for the sake of the
suppliant’s heart and of Egypt” and with it the blessing of the
goddess on her union, adding, however, the formula, “at thy prayer,
daughter and spouse, I, the goddess Isis, cut the rope that binds thee to me on
earth. Yet if thou should’st tie it again, know that it may never more be
severed, for if thou strivest so to do, it shall strangle thee in whatever
shape thou livest on the earth throughout the generations, and with thee the
man thou choosest and those who give thee to him. Thus saith Isis the Queen of
Heaven.”
“What does that mean?” I asked my mother.
“It means, my son, that if, having broken her vows to Isis, a woman
should repeat them and once more enter the service of the goddess, and then for
the second time seek to break them, she and the man for whom she did this thing
would be like flies in a spider’s web, and that not only in this life,
but in any other that may be given to them in the world.”
“It seems that Isis has a long arm,” I said.
“Without doubt a very long arm, my son, since Isis, by whatever name she
is called, is a power that does not die or forget.”
“Well, Mother, in this case she can have no reason to remember, since
never again will Amada be her priestess.”
“I think not, Shabaka. Yet who can be sure of what a woman will or will
not do, now or hereafter? For my part I am glad that I have served Amen and not
Isis, and that after I was wed.”
CHAPTER XII.
THE SLAYING OF IDERNES
Whilst I was still talking to my mother I received an urgent summons to the
palace. I went and in a little ante-chamber met Amada alone, who, I could see,
was waiting there for me. She was arrayed in her secular dress and wore the
insignia of royalty, looking exceedingly beautiful. Moreover, her whole aspect
had changed, for now she was no longer a priestess sworn to mysteries, but just
a lovely and a loving woman.
“It is done, Shabaka,” she whispered, “and thou art mine and
I am thine.”
Then I opened my arms and she sank upon my breast and for the first time I
kissed her on the lips, kissed her many times and oh! my heart almost burst
with joy. But all too fleeting was that sweet moment of love’s first
fruits, whereon I had sown the seed so many years ago, for while we yet clung
together, whispering sweet things into each other’s ears, I heard a voice
calling me and was forced to go away before I had even time to ask when we
might be wed.
Within the Council was gathered. The news before it was that the Satrap Idernes
lay camped upon the Nile with some ten thousand men, not far from the great
pyramids, that is, within striking distance of Memphis. Moreover his messengers
announced that he purposed to visit the Prince Peroa that day with a small
guard only, to inquire into this matter of the Signet, for which visit he
demanded a safe-conduct sworn in the name of the Great King and in those of the
gods of Egypt and the East. Failing this he would at once attack Memphis
notwithstanding any commands that might be given him under the Signet, which,
until he beheld it with his own eyes, he believed to be a forgery.
The question was—what answer should be sent to him? The debate that
followed proved long and earnest. Some were in favour of attacking Idernes at
once although his camp was reported to be strongly entrenched and flanked on
one side by the Nile and on the other by the rising ground whereon stood the
great sphinx and the pyramids. Others, among whom I was numbered, thought
otherwise, for I hold that some evil god led me to give counsel that day which,
if it were good for Egypt was most ill for my own fortunes. Perchance this god
was Isis, angry at the loss of her votary.
I pointed out that by receiving Idernes Peroa would gain time which would
enable a body of three thousand men, if not more, who were advancing down the
Nile, to join us before they were perhaps cut off from the city, and thus give
us a force as large as his, or larger. Also I showed that having summoned
Idernes under the Signet, we should put ourselves in the wrong if we refused to
receive him and instead attacked him at once.
A third party was in favour of allowing him to enter Memphis with his guard and
then making him prisoner or killing him. As to this I pointed out again that
not only would it involve the breaking of a solemn oath, which might bring the
curse of the gods upon our cause and proclaim us traitors to the world, but it
would also be foolish since Idernes was not the only general of the Easterns
and if we cut off him and his escort, it would avail us little for then the
rest of the Easterns would fight in a just cause.
So in the end it was agreed that the safe-conduct should be sent and that Peroa
should receive Idernes that very day at a great feast given in his honour.
Accordingly it was sent in the ancient form, the oaths being taken before the
messengers that neither he nor those with him who must not number more than
twenty men, would be harmed in Memphis and that he would be guarded on the road
back until he reached the outposts of his own camp.
This done, I was despatched up the Nile bank in a chariot accompanied only by
Bes, to hurry on the march of those troops of which I have spoken, so that they
might reach Memphis by sundown. Before I went, however, I had some words alone
with Peroa. He told me that my immediate marriage with the lady Amada would be
announced at the feast that night. Thereon I prayed him to deliver to Amada the
rope of priceless rose-hued pearls which was in his keeping, as my betrothal
gift, with the prayer that she would wear them at the feast for my sake. There
was no time for more.
The journey up Nile proved long for the road was bad being covered with drifted
sand in some places and deep in mud from the inundation waters in others. At
length I found the troops just starting forward after their rest, and rejoiced
to see that there were more of them than I had thought. I told the case to
their captains, who promised to make a forced march and to be in Memphis two
hours before midnight.
As we drove back Bes said to me suddenly,
“Do you know why you could not find me this morning?”
I answered that I did not.
“Because a good slave should always run a pace ahead of his master, to
clear the road and tell him of its pitfalls. I was being married. The Cup of
the holy Tanofir is now by law and right Queen of the Ethiopians. So when you
meet her again you must treat her with great respect, as I do already.”
“Indeed, Bes,” I said laughing, “and how did you manage that
business? You must have wooed her well during these days which have been so
full for both of us.”
“I did not woo her over much, Master; indeed, the time was lacking. I
wooed the holy Tanofir, which was more important.”
“The holy Tanofir, Bes?” I exclaimed.
“Yes, Master. You see this beautiful Cup of his is after all—his
beautiful Cup. Her mind is the shadow of his mind and from her he pours out his
wisdom. So I told him all the case. At first he was angry, for, notwithstanding
the words he spoke to you and me, when it came to a point the holy Tanofir,
being after all much like other men, did not wish to lose his Cup. Indeed had
he been a few score of years younger I am not sure but that he would have
forgotten some of his holiness because of her. Still he came to see matters in
the true light at last—for your sake, Master, not for mine, since his
wisdom told him it was needful that I should become King of the Ethiopians
again, to do which I must be married. At any rate he worked upon the mind of
that Cup of his—having first settled that she should procure a younger
sister of her own to fill her place—in such fashion that when at length I
spoke to her on the matter, she did not say no.”
“No doubt because she was fond of you for yourself, Bes. A woman would
not marry even to please the holy Tanofir.”
“Oh! Master,” he replied in a new voice, a very sad voice, “I
would that I could think so. But look at me, a misshapen dwarf, accursed from
birth. Could a fair lady like this Karema wed such a one for his own
sake?”
“Well, Bes, there might be other reasons besides the holy Tanofir,”
I said hurriedly.
“Master, there were no other reasons, unless the Cup, when it is awake,
remembers what it has held in trance, which I do not believe. I wooed her as I
was, not telling her that I am also King of the Ethiopians, or any more than I
seem to be. Moreover the holy Tanofir told her nothing, for he swore as much to
me and he does not lie.”
“And what did she say to you, Bes?” I asked, for I was curious.
“She lied fast enough, Master. She said—well, what she said when
first we met her, that there was more in me than the eye saw and that she who
had lived so much with spirits looked to the spirit rather than to the flesh,
and that dwarf or no she loved me and desired nothing better than to marry me
and be my true and faithful wife and helpmeet. She lied so well that once or
twice almost I believed her. At any rate I took her at her word, not altogether
for myself, believe me, Master, but because without doubt what the holy Tanofir
has shown us will come to pass, and it is necessary to you that I should be
married.”
“You married her to help me, Bes?”
“That is so, Master—after all, but a little thing, seeing that she
is beautiful, well born and very pleasant, and I am fond of her. Also I do her
no wrong for she has bought more than she bargained for, and if she has any
that are not dwarfs, her children may be kings. I do not think,” he added
reflectively, “that even the faithful Ethiopians could accept a second
dwarf as their king. One is very well for a change, but not two or three. The
stomach of a tall people would turn against them.”
I took Bes’s hand and pressed it, understanding the depth of his love and
sacrifice. Also some spirit—doubtless it came from the holy
Tanofir—moved me to say,
“Be comforted, Bes, for I am sure of this. Your children will be strong
and straight and tall, more so than any of their forefathers that went before
them.”
This indeed proved to be the case, for their father’s deformity was but
an accident, not born in his blood.
“Those are good-omened words, Master, for which I thank you, though the
holy Tanofir said the like when he wed us with the sacred words this morning
and gave us his blessing, endowing my wife with certain gifts of secret wisdom
which he said would be of use to her and me.”
“Where is she now, Bes?”
“With the holy Tanofir, Master, until I fetch her, training her younger
sister to be a diviner’s worthy Cup. Only perhaps I shall never send,
seeing that I think there will be fighting soon.”
“Yes, Bes, but being newly married you will do well to leave it to
others.”
“No, no, Master. Battle is better than wives. Moreover, could you think
that I would leave you to stand alone in the fray? Why if I did and harm came
to you I should die of shame or hang myself and then Karema would never be a
queen. So both her trades would be gone, since after marriage she cannot be a
Cup, and her heart would break. But here are the gates of Memphis, so we will
forget love and think of war.”
An hour later I and my mother, the lady Tiu, stood in the banqueting hall of
the palace with many others, and learned that the Satrap Idernes and his escort
had reached Memphis and would be present at the feast. A while later trumpets
blew and a glittering procession entered the hall. At the head of it was Peroa
who led Idernes by the hand. This Eastern was a big, strong man with tired and
anxious eyes, such as I had noted were common among the servants of the Great
King who from day to day never knew whether they would fill a Satrapy or a
grave. He was clad in gorgeous silks and wore a cap upon his head in which
shone a jewel, but beneath his robes I caught the glint of mail.
As he came into the hall and noted the number and quality of the guests and the
stir and the expectant look upon their faces, he started as though he were
afraid, but recovering himself, murmured some courteous words to his host and
advanced towards the seat of honour which was pointed out to him upon the
Prince’s right. After these two followed the wife of Peroa with her son
and daughters. Then, walking alone in token of her high rank, appeared Amada,
the Royal Lady of Egypt, wonderfully arrayed. Now, however, she wore no emblems
of royalty, either because it was not thought wise that these should be shown
in the presence of the Satrap, or because she was about to be given in marriage
to one who was not royal. Indeed, as I noted with joy, her only ornament was
the rope of rose-hued pearls which were arranged in a double row upon her
breast.
She searched me out with her eyes, smiled, touching the pearls with her finger,
and passed on to her place next to the daughters of Peroa, at one end of the
head table which was shaped like a horse’s hoof.
After her came the nobles who had accompanied Idernes, grave Eastern men. One
of these, a tall captain with eyes like a hawk, seemed familiar to me. Nor was
I mistaken, for Bes, who stood behind me and whose business it would be to wait
on me at the feast, whispered in my ear,
“Note that man. He was present when you were brought before the Great
King from the boat and saw and heard all that passed.”
“Then I wish he were absent now,” I whispered back, for at the
words a sudden fear shot through me, of what I could not say.
By degrees all were seated in their appointed places. Mine was by that of my
mother at a long table that stood as it were across the ends of the high table
but at a little distance from them, so that I was almost opposite to Peroa and
Idernes and could see Amada, although she was too far away for me to be able to
speak to her.
The feast began and at first was somewhat heavy and silent, since, save for the
talk of courtesy, none spoke much. At length wine, whereof I noted that Idernes
drank a good deal, as did his escort, but Peroa and the Egyptians little,
loosened men’s tongues and they grew merrier. For it was the custom of
the people of the Great King to discuss both private and public business when
full of strong drink, but of the Egyptians when they were quite sober. This was
well known to Peroa and many of us, especially to myself who had been among
them, which was one of the reasons why Idernes had been asked to meet us at a
feast, where we might have the advantage of him in debate.
Presently the Satrap noted the splendid cup from which he drank and asked some
question concerning it of the hawk-eyed noble of whom I have spoken. When it
had been answered he said in a voice loud enough for me to overhear,
“Tell me, O Prince Peroa, was this cup ever that of the Great King which
it so much resembles?”
“So I understand, O Idernes,” answered Peroa. “That is, until
it became mine by gift from the lord Shabaka, who received it from the Great
King.”
An expression of horror appeared upon the face of the Satrap and upon those of
his nobles.
“Surely,” he answered, “this Shabaka must hold the
King’s favours lightly if he passes them on thus to the first-comer. At
the least, let not the vessel which has been hallowed by the lips of the King
of kings be dishonoured by the humblest of his servants. I pray you, O Prince,
that I may be given another cup.”
So a new goblet was brought to him, Peroa trying to pass the matter off as a
jest by appealing to me to tell the story of the cup. Then I said while all
listened,
“O Prince, the most high Satrap is mistaken. The King of kings did not
give me the cup, I bought it from him in exchange for a certain famous bow, and
therefore held it not wrong to pass it on to you, my lord.”
Idernes made no answer and seemed to forget the matter.
A while later, however, his eye fell upon Amada and the rose-hued pearls she
wore, and again he asked a question of the hawk-eyed captain, then said,
“Think me not discourteous, O Prince, if I seem to look upon yonder
lovely lady which in our country, where women do not appear in public, we
should think it an insult to do. But on her fair breast I see certain pearls
like to some that are known throughout the world, which for many years have
been worn by those who sit upon the throne of the East. I would ask if they are
the same, or others?”
“I do not know, O Idernes,” answered Peroa; “I only know that
the lord Shabaka brought them from the East. Inquire of him, if it be your
pleasure.”
“Shabaka again——” began Idernes, but I cut him short,
saying,
“Yes, O Satrap, Shabaka again. I won those pearls in a bet from the Great
King, and with them a certain weight of gold. This I think you knew before,
since your messenger of a while ago was whipped for trying to steal them, which
under the rods he said he did by command, O Satrap.”
To this bold speech Idernes made no answer. Only his captains frowned and many
of the Egyptians murmured approval.
After this the feast went on without further incident for a while, the Easterns
always drinking more wine, till at length the tables were cleared and all of
the meaner sort departed from the hall, save the butlers and the personal
servants such as Bes, who stood behind the seats of their masters. There came a
silence such as precedes the bursting of a storm, and in the midst of it
Idernes spoke, somewhat thickly.
“I did not come here, O Peroa,” he said, “from the seat of
government at Sais to eat your meats and drink your wine. I came to speak of
high matters with you.”
“It is so, O Satrap,” answered Peroa. “And now what may be
your will? Would you retire to discuss them with me and my Councillors?”
“Where is the need, O Peroa, seeing that I have naught to say which may
not be heard by all?”
“As it pleases you. Speak on, O Satrap.”
“I have been summoned here, Prince Peroa, by a writing under what seems
to be the Signet of signets—the ancient White Seal that for generations
unknown has been worn by the forefathers of the King of kings. Where is this
Signet?”
“Here,” said the Prince, opening his robe. “Look on it,
Satrap, and let your lords look, but let none of you dare to touch it.”
Idernes looked long and earnestly, and so did some of his people, especially
the lord with the hawk eyes. Then they stared at each other bewildered and
whispered together.
“It seems to be the very Seal—the White Seal itself!”
exclaimed Idernes at length. “Tell me now, Peroa. How came this sacred
thing that dwells in the East hither into Egypt?”
“The lord Shabaka brought it to me with certain letters from the Great
King, O Satrap.”
“Shabaka for the third time, by the holy Fire!” cried Idernes.
“He brought the cup; he brought the famous pearls; he brought the gold,
and he brought the Signet of signets. What is there then that he did not bring?
Perchance he has the person of the King of kings himself in his keeping!”
“Not that, O Satrap, only the commands of the King of kings which are
prepared ready to deliver to you under the White Seal that you
acknowledge.”
“And what may they be, Egyptian?”
“This, O Satrap: That you and all the army which you have brought with
you retire to Sais and thence out of Egypt as quickly as you may, or pay for
disobedience with your lives.”
Now Idernes and his captains gasped.
“Why this is rebellion!” he said.
“No, O Satrap, only the command of the Great King given under the White
Seal,” and drawing a roll from his breast, Peroa laid it on his brow and
cast it down before Idernes, adding,
“Obey the writing and the Signet, or by virtue of my commission, as soon
as you are returned to your army and your safe-conduct is expired, I fall upon
you and destroy you.”
Idernes looked about him like a wolf in a trap, then asked,
“Do you mean to murder me here?”
“Not so,” answered Peroa, “for you have our safe-conduct and
Egyptians are honourable men. But you are dismissed your office and ordered to
leave Egypt.”
Idernes thought a little while, then said,
“If I leave Egypt, there is at least one whom I am commanded to take with
me under orders and writings that you will not dispute, a maiden named Amada
whom the Great King would number among his women. I am told it is she who sits
yonder—a jewel indeed, fair as the pearls upon her breast which thus will
return into the King’s keeping. Let her be handed over, for she rides
with me at once.”
Now in the midst of an intense silence Peroa answered,
“Amada, the Royal Lady of Egypt, cannot be sent to dwell in the House of
Women of the Great King without the consent of the lord Shabaka, whose she
is.”
“Shabaka for the fourth time!” said Idernes, glaring at me.
“Then let Shabaka come too. Or his head in a basket will suffice, since
that will save trouble afterwards, also some pain to Shabaka. Why, now I
remember. It was this very Shabaka whom the Great King condemned to death by
the boat for a crime against his Majesty, and who bought his life by promising
to deliver to him the fairest and most learned woman in the world—the
lady Amada of Egypt. And thus does the knave keep his oath!”
Now I leapt to my feet, as did most of those present. Only Amada kept her seat
and looked at me.
“You lie!” I cried, “and were it not for your safe-conduct I
would kill you for the lie.”
“I lie, do I?” sneered Idernes. “Speak then, you who were
present, and tell this noble company whether I lie,” and he pointed to
the hawk-eyed lord.
“He does not lie,” said the Captain. “I was in the Court of
the Great King and heard yonder Shabaka purchase pardon by promising to hand
over his cousin, the lady Amada, to the King. The pearls were entrusted to him
as a gift to her and I see she wears them. The gold also of which mention has
been made was to provide for her journey in state to the East, or so I heard.
The cup was his guerdon, also a sum for his own purse.”
“It is false,” I shouted. “The name of Amada slipped my lips
by chance—no more.”
“So it slipped your lips by chance, did it?” sneered Idernes.
“Now, if you are wise, you will suffer the lady Amada to slip your hand,
and not by chance. But let us have done with this cunning knave. Prince, will
you hand over yonder fair woman, or will you not?”
“Satrap, I will not,” answered Peroa. “The demand is an
insult put forward to force us to rebellion, since there is no man in Egypt who
will not be ready to die in defence of the Royal Lady of Egypt.”
This statement was received with a shout of applause by every Egyptian in the
hall. Idernes waited until it had died away, then said,
“Prince Peroa and Egyptians, you have conveyed to me certain commands
sealed with the Signet of signets, which I think was stolen by yonder Shabaka.
Now hearken; until this matter is made clear I will obey those commands thus
far. I will return with my army to Sais and there wait until I have received
the orders of the Great King, after report made to him. If so much as an arrow
is shot at us on our march, it will be open rebellion, as the price of which
Egypt shall be crushed as she was never crushed before, and every one of you
here present shall lose his head, save only the lady Amada who is the property
of the Great King. Now I thank you for your hospitality and demand that you
escort me and those with me back to my camp, since it seems that here we are in
the midst of enemies.”
“Before you go, Idernes,” I shouted, “know that you and your
lying captain shall pay with your lives for your slander on me.”
“Many will pay with their lives for this night’s work, O thief of
pearls and seals,” answered the Satrap, and turning, left the hall with
his company.
Now I searched for Amada, but she also had gone with the ladies of
Peroa’s household who feared lest the feast should end in blows and
bloodshed, also lest she should be snatched away. Indeed of all the women in
the hall, only my mother remained.
“Search out the lady Amada,” I said to her, “and tell her the
truth.”
“Yes, my son,” she answered thoughtfully; “but what is the
truth? I understood it was Bes who first gave the name of the lady Amada to the
Great King. Now we learn from your own lips that it was you. Wise would you
have been, my son, if you had bitten out your tongue before you said it, since
this is a matter that any woman may well misunderstand.”
“Her name was surprised out of me, Mother. It was Bes who spoke to the
King of the beauty of a certain lady of Egypt.”
“And I think, my son, it was Bes who told Peroa and his guests that he
and not you had given the King her name, which you do not seem to have denied.
Well, doubtless both of you are to blame for foolishness, no more, since well I
know that you would have died ten times over rather than buy your life at the
price of the honour of the Lady of Egypt. This I will say to her as soon as I
may, praying that it may not be too late, and afterwards you shall tell me
everything, which you would have done well to do at first, if Bes, as I think,
had not been over cunning after the fashion of black people, and counselled you
otherwise. See, Peroa calls you and I must go, for there are greater matters
afoot than that of who let slip the name of the lady Amada to the King of
kings.”
So she went and there followed a swift council of war, the question being
whether we were to strike at the Satrap’s army or to allow it to retreat
to Sais. In my turn I was asked for my judgment of the issue, and answered,
“Strike and at once, since we cannot hope to storm Sais, which is far
away. Moreover such strength as we have is now gathered and if it is idle and
perhaps unpaid, will disperse again. But if we can destroy Idernes and his
army, it will be long before the King of kings, who is sending all his
multitudes against the Greeks, can gather another, and during this time Egypt
may again become a nation and able to protect herself under Peroa her own
Pharaoh.”
In the end I, and those who thought like me, prevailed, so that before the dawn
I was sailing down the Nile with the fleet, having two thousand men under my
command. Also I took with me the six hunters whom I had won from the Great
King, since I knew them to be faithful, and thought that their knowledge of the
Easterns and their ways might be of service. Our orders were to hold a certain
neck of land between the river and the hills where the army of Idernes must
pass, until Peroa and all his strength could attack him from behind.
Four hours later, the wind being very favourable to us, we reached that place
and there took up our station and having made all as ready as we could, rested.
In the early afternoon Bes awakened me from the heavy sleep into which I had
fallen, and pointed to the south. I looked and through the desert haze saw the
chariots of Idernes advancing in ordered ranks, and after them the masses of
his footmen.
Now we had no chariots, only archers, and two regiments armed with long spears
and swords. Also the sailors on the boats had their slings and throwing
javelins. Lastly the ground was in our favour since it sloped upwards and the
space between the river and the hills was narrow, somewhat boggy too after the
inundation of the Nile, which meant that the chariots must advance in a column
and could not gather sufficient speed to sweep over us.
Idernes and his captains noted all this also, and halted. Then they sent a
herald forward to ask who we were and to command us in the name of the Great
King to make way for the army of the Great King.
I answered that we were Egyptians, ordered by Peroa to hold the road against
the Satrap who had done affront to Egypt by demanding that its Royal Lady
should be given over to him to be sent to the East as a woman-slave, and that
if the Satrap wished to clear a road, he could come and do so. Or if it pleased
him he could go back towards Memphis, or stay where he was, since we did not
wish to strike the first blow. I added this,
“I who speak on behalf of the Prince Peroa, am the lord Shabaka, that
same man whom but last night the Satrap and a certain captain of his named a
liar. Now the Easterns are brave men and we of Egypt have always heard that
among them none is braver than Idernes who gained his advancement through
courage and skill in war. Let him therefore come out together with the lord who
named me a liar, armed with swords only, and I, who being a liar must also be a
coward, together with my servant, a black dwarf, will meet them man to man in
the sight of both the armies, and fight them to the death. Or if it pleases
Idernes better, let him not come and I will seek him and kill him in the
battle, or by him be killed.”
The herald, having taken stock of me and of Bes at whom he laughed, returned
with the message.
“Will he come, think you, Master?” asked Bes.
“Mayhap,” I answered, “since it is a shame for an Eastern to
refuse a challenge from any man whom he calls barbarian, and if he did so it
might cost him his life afterwards at the hands of the Great King. Also if he
should fall there are others to take his command, but none who can wipe away
the stain upon his honour.”
“Yes,” said Bes; “also they will think me a dwarf of no
account, which makes the task of killing you easy. Well, they shall see.”
Now when I sent this challenge I had more in my mind than a desire to avenge
myself upon Idernes and his captain for the public shame they had put upon me.
I wished to delay the attack of their host upon our little band and give time
for the army of Peroa to come up behind. Moreover, if I fell it did not greatly
matter, except as an omen, seeing that I had good officers under me who knew
all my plans.
We saw the herald reach the Satrap’s army and after a while return
towards us again, which made us think my challenge had been refused, especially
as with him was an officer who, I took it, was sent to spy out our strength.
But this was not so, for the man said,
“The Satrap Idernes has sworn by the Great King to kill the thief of the
Signet and send his head to the Great King, and fears that if he waits to meet
him in battle, he may slip away. Therefore he is minded to accept your
challenge, O Shabaka, and put an end to you, and indeed under the laws of the
East he may not refuse. But a noble of the Great King may not fight against a
black slave save with a whip, so how can that noble accept the challenge of the
dwarf Bes?”
“Quite well,” answered Bes, “seeing that I am no slave but a
free citizen of Egypt. Moreover, in my own country of Ethiopia I am of royal
blood. Lastly, tell the man this, that if he does not come and afterwards falls
into my hands or into those of the lord Shabaka, he who talks of whips shall be
scourged with them till his life creeps out from between his bare bones.”
Thus spoke Bes, rolling his great eyes and looking so terrible that the herald
and the officer fell back a step or two. Then I told them that if my offer did
not please them, I myself would fight, first Idernes and then the noble. So
they returned.
The end of it was that we saw Idernes and his captain advancing, followed by a
guard of ten men. Then after I had explained all things to my officers, I also
advanced with Bes, followed by a guard of ten picked men. We met between the
armies on a little sandy plain at the foot of the rise and there followed talk
between the captains of our guards as to arms and so forth, but we four said
nothing to each other, since the time for words was past. Only Bes and I sat
down upon the sand and spoke a little together of Amada and Karema and of how
they would receive the news of our victory or deaths.
“It does not much matter, Master,” said Bes at last, “seeing
that if we die we shall never know, and if we live we shall learn for
ourselves.”
At length all was arranged and we stood up to face each other, the four of us
being armed in the same way. For as did Idernes and the hawk-eyed lord, Bes and
I wore shirts of mail and helms, those that we had brought with us from the
East. For weapons we had short and heavy swords, small shields and knives at
our girdles.
“Look your last upon the sun, Thieves,” mocked Idernes, “for
when you see it again, it shall be with blind eyes from the points of spears
fastened to the gateway pillars of the Great King’s palace.”
“Liars you have lived and liars you shall die,” shouted Bes, but I
said nothing.
Now the agreement was that when the word had been given Idernes and I, and the
noble and Bes, should fight together, but if they killed one of us, or we
killed one of them, the two who survived might fall together on the remaining
man. Remembering this, as he told me afterwards, at the signal Bes leapt
forward like a flash with working face and foam upon his lips, and before ever
I could come to Idernes, how I know not, had received the blow of the Eastern
lord upon his shield and without striking back, had gripped him in his long
arms and wrapped him round with his bowed legs. In an instant they were on the
ground, Bes uppermost, and I heard the sound of blow upon blow struck with
knife or sword, I knew not which, upon the Eastern’s mail, followed by a
shout of victory from the Egyptians which told me that Bes had slain him.
Now Idernes and I were smiting at each other. He was a taller and a bigger man
than myself, but older and one who had lived too well. Therefore I thought it
wise to keep him at a distance and tire him, which I did by retreating and
catching his sword-cuts on my shield, only smiting back now and again.
“He runs! He runs!” shouted the Easterns. “O Idernes, beware
the dwarf!”
“Stand away, Bes,” I called; “this is my game,” and he
obeyed, as often he had done when we were hunting together.
Now a shrewd blow from Idernes cut through my helm and staggered me, and
another before I could recover myself, shore the shield from my hand, whereat
the Easterns shouted more loudly than before. Then fear of defeat entered into
me and made me mad, for this Satrap was a great fighter. With a shout of
“Egypt!” I went at him like a wounded lion and soon it was his turn
to stagger back. But alas! I struck too hard, for my sword snapped upon his
mail.
“The knife!” screamed Bes; “the knife!”
I hurled the sword hilt in the Satrap’s face and drew the dagger from my
belt. Then I ran in beneath his guard and stabbed and stabbed and stabbed. He
gripped me and we went down side by side, rolling over each other. The gods
know how it ended, for things were growing dim to me when some thrust of mine
found a rent in his mail made when the sword broke and he became weak. His
spirit weakened also, for he gasped,
“Spare my life, Egyptian, and my treasure is yours. I swear it by the
Fire.”
“Not for all the treasure in the world, Slanderer,” I panted back
and drove the dagger home to the hilt thrice, until he died. Then I staggered
to my feet, and when the armies saw that it was I who rose while Idernes lay
still a roar of triumph went up from the Egyptians, answered by a roar of rage
from the Easterns.
With a cry of “Well done, Master!” Bes leapt upon the dead man and
hewed his head from him, as already he had served the hawk-eyed noble. Then
gripping one head in each hand he held them up for the Easterns to see.
“Men of the Great King,” I said, “bear us witness that we
have fought fairly, man to man, when we need not have done so.”
The ten of the Satrap’s guard stood silent, but my own shouted,
“Back, Shabaka! The Easterns charge!”
I looked and saw them coming like waves of steel, then supported by my men and
preceded by Bes who danced in front shaking the severed heads, I ran back to my
own ranks where one gave me wine to drink and threw water over my hurts which
were but slight. Scarcely was it done when the battle closed in and soon in it
I forgot the deaths of Idernes and the Eastern liar.
CHAPTER XIII.
AMADA RETURNS TO ISIS
We fought a very terrible fight that evening there by the banks of Nile. Our
position was good, but we were outnumbered by four or five to one, and the
Easterns and their mercenaries were mad at the death of the Satrap by my hand.
Time upon time they came on furiously, charging up the slope like wild bulls.
For the most part we relied upon our archers to drive them back, since our
half-trained troops could scarcely hope to stand against the onset of veterans
disciplined in war. So taking cover behind the rocks we rained arrows on them,
shooting the horses in the chariots, and when these were down, pouring our
shafts upon the footmen behind. Myself I took my great black bow and drew it
thrice, and each time I saw a noble fall, for no mail could withstand the
arrows which it sent, and of that art I was a master. None in Egypt could shoot
so far or so straight as I did, save perhaps Peroa himself. I had no time to do
more since always I must be moving up and down the line encouraging my men.
Three times we drove them back, after which they grew cunning. Ceasing from a
direct onslaught and keeping what remained of their chariots in reserve, they
sent one body of men to climb along the slope of the hill where the rocks gave
them cover from our arrows, and another to creep through the reeds and growing
crops upon the bank of the river where we could not see to shoot them well,
although the slingers in the ships did them some damage.
Thus they attacked us on either flank, and while we were thus engaged their
centre made a charge. Then came the bitterest of the fighting for now the bows
were useless, and it was sword against sword and spear against spear. Once we
broke and I thought that they were through. But I led a charge against them and
drove them back a little way. Still the issue was doubtful till I saw Bes rush
past me grinning and leaping, and with him a small body of Greeks whom we held
in reserve, and I think that the sight of the terrible dwarf whom they thought
a devil, frightened the Easterns more than did the Greeks.
At any rate, shouting out something about an evil spirit whom the Egyptians
worshipped, by which I suppose they meant that god after whom Bes was named,
they retreated, leaving many dead but taking their wounded with them, for they
were unbroken.
At the foot of the slope they reformed and took counsel, then sat down out of
bowshot as though to rest. Now I guessed their plan. It was to wait till night
closed in, which would be soon for the sun was sinking, and then, when we could
not see to shoot, either rush through us by the weight of numbers, or march
back to where the cliffs were lower and climb them, thus passing us on the
higher open land.
Now we also took counsel, though little came of it, since we did not know what
to do. We were too few to attack so great an army, nor if we climbed the cliffs
could we hope to withstand them in the desert sands, or to hold our own against
them if they charged in the dark. If this happened it seemed that all we could
do would be to fight as long as we could, after which the survivors of us must
take refuge on our boats. So it came to this, that we should lose the battle
and the greater part of the Easterns would win back to Sais, unless indeed the
main army under Peroa came to our aid.
Whilst we talked I caused the wounded to be carried to the ships before it grew
too dark to move them. Bes went with them. Presently he returned, running
swiftly.
“Master,” he said, “the evening wind is blowing strong and
stirs the sand, but from a mast-head through it I caught sight of Peroa’s
banners. The army comes round the bend of the river not four furlongs away. Now
charge and those Easterns will be caught between the hammer and the stone, for
while they are meeting us they will not look behind.”
So I went down the lines of our little force telling them the good news and
showing them my plan. They listened and understood. We formed up, those who
were left of us, not more than a thousand men perhaps, and advanced. The
Easterns laughed when they saw us coming down the slope, for they thought that
we were mad and that they would kill us every one, believing as they did that
Peroa had no other army. When we were within bowshot we began to shoot, though
sparingly, for but few arrows were left. Galled by our archery they marshalled
their ranks to charge us again. With a shout we leapt forward to meet them, for
now from the higher ground I saw the chariots of Peroa rushing to our rescue.
We met, we fought. Surely there had been no such fighting since the days of
Thotmes and Rameses the Great. Still they drove us back till unseen and
unsuspected the chariots and the footmen of Peroa broke on them from behind,
broke on them like a desert storm. They gave, they fled this way and that, some
to the banks of the Nile, some to the hills. By the light of the setting sun we
finished it and ere the darkness closed in the Great King’s army was
destroyed, save for the fugitives whom we hunted down next day.
Yes, in that battle perished ten thousand of the Easterns and their
mercenaries, and upon its field at dawn we crowned Peroa Pharaoh of Egypt, and
he named me the chief general of his army. There, too, fell over a thousand of
my men and among them those six hunters whom I had won in the wager with the
Great King and brought with me from the East. Throughout the fray they served
me as a bodyguard, fighting furiously, who knew that they could hope for no
mercy from their own people. One by one they were slain, the last two of them
in the charge at sunset. Well, they were brave and faithful to me, so peace be
on their spirits. Better to die thus than in the den of lions.
In triumph we returned to Memphis, I bringing in the rear-guard and the spoils.
Before Pharaoh and I parted a messenger brought me more good news. Sure tidings
had come that the King of kings had been driven by revolt in his dominions to
embark upon a mighty war with Syria, Greece and Cyprus and other half-conquered
countries, in which, doubtless by agreement, the fires of insurrection had
suddenly burned up. Also already Peroa’s messengers had departed to tell
them of what was passing on the Nile.
“If this be true,” said Peroa when he had heard all, “the
Great King will have no new army to spare for Egypt.”
“It is so, Pharaoh,” I answered. “Yet I think he will conquer
in this great war and that within two years you must be prepared to meet him
face to face.”
“Two years are long, Shabaka, and in them, by your help, much may be
done.”
But as it chanced he was destined to be robbed of that help, and this by the
work of Woman the destroyer.
It happened thus. Amidst great rejoicings Pharaoh reached Memphis and in the
vast temple of Amen laid down our spoils in the presence of the god, thousands
of right hands hewn from the fallen, thousands of swords and other weapons and
tens of chariots, together with much treasure of which a portion was given to
the god. The high priests blessed us in the name of Amen and of the other gods;
the people blessed us and threw flowers in our path; all the land rejoiced
because once more it was free.
There too that day in the temple with ancient form and ceremonial Peroa was
crowned Pharaoh of Egypt. Sceptres and jewels that had been hid for generations
were brought out by those who knew the secret of their hiding-places; the
crowns that had been worn by old Pharaohs, were set upon his head; yes, the
double crown of the Upper and the Lower Land. Thus in a Memphis mad with joy at
the casting off of the foreign yoke, he was anointed the first of a new
dynasty, and with him his queen.
I too received honours, for the story of the slaying of Idernes at my hands and
of how I held the pass had gone abroad, so that next to Pharaoh, I was looked
upon as the greatest man in Egypt. Nor was Bes forgotten, since many of the
common people thought that he was a spirit in the form of a dwarf whom the gods
had sent to aid us with his strength and cunning. Indeed at the close of the
ceremony voices cried out in the multitude of watchers, demanding that I who
was to marry the Royal Lady of Egypt should be named next in succession to the
throne.
The Pharaoh heard and glanced first at his son and then at me, doubtfully,
whereon, covered with confusion, I slipped away.
The portico of the temple was deserted, since all, even the guards, had crowded
into the vast court to watch the coronation. Only in the shadow, seated against
the pedestal of one of the two colossal statues in front of the outer pylon
gate and looking very small beneath its greatness, was a man wrapped in a dark
cloak whom noting vaguely I took to be a beggar. As I passed him, he plucked at
my robe, and I stopped to search for something to give to him but could find
naught.
“I have nothing, Father,” I said laughing, “except the gold
hilt of my sword.”
“Do not part with that, Son,” answered a deep voice, “for I
think you will need it before all is over.”
Then while I stared at him he threw back his hood and I saw that beneath was
the ancient withered face and the long white beard of my great-uncle, the holy
Tanofir, the hermit and magician.
“Great things happen yonder, Shabaka. So great that I have come from my
sepulchre to see, or rather, being blind, to listen, who thrice in my life days
have known the like before,” and he pointed to the glittering throng in
the court within. “Yes,” he went on, “I have seen Pharaohs
crowned and Pharaohs die—one of them at the hand of a conqueror. What
will happen to this Pharaoh, think you, Shabaka?”
“You should be better able to answer that question than I, who am no
prophet, my Uncle.”
“How, my Nephew, seeing that your dwarf has borne away my magic Cup? I do
not grudge her to him for he is a brave dwarf and clever, who may yet prove a
good prop to you, as he has done before, and to Egypt also. But she has gone
and the new vessel is not yet shaped to my liking. So how can I answer?”
“Out of the store of wisdom gathered in your breast.”
“So! my Nephew. Well, my store of wisdom tells me that feasts are
sometimes followed by want and rejoicings by sorrow and victories by defeat,
and splendid sins by repentance and slow climbing back to good again. Also that
you will soon take a long journey. Where is the Royal Lady Amada? I did not
hear her step among those who passed in to the Crowning. But even my hearing
has grown somewhat weak of late, except in the silence of the night,
Shabaka.”
“I do not know, my Uncle, who have only been in Memphis one hour. But
what do you mean? Doubtless she prepares herself for the feast where I shall
meet her.”
“Doubtless. Tell me, what passes at the temple of Isis? As I crept past
the pylon feeling my way with my beggar’s staff, I thought—but how
can you know who have only been in Memphis an hour? Yet surely I heard voices
just now calling out that you, Shabaka, should be named as the next successor
to the throne of Egypt. Was it so?”
“Yes, holy Tanofir. That is why I have left who was vexed and am sworn to
seek no such honour, which indeed I do not desire.”
“Just so, Nephew. Yet gifts have a way of coming to those who do not
desire them and the last vision that I saw before my Cup left me, or rather
that she saw, was of you wearing the Double Crown. She said that you looked
very well in it, Shabaka. But now begone, for hark, here comes the procession
with the new-anointed Pharaoh whose royal robe you won for him yonder in the
pass, when you smote down Idernes and held his legions. Oh! it was well done
and my new Cup, though faulty, was good enough to show me all. I felt proud of
you, Shabaka, but begone, begone! ‘A gift for the poor old beggar! A
gift, my lords, for the poor blind beggar who has had none since the last
Pharaoh was crowned in Egypt and finds it hard to live on
memories!’”
At our house I found my mother just returned from the Coronation, but Bes I did
not find and guessed that he had slipped away to meet his new-made wife,
Karema. My mother embraced me and blessed me, making much of me and my deeds in
the battle; also she doctored such small hurts as I had. I put the matter by as
shortly as I could and asked her if she had seen aught of Amada. She answered
that she had neither seen nor heard of her which I was sure she thought
strange, as she began to talk quickly of other things. I said to her what I had
said to the holy Tanofir, that doubtless she was making ready for the feast
since I could not find her at the Crowning.
“Or saying good-bye to the goddess,” answered my mother nodding,
“since there are some who find it even harder to fall from heaven to
earth than to climb from earth to heaven, and after all you are but a man, my
son.”
Then she slipped away to attire herself, leaving me wondering, because my
mother was shrewd and never spoke at random.
There was the holy Tanofir, too, with his talk about the temple of Isis, and he
also did not speak at random. Oh! now I felt as I had done when the shadow of
the palm-tree fell on me yonder in the palace garden.
The mood passed for my blood still tingled with the glory of that great fight,
and my heart shut its doors to sadness, knowing as I did, that I was the most
praised man in Memphis that day. Indeed had I not, I should have learned it
when with my mother I entered the great banqueting-hall of the palace somewhat
late, for she was long in making ready.
The first thing I saw there was Bes gorgeously arrayed in Eastern silks that he
had plundered from the Satrap’s tent, standing on a table so that all
might see and hear him, and holding aloft in one hand the grisly head of
Idernes and in the other that of the hawk-eyed noble whom he had slain, while
in his thick, guttural voice he told the tale of that great fray. Catching
sight of me, he called aloud,
“See! Here comes the man! Here comes the hero to whom Egypt owes its
liberty and Pharaoh his crown.”
Thereon all the company and the soldiers and servants who were gathered about
the door began to shout and acclaim me, till I wished that I could vanish away
as the holy Tanofir was said to be able to do. Since this was impossible I
rushed at Bes who leapt from the table like a monkey and, still waving the
heads and talking, slipped from the hall, I know not how, followed by the loud
laughter of the guests.
Then heralds announced the coming of Pharaoh and all grew silent. He and his
company entered with pomp and we, his subjects, prostrated ourselves in the
ancient fashion.
“Rise, my guests,” he cried. “Rise, my people. Above all do
you rise, Shabaka, my beloved cousin, to whom Egypt and I owe so much.”
So we rose and I took my seat in a place of honour having my mother at my side,
and looked about me for Amada, but in vain. There was the carven chair upon
which she should have been among those of the princesses, but it was empty. At
first I thought that she was late, but when time went by and she did not
appear, I asked if she were ill, a question that none seemed able to answer.
The feast went on with all the ancient ceremonies that attended the crowning of
a Pharaoh of Egypt, since there were old men who remembered these, also the
scribes and priests had them written in their books.
I took no heed of them and will not set them down. At length Pharaoh pledged
his subjects, and his subjects pledged Pharaoh. Then the doors were opened and
through them came a company of white-robed, shaven priests bearing on a bier
the body of a dead man wrapped in his mummy-cloths. At first some laughed for
this rite had not been performed in Egypt since she passed into the hands of
the Great Kings of the East and therefore was strange to them. Then they grew
silent since after all it was solemn to see those death-bearing priests
flitting in and out between the great columns, now seen and now lost in the
shadows, and to listen to their funeral chants.
In the hush my mother whispered to me that this body was that of the last
Pharaoh of Egypt brought from his tomb, but whether this were so I cannot say
for certain. At length they brought the mummy which was crowned with a
snake-headed circlet of the royal uræus and still draped with withered
funeral wreaths, and stood it on its feet opposite to Peroa just behind and
between my mother and me in such a fashion that it cut off the light from us.
The faint and heavy smell of the embalmer’s spices struck upon my
nostrils, a dead flower from the chaplets fell upon my head and, glancing over
my shoulder, I saw the painted or enamelled eyes in the gilded mask staring at
me. The thing filled me with fear, I knew not of what. Not of death, surely,
for that I had faced a score of times of late and thought nothing of it. Indeed
I am not sure that it was fear I felt, but rather a deep sense of the vanity of
all things. It seemed to come home to me—Shabaka or Allan Quatermain, for
in my dream the inspiration or whatever it might be, struck through the spirit
that animated both of us—as it had never done before, that everything is
nothing, that victory and love and even life itself have no meaning;
that naught really exists save the soul of man and God, of whom perchance that
soul is a part sent forth for a while to do His work through good and ill. The
thought lifted me up and yet crushed me, since for a moment all that makes a
man passed away, and I felt myself standing in utter loneliness, naked before
the glory of God, watched only by the flaming stars that light his throne. Yes,
and at that moment suddenly I learned that all the gods are but one God, having
many shapes and called by many names.
Then I heard the priests saying,
“Pharaoh the Osiris greets Pharaoh the living on the Earth and sends to
him this message—‘As I am, so shalt thou be, and where I am, there
thou shalt dwell through all the ages of Eternity.’”
Then Pharaoh the living rose and bowed to Pharaoh the dead and Pharaoh the dead
was taken away back to his Eternal House and I wondered whether his Ka
or his spirit, or whatever is the part of him that lives on, were watching us
and remembering the feasts whereof he had partaken in his pomp in this pillared
hall, as his forefathers had done before him for hundreds or thousands of
years.
Not until the mummy had gone and the last sound of the chanting of the priests
had died, did the hearts of the feasters grow light again. But soon they
forgot, as men alive always forget death and those whom Time has devoured, for
the wine was good and strong and the eyes of the women were bright and victory
had crowned our spears, and for a while Egypt was once more free.
So it went on till Pharaoh rose and departed, the great gold earrings in his
ears jingling as he walked, and the trumpets sounding before and after him. I
too rose to go with my mother when a messenger came and bade me wait upon
Pharaoh, and with me the dwarf Bes. So we went, leaving an officer to conduct
my mother to our home. As I passed her she caught me by the sleeve and
whispered in my ear,
“My son, whatever chances to you, be brave and remember that the world
holds more than women.”
“Yes,” I answered, “it holds death and God, or they hold
it,” though what put the words into my mind I do not know, since I did
not understand and had no time to ask her meaning.
The messenger led us to the door of Peroa’s private chamber, the same in
which I had seen him on my return from the East. Here he bade me enter, and Bes
to wait without. I went in and found two men and a woman in the chamber, all
standing very silent. The men were Pharaoh who still wore his glorious robe and
Double Crown, and the high priest of Isis clothed in white; the other was the
lady Amada also clothed in the snowy robes of Isis.
At the sight of her thus arrayed my heart stopped and I stood silent because I
could not speak. She too stood silent and I saw that beneath her thin veil her
beautiful face was set and pale as that of an alabaster statue. Indeed she
might have been not a lovely living woman, but the goddess Isis herself whose
symbols she bore about her.
“Shabaka,” said Pharaoh at length, “the Royal Lady of Egypt,
Amada, priestess of Isis, has somewhat to say to you.”
“Let the Royal Lady of Egypt speak on to her servant and affianced
husband,” I answered.
“Count Shabaka, General of the armies,” she began in a cold clear
voice like to that of one who repeats a lesson, “learn that you are no
more my affianced husband and that I who am gathered again to Isis the divine,
am no more your affianced wife.”
“I do not understand. Will it please you to be more plain?” I said
faintly.
“I will be more plain, Count Shabaka, more plain than you have been with
me. Since we speak together for the last time it is well that I should be
plain. Hear me. When first you returned from the East, in yonder hall you told
us of certain things that happened to you there. Then the dwarf your servant
took up the tale. He said that he gave my name to the Great King. I was wroth
as well I might be, but even when I prayed that he should be scourged, you did
not deny that it was he who gave my name to the King, although Pharaoh yonder
said that if you had spoken the name it would have been another matter.”
“I had no time,” I answered, “for just then the messengers
came from Idernes and afterwards when I sought you you were gone.”
“Had you then no time,” she asked coldly, “beneath the palms
in the garden of the palace when we were affianced? Oh! there was time in
plenty but it did not please you to tell me that you had bought safety and
great gifts at the price of the honour of the Lady of Egypt whose love you
stole.”
“You do not understand!” I exclaimed wildly.
“Forgive me, Shabaka, but I understand very well indeed, since from your
own words I learned at the feast given to Idernes that ‘the name of
Amada’ slipped your lips by chance and thus came to the ears of the Great
King.”
“The tale that Idernes and his captain told was false, Lady, and for it
Bes and I took their lives with our own hands.”
“It had perhaps been better, Shabaka, if you had kept them living that
they might confess that it was false. But doubtless you thought them safer
dead, since dead men cannot speak, and for this reason challenged them to
single combat.”
I gasped and could not answer for my mind seemed to leave me, and she went on
in a gentler voice,
“I do not wish to speak angrily to you, my cousin Shabaka, especially
when you have just wrought such great deeds for Egypt. Moreover by the law I
serve I may speak angrily to no man. Know then that on learning the truth,
since I could love none but you according to the flesh and therefore can never
give myself in marriage to another, I sought refuge in the arms of the goddess
whom for your sake I had deserted. She was pleased to receive me, forgetting my
treason. On this very day for the second time I took the oaths which may no
more be broken, and that I may dwell where I shall never see you more, Pharaoh
here has been pleased, at my request to name me high priestess and prophetess
of Isis and to appoint me as a dwelling-place her temple at Amada where I was
born far away in Upper Egypt. Now all is said and done, so farewell.”
“All is not said and done,” I broke out in fury. “Pharaoh, I
ask your leave to tell the full story of this business of the naming of the
lady Amada to the King of kings, and that in the presence of the dwarf Bes.
Even a slave is allowed to set out his tale before judgment is passed upon
him.”
Peroa glanced at Amada who made no sign, then said,
“It is granted, General Shabaka.”
So Bes was called into the chamber and having looked about him curiously,
seated himself upon the ground.
“Bes,” I said, “you have heard nothing of what has
passed.” (Here I was mistaken, for as he told me afterwards he had heard
everything through the door which was not quite closed.) “It is needful,
Bes, that you should repeat truly all that happened at the court of the King of
kings before and after I was brought from the boat.”
Bes obeyed, telling the tale very well, so well that all listened earnestly,
without error moreover. When he had finished I also told my story and how,
shaken by all I had gone through and already weak from the torment of the boat,
the name of Amada was surprised from me who never dreamed that the King would
at once make demand of her, and who would have perished a thousand times rather
than such a thing should happen. I added what I had learned afterwards from our
escort, that this name was already well known to the Great King who meant to
make use of it as a cause of quarrel with Egypt. Further, that he had let me
escape from a death by horrible torments because of some dream that he had
dreamed while he rested before the banquet, in which a god appeared and told
him that it was an evil thing to slay a man because that man had bested him at
a hunting match and one of which heaven would keep an account. Still because of
the law of his land he must find a public pretext for loosing one whom he had
once condemned, and therefore chose this matter of the lady Amada whom he
pretended to send me to bring to him.
When I had finished, as Amada still remained silent, Pharaoh asked of Bes how
it came about that he told one story on the night of our return and another on
this night.
“Because, O Pharaoh,” answered Bes rolling his eyes, “for the
first time in my life I have been just a little too clever and shot my arrow
just a little too far. Hearken, Pharaoh, and Royal Lady, and High Priest. I
knew that my master loves the lady Amada and knew also that she is quick of
tongue and temper, one who readily takes offence even if thereby she breaks her
own heart and so brings her life to ruin, and with it perchance her country.
Therefore, knowing women whom I have studied in my own land, I saw in this
matter just such a cause of offence as she would lay hold of, and counselled my
master to keep silent as to the story of the naming of her before the King.
Some evil spirit made him listen to this bad counsel, so far at least, that
when I lied as to what had chanced, for which lie the lady Amada prayed that I
might be scourged till my bones broke through the skin, he did not at once tell
all the truth. Nor did he do so afterwards because he feared that if he did I
should in fact be scourged, for my master and I love each other. Neither of us
wishes to see the other scourged, though such is my lot to-night,” and he
glanced at Amada. “I have said.”
Then at last Amada spoke.
“Had I known all this story from the first, perhaps I should not have
done what I have done to-day and perhaps I should have forgiven and forgotten,
for in truth even if the dwarf still lies, I believe your word, O Shabaka, and
understand how all came about. But now it is too late to change. Say, O Priest
of the Mother, is it not too late?”
“It is too late,” said the priest solemnly, “seeing that if
such vows as yours are broken for the second time, O Prophetess, the curse of
the goddess will pursue you and him for whom they were broken, yes, through
this life and all other lives that perchance may be given to you upon the earth
or elsewhere.”
“Pharaoh,” I cried in despair, “I made a bond with you. It is
recorded in writing and sealed. I have kept my part of the bond; my treasure
you have spent; your enemies I have slain; your army I have commanded not so
ill. Will you not keep yours and bid the priests release this lady from her vow
and give her to me to whom she was promised? Or must I believe that you refuse,
not because of goddesses and vows, but because yonder is the Royal Lady of
Egypt, the true heiress to the throne who might perchance bear children, which
as prophetess of Isis she can never do. Yes, because of this and because of
certain cries that came to your ears in the hour of your crowning before
Amen-ra and all the gods?”
Peroa flushed as he heard me and answered,
“You speak roughly, Cousin, and were you any other man I might be tempted
to answer roughly. But I know that you suffer and therefore I forgive. Nay, you
must believe no such things. Rather must you remember that in this bond of
which you speak, it was set down that I only promised you the lady Amada with
her own consent, and this she has withdrawn.”
“Then, Pharaoh, hearken! To-morrow I leave Egypt for another land, giving
you back your generalship and sheathing the sword that I had hoped to wield in
its defence and yours when the last great day of trial by battle comes, as come
it will. I tell you that I go to return no more, unless the lady Amada yonder
shall summon me back to fight for her and you, promising herself to me in
guerdon.”
“That can never be,” said Amada.
Then I became aware of another presence in the room, though how and when it
appeared I do not know, but I suppose that it had crept in while we were lost
in talk. At least between me and Pharaoh, crouched upon the ground, was the
figure of a man wrapped in a beggar’s cloak. It threw back the hood and
there appeared the ashen face and snowy beard of the holy Tanofir.
“You know me, Pharaoh,” he said in his deep, solemn voice. “I
am Tanofir, the King’s son; Tanofir the hermit, Tanofir the seer. I have
heard all that passes, it matters not how and I come to you with a message, I
who read men’s hearts. Of vows and goddesses and women I say nothing. But
this I say to you, that if you break the spirit of your bond and suffer yonder
Shabaka to go hence with a bitter heart, trouble shall come on you. All the
Great King’s armies did not die yonder by the banks of Nile, and mayhap
one day he will journey to bury the bones of those who fell, and with them
yours, O Pharaoh. I do not think that you will listen to me to-night,
and I am sure that yonder lady, full of the new-fanned flame of the jealous
goddess, will not listen. Still let her take counsel and remember my words: In
the hour of desperate danger let her send to Shabaka and demand his help,
promising in return what he has asked and remembering that if Isis loves her,
that goddess was born upon the Nile and loves Egypt more.”
“Too late, too late, too late!” wailed Amada.
Then she burst into tears and turning fled away with the high priest. Pharaoh
went also leaving me and Bes alone. I looked for the holy Tanofir to speak with
him, but he too was gone.
“It is time to sleep, Master,” said Bes, “for all this talk
is more wearisome than any battle. Why! what is this that has your name upon
it?” and he picked a silk-wrapped package from the floor and opened it.
Within were the priceless rose-hued pearls!
CHAPTER XIV.
SHABAKA FIGHTS THE CROCODILE
“Where to?” I said to Bes when we were outside the palace, for I
was so broken with grief that I scarcely knew what I did.
“To the house of the lady Tiu, I think, Master, since there you must make
preparations for your start on the morrow, also bid her farewell. Oh!” he
went on in a kind of rapture which afterwards I knew was feigned though at the
time I did not think about it, “Oh! how happy should you be who now are
free from all this woman-coil, with life new and fresh before you. Reflect,
Master, on the hunting we will have yonder in Ethiopia. No more cares, no more
plannings for the welfare of Egypt, no more persuading of the doubtful to take
up arms, no more desperate battle-ventures with your country’s honour on
your sword-point. And if you must see women—well, there are plenty in
Ethiopia who come and go lightly as an evening breeze laden with the odour of
flowers, and never trouble in the morning.”
“At any rate you are not free from such coils, Bes,” I said
and in the moonlight I saw his great face fall in.
“No, Master, I am tying them about my throat. See, such is the way of the
world, or of the gods that rule the world, I know not which. For years I have
been happy and free, I have enjoyed adventures and visited strange countries
and have gathered learning, till I think I am the wisest man upon the Nile, at
the side of one whom I loved and holding nothing at risk, except my own life
which mattered no more than that of a gnat dancing in the sun. Now all is
changed. I have a wife whom I love also, more than I can tell you,” and
he sighed, “but who still must be looked after and obeyed—yes,
obeyed. Further, soon I shall have a people and a crown to wear, and
councillors and affairs of state, and an ancient religion to support and the
Grasshopper itself knows what besides. The burden has rolled from your back to
mine, Master, making my heart which was so light, heavy, and oh! I wish it had
stopped where it was.”
Even then I laughed, sad as I was, for truth lived in the philosophy of Bes.
“Master,” he went on in a changed voice, “I have been a fool
and my folly has worked you ill. Forgive me since I acted for the best, only
until the end no one ever knows what is the best. Now here is the house and I
go to meet my wife and to make certain arrangements. By dawn perhaps you will
be ready to start to Ethiopia.”
“Do you really desire that I should accompany you there, Bes?”
“Certainly, Master. That is unless you should desire that I accompany you
somewhere else instead, by sea southward for instance. If so, I do not know
that I would refuse, since Ethiopia will not run away and there is much of the
world that I should still like to visit. Only then there is Karema to be
thought about, who expects, or, when she learns all, soon will expect, to be a
queen,” he added doubtfully.
“No, Bes, I am too tired to make new plans, so let us go to Ethiopia and
not disappoint Karema, who after holding a cup so long naturally would like to
try a sceptre.”
“I think that is wisest, Master; at any rate the holy Tanofir thinks it
wisest, and he is the voice of Fate. Oh! why do we trouble who after all, every
one of us, are nothing but pieces upon the board of Fate.”
Then he turned and left me and I entered the house where I found my mother
sitting, still in her festal robes, like one who waits. She looked at my face,
then asked what troubled me. I sat down on a stool at her feet and told her
everything.
“Much as I thought,” she said when I had finished. “These
over-learned women are strange fish to catch and hold, and too much soul is
like too much sail upon a boat when the desert wind begins to blow across the
Nile. Well, do not let us blame her or Bes, or Peroa who is already anxious for
his dynasty and would rather that Amada were a priestess than your wife, or
even the goddess Isis, who no doubt is anxious for her votaries. Let us rather
blame the Power that is behind the veil, or to it bow our heads, seeing that we
know nothing of the end for which it works. So Egypt shuts her doors on you, my
Son, and whither away? Not to the East again, I trust, for there you would soon
grow shorter by a head.”
“I go to Ethiopia, my Mother, where it seems that Bes is a great man and
can shelter me.”
“So we go to Ethiopia, do we? Well, it is a long journey for an old
woman, but I weary of Memphis where I have lived for so many years and
doubtless the sands of the south make good burial grounds.”
“We!” I exclaimed. “We?”
“Surely, my Son, since in losing a wife you have again found a mother and
until I die we part no more.”
When I heard this my eyes filled with tears. My conscience smote me also
because of late, and indeed for years past, I had thought so much of Amada and
so little of my mother. And now it was Amada who had cast me out, unjustly,
without waiting to learn the truth, because at the worst I, who worshipped her,
had saved myself from death in slow torment by speaking her name, while my
mother, forgetting all, took me to her bosom again as she had done when I was a
babe. I knew not what to say, but remembering the pearls, I drew them out and
placed them round my mother’s neck.
She looked at the wonderful things and smiled, then said,
“Such gems as these become white locks and withered breasts but ill. Yet,
my Son, I will keep them for you till you find a wife, if not Amada, then
another.”
“If not Amada, I shall never find a wife,” I said bitterly, whereat
she smiled.
Then she left me to make ready before she slept a while.
Work as we would noon had passed two hours, on the following day, before we
were prepared to start, for there was much to do. Thus the house must be placed
in charge of friends and the means of travel collected. Also a messenger came
from Pharaoh praying me for his and Egypt’s sake to think again before I
left them, and an answer sent that go I must, whither the holy Tanofir would
know if at any time Pharaoh desired to learn. In reply to this came another
messenger who brought me parting gifts from Pharaoh, a chain of honour, a title
of higher nobility, a commission as his envoy to whatever land I wandered, and
so forth, which I must acknowledge. Lastly as we were leaving the house to seek
the boat which Bes had made ready on the Nile, there came yet another messenger
at the sight of whom my heart leapt, for he was priest of Isis.
He bowed and handed me a roll. I opened it with a trembling hand and read:
“From the Prophetess of Isis whose house is at Amada, aforetime Royal
Lady of Egypt, to the Count Shabaka,
“I learn, O my Cousin, that you depart from Egypt and knowing the reason
my heart is sore. Believe me, my Cousin, I love you well, better than any who
lives upon the earth, nor will that love ever change, since the goddess who
holds my future in her hands, knows of what we are made and is not jealous of
the past. Therefore she will not be wroth at the earthly love of one who is
gathered to her heavenly arms. Her blessing and mine be on you and if we see
each other no more face to face in the world, may we meet again in the halls of
Osiris. Farewell, beloved Shabaka. Oh! why did you suffer that black master of
lies, the dwarf Bes, to persuade you to hide the truth from me?”
So the writing ended and below it were two stains still wet, which I knew were
caused by tears. Moreover, wrapped in a piece of silk and fastened to the
scroll was a little gold ring graven with the royal uræus that Amada had
always worn from childhood. Only on the previous night I had noted it on the
first finger of her right hand.
I took my stylus and my waxen tablets and wrote on one of them:
“Had you been a man, Amada, and not a woman, I think you would have
judged me differently but, learned priestess and prophetess as you are, a woman
you remain. Perchance a time may come when once more you will turn to me in the
hour of your need; if so and I am living, I will come. Yea, if I am dead I
think that I still shall come, since nothing can really part us. Meanwhile by
day and by night I wear your ring and whenever I look on it I think of Amada
the woman whose lips have pressed my own, and forget Amada the priestess who
for her soul’s sake has been pleased to break the heart of the man who
loved her and whom she misjudged so sorely in her pride and anger.”
This tablet I wrapped up and sealed, using clay and her own ring to make the
seal, and gave it for delivery to the priest.
At length we drew near to the river and here, gathered on the open land, I
found the most of those who had fought with me in the battle against the
Easterns, and with them a great concourse of others from the city. These
collected round me, some of them wounded and hobbling upon crutches, praying me
not to go, as did the others who foresaw sorrow to Egypt from my loss. But I
broke away from them almost in tears and with my mother hid myself beneath the
canopy of the boat. Here Bes was waiting, also his beautiful wife who, although
she seemed sad at leaving Egypt, smiled a greeting to us while the steersmen
and rowers of the boat, tall Ethiopians every one of them, rose and gave me a
General’s salute. Then, as the wind served, we hoisted the sail and
glided away up Nile, till presently the temples and palm-groves of Memphis were
lost to sight.
Of that long, long journey there is no need to tell. Up the Nile we travelled
slowly, dragging the boat past the cataracts till Egypt was far behind us. In
the end, many days after we had passed the mouth of another river that was blue
in colour which flowed from the northern mountain lands down into the Nile, we
came to a place where the rapids were so long and steep that we must leave the
boat and travel overland. Drawing near to it at sunset I saw a multitude of
people gathered on the sand and beyond them a camp in which were set many
beautiful pavilions that seemed to be broidered with silk and gold, as were the
banners that floated above them whereon appeared the effigy of a grasshopper,
also done in gold with silver legs.
“It seems that my messengers travelled in safety,” said Bes to me,
“for know, that yonder are some of my subjects who have come here to meet
us. Now, Master, I must no longer call you master since I fear I am once more a
king. And you must no longer call me Bes, but Karoon. Moreover, forgive me, but
when you come into my presence you must bow, which I shall like less than you
do, but it is the custom of the Ethiopians. Oh! I would that you were the king
and that I were your friend, for henceforth good-bye to ease and
jollity.”
I laughed, but Bes did not laugh at all, only turned to his wife who already
ruled him as though he were indeed a slave, and said, “Lady Karema, make
yourself as beautiful as you can and forget that you have ever been a Cup or
anything useful, since henceforth you must be a queen, that is if you please my
people.”
“And what happens if I do not please them, Husband?” asked Karema
opening her fine eyes.
“I do not quite know, Wife. Perhaps they may refuse to accept me, at
which I shall not weep. Or perhaps they may refuse to accept you, at which of
course I should weep very much, for you see you are so very white and,
heretofore, all the queens of the Ethiopians have been black.”
“And if they refuse to accept me because I am white, or rather brown,
instead of black like oiled marble, what then, O Husband?”
“Then—oh! then I cannot say, O Wife. Perhaps they will send you
back to your own country. Or perhaps they will separate us and place you in a
temple where you will live alone in all honour. I remember that once they did
that to a white woman, making a goddess of her until she died of weariness. Or
perhaps—well, I do not know.”
Then Karema grew angry.
“Now I wish I had remained a Cup,” she said, “and the servant
of the holy Tanofir who at least taught me many secret things, instead of
coming to dwell among black barbarians in the company of a dwarf who, even if
he be a king, it seems has no power to protect the wife whom he has
chosen.”
“Why will women always grow wroth before there is need?” asked Bes
humbly. “Surely it would be time to rate me when any of these things had
happened.”
“If any of them do happen, Husband, I shall say much worse things than
that,” she replied, but the talk went no further, for at this moment our
boat grounded and singing a wild song, many of those who waited rushed into the
water to drag it to the bank.
Then Bes stood up on the prow, waving his bow and there arose a mighty shout
of, “Karoon! Karoon! It is he, it is he returned after many
years!”
Twice they shouted thus and then, every one of them, threw themselves face
downwards in the sand.
“Yes, my people,” cried Bes, “it is I, Karoon, who having
been miraculously preserved from many dangers in far lands by the help of the
Grasshopper in heaven, and, as my messengers will have told you, of my beloved
friend, lord Shabaka the Egyptian, who has deigned to come to dwell with us for
a while, have at length returned to Ethiopia that I may shed my wisdom on you
like the sun and pour it on your heads like melted honey. Moreover, mindful of
our laws which aforetime I defied and therefore left you, I have searched the
whole world through till I found the most beautiful woman that it contained,
and made her my wife. She too has deigned to come to this far country to be
your queen. Advance, fair Karema, and show yourself to these my
Ethiopians.”
So Karema stepped forward and stood on the prow of the boat by the side of Bes,
and a strange couple they looked. The Ethiopians who had risen, considered her
gravely, then one of them said,
“Karoon called her beautiful, but in truth she is almost white and very
ugly.”
“At least she is a woman,” said another, “for her shape is
female.”
“Yes, and he has married her,” remarked a third, “and even a
king may choose his own wife sometimes. For in such matters who can judge
another’s taste?”
“Cease,” said Bes in a lordly way. “If you do not think her
beautiful to-night, you will to-morrow. And now let us land and rest.”
So we landed and while I did so I took note of these Ethiopians. They were
great men, black as charcoal with thick lips, white teeth and flat noses. Their
eyes were large and the whites of them somewhat yellow, their hair curled like
wool, their beards were short and on their faces they wore a continual smile.
Of dress most of them had little, but their elders or leaders wore lion and
leopard skins and some were clad in a kind of silken tunic belted about the
middle. All were armed for war with long bows, short swords and small shields
round in shape and made from the hide of the hippopotamus or of the unicorn.
Gold was plentiful amongst them since even the humblest wore bracelets of that
metal, while about the necks of the chieftains it was wound in great torques,
also sometimes on their ankles. They wore sandals on their feet and some of
them had ostrich feathers stuck in their hair, a few also had grasshoppers
fashioned of gold bound on the top of their heads, and these I took to be the
priests. There were no women in their number.
As the sun was sinking we were led at once to a very beautiful tent made of
woven flax and ornamented as I have described, where we found food made ready
for us in plenty, milk in bowls and the flesh of sheep and oxen boiled and
roasted. Bes, however, was taken to a place apart, which made Karema even more
angry than she was before.
Scarcely had we finished eating when a herald rushed into the tent crying,
“Prostrate yourselves! Yea, be prostrated, the Grasshopper comes! Karoon
comes.”
Here I must say that I found that the title of Karoon meant “Great
Grasshopper,” but Karema who did not know this, asked indignantly why she
should prostrate herself to a grasshopper. Indeed she refused to do so even
when Bes entered the pavilion wonderfully attired in a gorgeous-coloured robe
of which the train was held by two huge men. So absurd did he look that my
mother and I must bow very deeply to hide our laughter while Karema said,
“It would be better, Husband, if you found children to carry your robe
instead of two giants. Moreover, if it is meant to copy the colours of a
grasshopper, ‘tis badly done, since grasshoppers are green and you are
gold and scarlet. Also they do not wear feathers set awry upon their
heads.”
Bes rolled his eyes as though in agony, then turning, bade his attendants be
gone. They obeyed, though doubtfully as though they did not like to leave him
alone with us, whereon he let down the flap of the pavilion, threw off his
gorgeous coverings and said,
“You must learn to understand, Wife, that our customs are different from
those of Egypt. There I was happy as a slave and you were held to be beautiful
as the Cup of the holy Tanofir, also learned. Here I am wretched as a king and
you are held to be ugly, also ignorant as a stranger. Oh! do not answer, I pray
you, but learn that all goes well. For the time you are accepted as my wife,
subject to the decision of a council of matrons, aged relatives of my family,
who will decide when we reach the City of the Grasshopper whether or not you
shall be acknowledged as the Queen of the Ethiopians. No, no, I pray you say
nothing since I must go away at once, as according to the law of the Ethiopians
the time has come for the Grasshopper to sleep, alone, Karema, as you are not
yet acknowledged as my wife. You also can sleep with the lady Tiu and for
Shabaka a tent is provided. Rest sweetly, Wife. Hark! They fetch me.”
“Now, if I had my way,” said Karema, “I would rest in that
boat going back to Egypt. What say you, lord Shabaka?”
But I made no answer who followed Bes out of the tent, leaving her to talk the
matter over with my mother. Here I found a crowd of his people waiting to
convey him to sleep and watching, saw them place him in another tent round
which they ranged themselves, playing upon musical instruments. After this
someone came and led me to my own place where was a good bed in which I lay
down to sleep. This however I could not do for a long while because of my own
laughter and the noise of the drums and horns that were soothing Bes to his
rest. For now I understood why he had preferred to be a slave in Egypt rather
than a king in Ethiopia.
In the morning I rose before the dawn and went out to the river-bank to bathe.
While I was making ready to wash myself, who should appear but Bes, followed,
but at a distance, by a number of his people.
“Never have I spent such a night, Master,” he said, “at least
not since you took me prisoner years ago, since by law I may not stop those
horns and musical instruments. Now, however, also according to the law of the
Ethiopians, I am my own lord until the sun rises. So I have come here to gather
some of those blue lilies which she loves as a present for Karema, because I
fear that she is angry and must be appeased.”
“Certainly she is very angry,” I said, “or at least was so
when I left her last night. Oh! Bes, why did you let your people tell her that
she was ugly?”
“How can I help it, Master? Have you not always heard that the Ethiopians
are chiefly famous for one thing, namely that they speak nothing but the truth.
To them she, being different, seems to be ugly. Therefore when they say that
she is ugly, they speak the truth.”
“If so, it is a truth that she does not like, Bes, as I have no doubt she
will tell you by and by. Do they think me ugly also?”
“Yes, they do, Master; but they think also that you look like a man who
can draw a bow and use a sword, and that goes far with the Ethiopians. Of your
mother they say nothing because she is old and they venerate the aged whom the
Grasshopper is waiting to carry away.”
Now I began to laugh again and went with Bes to gather the lilies. These grew
at the end of a mass of reeds woven together by the pressure of the current and
floating on the water. Bes lay down upon his stomach while his people watched
from a distance on the bank amazed into silence, and stretched out his long
arms to reach the blue lotus flowers. Suddenly the reeds gave way beneath him
just as he had grasped two of the flowers and was dragging at them, so that he
fell into the river.
Next instant I saw a swirl in the brown water and perceived a huge crocodile.
It rushed at Bes open-mouthed. Being a good swimmer he twisted his body in
order to avoid it, but I heard the great teeth close with a snap on the short
leathern garment which he wore about his middle.
“The devil has me! Farewell!” he cried and vanished beneath the
water.
Now, as I have said, I was almost stripped for bathing, but had not yet taken
off my short sword which was girded round me by a belt. In an instant I drew it
and amidst the yells of horror of the Ethiopians who had seen all from the
bank, I plunged into the river. There are few able to swim as I could and I had
the art of diving with my eyes open and remaining long beneath the surface
without drawing breath, for this I had practised from a child.
Immediately I saw the great reptile sinking to the mud and dragging Bes with
him to drown him there. But here the river was very deep and with a few swift
strokes I was able to get under the crocodile. Then with all my strength I
stabbed upwards, driving the sword far into the soft part of the throat.
Feeling the pain of the sharp iron the beast let go of Bes and turned on me.
How it happened I do not know but presently I found myself upon its back and
was striking at its eyes. One thrust at least went home, for the blinded brute
rose to the surface, bearing me with him, and oh! the sweetness of the air as I
breathed again.
Thus we appeared, I riding the crocodile like a horse and stabbing furiously,
while close by was Bes rolling his yellow eyes but helpless, for he had no
weapon. Still the devil was not dead although blood streamed from him, only mad
with pain and rage. Nor could the shouting Ethiopians help me since they had
only bows and dared not shoot lest their shafts should pierce me. The crocodile
began to sink again, snapping furiously at my legs. Then I bethought me of a
trick I had seen practised by natives on the Nile.
Waiting till its huge jaws were open I thrust my arm between them, grasping the
short sword in such fashion that the hilt rested on its tongue and the point
against the roof of its mouth. It tried to close its jaws and lo! the good iron
was fixed between them, holding them wide open. Then I withdrew my hand and
floated upwards with nothing worse than a cut upon the wrist from one of its
sharp fangs. I appeared upon the surface and after me the crocodile spouting
blood and wallowing in its death agonies. I remembered no more till I found
myself lying on the bank surrounded by a multitude with Bes standing over me.
Also in the shallow water was the crocodile dead, my sword still fixed between
its jaws.
“Are you harmed, Master” cried Bes in a voice of agony.
“Very little I think,” I answered, sitting up with the blood
pouring from my arm.
Bes thrust aside Karema who had come lightly clothed from her tent, saying,
“All is well, Wife. I will bring you the lilies presently.”
Then he flung his arms about me, kissed my hands and my brow and turning to the
crowd, shouted,
“Last night you were disputing as to whether this Egyptian lord should be
allowed to dwell with me in the land of Ethiopia. Which of you disputes it
now?”
“No one!” they answered with a roar. “He is not a man but a
god. No man could have done such a deed.”
“So it seems,” answered Bes quietly. “At least none of you
even tried to do it. Yet he is not a god but only that kind of man who is
called a hero. Also he is my brother, and while I reign in Ethiopia either he
shall reign at my side, or I go away with him.”
“It shall be so, Karoon!” they shouted with one voice. And after
this I was carried back to the tent.
In front of it my mother waited and kissed me proudly before them all, whereat
they shouted again.
So ended this adventure of the crocodile, except that presently Bes went back
and recovered the two lilies for Karema, this time from a boat, which caused
the Ethiopians to call out that he must love her very much, though not as much
as he did me.
That afternoon, borne in litters, we set out for the City of the Grasshopper,
which we reached on the fourth day. As we drew near the place regiments of men
to the number of twelve thousand or more, came out to meet us, so that at last
we arrived escorted by an army who sang their songs of triumph and played upon
their musical instruments until my head ached with the noise.
This city was a great place whereof the houses were built of mud and thatched
with reeds. It stood upon a wide plain and in its centre rose a natural, rocky
hill upon the crest of which, fashioned of blocks of gleaming marble and roofed
with a metal that shone as gold, was the temple of the Grasshopper, a columned
building very like to those of Egypt. Round it also were other public
buildings, among them the palace of the Karoon, the whole being surrounded by
triple marble walls as a protection from attack by foes. Never had I seen
anything so beautiful as that hill with its edifices of shining white roofed
with gold or copper and gleaming in the sun.
Descending from my litter I walked to those of my mother and Karema, for Bes in
his majesty might not be approached, and said as much to them.
“Yes, Son,” answered my mother, “it is worth while to have
travelled so far to see such a sight. I shall have a fine sepulchre,
Son.”
“I have seen it all before,” broke in Karema.
“When?” I asked.
“I do not know. I suppose it must have been when I was the Cup of the
holy Tanofir. At least it is familiar to me. Already I weary of it, for who can
care for a land or a city where they think white people hideous and scarcely
allow a wife to go near her husband, save between midnight and dawn when they
cease from their horrible music?”
“It will be your part to change these customs, Karema.”
“Yes,” she exclaimed, “certainly that will be my part,”
after which I went back to my litter.
CHAPTER XV.
THE SUMMONS
Now at the gates of the City of the Grasshopper we were royally received. The
priests came out to meet us, pushing a colossal image of their god before them
on a kind of flat chariot, and I remember wondering what would be the value of
that huge golden locust, if it were melted down. Also the Council came, very
ancient men all of them, since the Ethiopians for the most part lived more than
a hundred years. Perhaps that is why they were so glad to welcome Bes since
they were too old to care about retaining power in their own hands as they had
done during his long absence. For save Bes there was no other man living of the
true royal blood who could take the throne.
Then there were thousands of women, broad-faced and smiling whose black skins
shone with scented oils, for they wore little except a girdle about their
waists and many ornaments of gold. Thus their earrings were sometimes a palm in
breadth and many of them had great gold rings through their noses, such as in
Egypt are put in those of bulls. My mother laughed at them, but Karema said
that she thought them hideous and hateful.
They were a strange people, these Ethiopians, like children, most of them,
being merry and kind and never thinking of one thing for more than a minute.
Thus one would see them weep and laugh almost in the same breath. But among
them was an upper class who had great learning and much ancient knowledge.
These men made their laws wherein there was always sense under what seemed to
be folly, designed the temples, managed the mines of gold and other metals and
followed the arts. They were the real masters of the land, the rest were but
slaves content to live in plenty, for in that fertile soil want never came near
them, and to do as they were bid.
Thus they passed from the cradle to the grave amidst song and flowers, carrying
out their light, allotted tasks, and for the rest, living as they would and
loving those they would, especially their children, of whom they had many. By
nature and tradition the men were warriors and hunters, being skilled in the
use of the bow and always at war when they could find anyone to fight. Indeed
when we came among them their trouble was that they had no enemies left, and at
once they implored Bes to lead them out to battle since they were weary of
herding kine and tilling fields.
All of these things I found out by degrees, also that they were a great people
who could send out an army of seventy thousand men and yet leave enough behind
them to defend their land. Of the world beyond their borders the most of them
knew little, but the learned men of whom I have spoken, a great deal, since
they travelled to Egypt and elsewhere to study the customs of other countries.
For the rest their only god was the Grasshopper and like that insect they
skipped and chirruped through life and when the winter of death came sprang
away to another of which they knew nothing, leaving their young behind them to
bask in the sun of unborn summers. Such were the Ethiopians.
Now of all the ceremonies of the reception of Bes and his re-crowning as
Karoon, I knew little, for the reason that the tooth of the crocodile poisoned
my blood and made me very ill, so that I remained for a moon or more lying in a
fine room in the palace where gold seemed to be as plentiful as earthen pots
are in Egypt, and all the vessels were of crystal. Had it not been for the
skill of the Ethiopian leeches and above all for the nursing of my mother, I
think that I must have died. She it was who withstood them when they wished to
cut off my arm, and wisely, for it recovered and was as strong as it had ever
been. In the end I grew well again and from the platform in front of the temple
was presented to the people by Bes as his saviour and the next greatest to him
in the kingdom, nor shall I ever forget the shoutings with which I was
received.
Karema also was presented as his wife, having passed the Ordeal of the Matrons,
but only, I think, because it was found that she was in the way to give an heir
to the throne. For to them her beauty was ugliness, nor could they understand
how it came about that their king, who contrary to the general customs of the
land, was only allowed one wife lest the children should quarrel, could have
chosen a lady who was not black. So they received her in silence with many
whisperings which made Karema very angry.
When in due course, however, the child came and proved to be a son black as the
best of them and of perfect shape, they relented towards her and after the
birth of a second, grew to love her. But she never forgave and loved them not
at all. Nor was she over-fond of these children of hers because they were so
black which, she said, showed how poisonous was the blood of the Ethiopians.
And indeed this is so, for often I have noticed that if an Ethiopian weds with
one of another colour, their offspring is black down to the third or fourth
generation. Therefore Karema longed for Egypt notwithstanding the splendour in
which she dwelt.
So greatly did she long that she had recourse to the magic lore which she had
learned from the holy Tanofir, and would sit for hours gazing into water in a
crystal bowl, or sometimes into a ball of crystal without the water, trying to
see visions therein that had to do with what passed in Egypt. Moreover in time
much of her gift returned to her and she did see many things which she repeated
to me, for she would tell no one else of them, not even her husband.
Thus she saw Amada kneeling in a shrine before the statue of Isis and weeping:
a picture that made me sad. Also she saw the holy Tanofir brooding in the
darkness of the Cave of the Bulls, and read in his mind that he was thinking of
us, though what he thought she could not read. Again she saw Eastern messengers
delivering letters to Pharaoh and knew from his face that he was disturbed and
that Egypt was threatened with calamities. And so forth.
Soon the news of her powers of divination spread abroad, so that all the
Ethiopians grew to fear her as a seeress and thenceforth, whatever they may
have thought, none of them dared to say that she was ugly. Further, her gift
was real, since if she told me of a certain thing such as that messengers were
approaching, in due course they would arrive and make clear much that she had
not been able to understand in her visions.
Now from the time that I grew strong again and as soon as Bes was firmly seated
on his throne, he and I set to work to train and drill the army of the
Ethiopians, which hitherto had been little more than a mob of men carrying bows
and swords. We divided it into phalanxes after the Greek fashion, and armed
these bodies with long lances, swords, and large shields in the place of the
small ones they had carried before. Also we trained the archers, teaching them
to advance in open order and shoot from cover, and lastly chose the best
soldiers to be captains and generals. So it came about that at the end of the
two years that I spent in Ethiopia there was a force of sixty thousand men or
more whom I should not have been afraid to match against any troops in the
world, since they were of great strength and courage, and, as I have said, by
nature lovers of war. Also their bows being longer and more powerful, they
could shoot arrows farther than the Easterns or the Egyptians.
The Ethiopian lords wondered why their King and I did these things, since they
saw no enemy against which so great an army could be led to battle. On that
matter Bes and I kept our own counsel, telling them only that it was good for
the men to be trained to war, since, hearing of their wealth, one day the King
of kings might attempt to invade their country. So month by month I laboured at
this task, leading armies into distant regions to accustom them to travelling
far afield, carrying with them what was necessary for their sustenance.
So it went on until a sad thing happened, since on returning from one of these
forays in which I had punished a tribe that had murdered some Ethiopian hunters
and we had taken many thousands of their cattle, I found my mother dying. She
had been smitten by a fever which was common at that season of the year, and
being old and weak had no strength to throw it off.
As medicine did not help her, the priests of the Grasshopper prayed day and
night in their temple for her recovery. Yes, there they prayed to a golden
locust standing on an altar in a sanctuary that was surrounded by crystal
coffins wherein rested the flesh of former kings of the land. To me the sight
was pitiful, but Bes asked me what was the difference between praying to a
locust and praying to images with the heads of beasts, or to a dwarf shaped as
he was like we did in Egypt, and I could not answer him.
“The truth is, Brother,” he said, for so he called me now,
“that all peoples in the world do not offer petitions to what they see
and have been taught to revere, but to something beyond of which to them it is
a sign. But why the Ethiopians should have chosen a grasshopper as a symbol of
God who is everywhere, is more than I can tell. Still they have done so for
thousands of years.”
When I came to my mother’s bedside she was wandering and I saw that she
could not live long. In a little while, however, her mind cleared so that she
knew me and tears of joy ran down her pale cheeks because I had returned before
she died. She reminded me that she had always said that she would find a grave
in Ethiopia, and asked to be buried and not kept above ground in crystal, as
was the custom there. Then she said that she had been dreaming of my father and
of me; also that she did not think that I need fret myself overmuch about
Amada, since she was sure that before long I should kiss her on the lips.
I asked if she meant that I should marry her and that we should be happy and
fortunate. She replied that she supposed that I should marry her, but of the
rest would say nothing. Indeed her face grew troubled, as though some thought
hurt her, and leaving the matter of Amada she bade Karema bring me the
rose-hued pearls, blessed me, prayed for our reunion in the halls of Osiris,
and straightway died.
So I caused her to be embalmed after the Egyptian fashion and enclosed in a
coffin of crystal with a scarab on her heart that Karema had discovered
somewhere in the city, for always she was searching for things that reminded
her of Egypt, whereof many were to be found brought from time to time by
travellers or strangers. Then with such ceremony as we could without the
services of the priests of Osiris, Karema and I buried her in a tomb that Bes
had caused to be made near to the steps of the temple of the Grasshopper, while
Bes and his nobles watched from a distance.
And so farewell to my beloved mother, the lady Tiu.
After she was gone I grew very sad and lonely. While she lived I had a home,
but now I was an exile, a stranger in a strange land with no one of my own
people to talk to except Karema, with whom, as there were gossips even in
Ethiopia, I thought it well not to talk too much. There was Bes it was true,
but now he was a great king and the time of kings is not their own. Moreover
Bes was Bes and an Ethiopian and I was I and an Egyptian, and therefore
notwithstanding our love and brotherhood, we could never be like men of the
same blood and country.
I grew weary of Ethiopia with its useless gold and damp eternal green and heat,
and longed for the sand and the keen desert air. Bes noted it and offered me
wives, but I shrank from these black women however buxom and kindly, and wished
for no offspring of their race whom afterwards I could never leave. To Egypt I
had sworn not to return unless one voice called me and it remained silent. What
then was I to do, being no longer content to discipline and command an army
that I might not lead into battle?
At length I made up my mind. By nature I was a hunter as much as a soldier; I
would beg from Bes a band of brave men whom I knew, lovers of adventure who
sought new things, and with them strike down south, following the path of the
elephants to wherever the gods might lead us. Doubtless in the end it would be
to death, but what matter when there is nothing for which one cares to live?
While I was brooding over these plans Karema read my mind, perhaps because it
was her own, perhaps by help of her strange arts, which I do not know. At least
one day when I was sitting alone looking at the city beneath from one of the
palace window-places, she came to me looking very beautiful and very mystic in
the white robes she always loved to wear, and said,
“My lord Shabaka, you tire of this land of honey and sweetness and soft
airs and flowers and gold and crystal and black people who grin and chatter and
are not pleasant to be near, is it not so?”
“Yes, Queen,” I answered.
“Do not call me queen, my lord Shabaka, for I weary of that name, as we
both do of the rest. Call me Karema the Arab, or Karema the Cup, which you
will, but by the name of Thoth, god of learning, do not call me
queen.”
“Karema then,” I said. “Well, how do you know that I tire of
all this, Karema?”
“How could you do otherwise who are not a barbarian and who have Egypt in
your heart, and Egypt’s fate and——” here she looked me
straight in the eyes, “Egypt’s Lady. Besides, I measure you by
myself.”
“You at least should be happy, Karema, who are great and rich and
beloved, and the wife of a King who is one of the best of men, and the mother
of children.”
“Yes, Shabaka, I should be but I am not, for who can live on sweetmeats
only, especially when they like what is sour? See now how strangely we are
made. When I was a girl, the daughter of an Arab chief, well bred and well
taught as it chanced, I tired of the hard life of the desert and the narrow
minds about me, I who longed for wisdom and to know great men. Then I became
the Cup of the holy Tanofir and wisdom was all about me, strange wisdom from
another world, rough, sharp wisdom from Tanofir, and the quiet wisdom of the
dead among whom I dwelt. I wearied of that also, Shabaka. I was beautiful and
knew it and I longed to shine in a Court, to be admired among men, to be envied
of women, to rule. My husband came my way. He was clever with a great heart. He
was your friend and therefore I was sure that he must be loyal and true. He
was, or might be, a king, as I knew, though he thought that I did not. I
married him and the holy Tanofir laughed but he did not say me nay, and I
became a queen. And now I wish sometimes that I were dead, or back holding the
cup of the holy Tanofir with the wisdom of the heavens flowing round me and the
soft darkness of the tombs about me. It seems that in this world we never can
be content, Shabaka.”
“No, Karema, we only think that we should be if things were otherwise
than they are. But how can I help you, Karema?”
“Least of all by going away and leaving me alone,” she answered
with the tears starting to her eyes.
Looking at her, I began to think that the best thing I could do would be to go
away and at once, but as ever she read my thought, shook her head and laughed.
“No, no, I have put on my yoke and will carry it to the end. Have I not
two black children and a husband who is a hero, a wit and a mountebank in one,
and a throne and more gold and crystal than I ever wish to see again even in a
dream, and shall I not cling to these good things? If you went I should only be
a little more unhappy than before, that is all. Not for my sake do I ask you to
stay, but for your own.”
“How for my own, Karema? I have done all that I can do here. I have built
the army afresh from cook-boys to generals. Bes needs me no longer who has you,
his children and his country, and I die of weariness.”
“You can stop to make use of that army you have built afresh,
Shabaka.”
“Against whom? There are none to fight.”
“Against the Great King of the East. Listen. My gift of vision has grown
strong and clear of late. Only to-day I have seen a meeting between Pharaoh,
the holy Tanofir and the lady Amada. They were all disturbed, I know not at
what, and the end of it was that Amada wrote in a roll and gave the writing to
messengers, who I think even now are speeding southward—to you, Shabaka.
Nay, do not look doubtfully on me, it is true.”
“Then you did well to tell me, Karema, for within a moon of this day I
should have been where perhaps no messengers would have found me. Now I will
wait and let it be your part to prepare the mind of Bes. Do you think that he
would give me an army to lead to Egypt, if there were need?”
She nodded and answered,
“He would do so for three reasons. The first is because he loves you, the
second because he too wearies of Ethiopia and this rich, fat life of peace, and
the third, because I shall tell him that he must.”
“Then why trouble to speak of the other two?” I said laughing.
So I stayed on in the City of the Grasshopper, and busied myself with the
questions of how to transport and feed a great army that must hold the field
for six months or a year; also with the setting of hundreds of skilled men to
the making of bows, arrows, swords and shields. Nor did Bes say me no in these
matters. Indeed he helped them forward by issuing the orders as his own,
wherein I saw the hand of Karema.
Three months went by and I began to think that Karema’s power had been at
fault, or that her vision was one that came from her lips and not from her
heart, to keep me in Ethiopia. But again she read my mind and smiled.
“Not so, Shabaka,” she said. “Those messengers have come to
trouble and are detained by a petty tribe beyond our borders over some matter
of a woman. Ten days ago the frontier guards marched to set them free.”
So again I waited and at length the messengers came, three of them Egyptians
and three men of Ethiopia who dwelt in Egypt to learn its wisdom, reporting
that as Karema had said, through the foolishness of a servant they had been
held prisoner by an Arab chief and thus delayed. Then they delivered the
writings which they had kept safe. One was from Pharaoh to the Karoon of
Ethiopia; one from the holy Tanofir to Karema; and one from the lady Amada to
myself.
With a trembling hand I broke the silk and seals and read. It ran thus:
“Shabaka, my Cousin,
“You departed from Egypt saying that never would you return unless I,
Amada the priestess, called you, and I told you that I should never call. You
said, moreover, that if you came at my call you would demand me in guerdon, and
I told you that never would I give myself to you who was doubly sworn to Isis.
Yet now I call and now I say that if you come and conquer and I yet live, then,
if you still will it, I am yours. Thus stands the case: The Great King advances
upon Egypt with an army countless as the sands, nor can Egypt hope to battle
against him unaided and alone. He comes to make of her a slave, to kill her
children, to burn her temples, to sack her cities and to defile her gods with
blasphemies. Moreover he comes to seize me and to drag me away to shame in his
House of Women.
“Therefore for the sake of the gods, for Egypt’s sake and for my
own, I pray you come and save us. Moreover I still love you, Shabaka, yes, more
a thousand times, than ever I did, though whether you still love me I know not.
For that love’s sake, therefore, I am ready to break my vows to Isis and
to dare her vengeance, if she should desire to be avenged upon me who would
save her and her worship, praying that it may fall on my head and not on yours.
This will I do by the counsel of the holy Tanofir, by command of Pharaoh, and
with the consent of the high priests of Egypt.
“Now I, Amada, have written. Choose, Shabaka, beloved of my heart.”
Such was the letter that caused my head to swim and set my soul on fire. Still
I said nothing, but thrust it into my robe and waited. Presently Bes, who had
been reading in his roll, looked up and spoke, saying,
“Are you minded to see arrows fly and swords shine in war, Brother? If
so, here is opportunity. Pharaoh writes to me above his own seal, seeking an
alliance between Egypt and Ethiopia. He says that the King of kings invades him
and that if he conquers Egypt he has sworn to travel on and conquer Ethiopia
also, since he learns that it is now ruled by a certain dwarf who once stole
his White Signet, and by a certain Egyptian who once killed his Satrap,
Idernes.”
“What says the Karoon?” I asked.
Bes rolled his eyes and turning to Karema, asked,
“What says the Karoon’s wife?”
Karema laid down the roll she had been studying and answered,
“She says that she has received a command from her master the holy
Tanofir to wait upon him forthwith, for reasons that he will explain when she
arrives, or to brave his curse upon her, her children, her country and her
husband, and not only his but that of the spirits who serve him.”
“The curse of the holy Tanofir is not a thing to mock at,” said
Bes, “as I who revere him, know as well as any man.”
“No, Husband, and therefore I leave for Egypt as soon as may be. It seems
that my sister is dead, this year past, and the holy Tanofir has no one to hold
his cup.”
“And what shall I do?” asked Bes.
“That is for you to say, Husband. But if you will, you can stay here and
guard our children, giving the command of your army to the lord Shabaka.”
Now, for we were alone, Bes twisted himself about, rolling his eyes and
laughing as he used to do before he became Karoon of Ethiopia.
“O-ho-ho! Wife,” he said, “so you are to go to Egypt, leaving
me to play the nurse to babes, and my brother here is to command my armies,
leaving me to look after the old men and the women. Nay, I think otherwise. I
think that I shall come also, that is if my brother wishes it. Did he not save
my life and is it not his and with it all I have? Oh! have done. Once more we
will stand side by side in the battle, Brother, and afterwards let Fate do as
it will with us. Tell me now, what is the tale of archers and of swordsmen with
which we can march against the Great King with whom, like you, I have a score
to settle?”
“Seventy and five thousand,” I answered.
“Good! On the fifth day from now the army marches for Egypt.”
CHAPTER XVI.
TANOFIR FINDS HIS BROKEN CUP
March we did, but on the fifteenth day, not the fifth, since there was much to
make ready. First the Council of the Ethiopians must be consulted and through
them the people. In the beginning there was trouble over the matter, since many
were against a distant war, and this even after Bes had urged that it was
better to attack than wait to be attacked. For they answered, and justly, that
here in Ethiopia distance and the desert were their shields, since the King of
kings, however great his strength, would be weary and famished before he set
foot within their borders.
In the end the knot was cut with a sword, for when the army came to learn of
the dispute, from the generals down to the common soldiers, every man clamoured
to be led to war, since, as I have said, these Ethiopians were fighters all of
them, and near at hand there were none left with whom they could fight. So when
the Council came to see that they must choose between war abroad and revolt at
home, they gave way, bargaining only that the children of the Karoon should not
leave the land so that if aught befell him, there would be some of the true
blood left to succeed.
Also the Grasshopper was consulted by the priests who found the omens
favourable. Indeed I was told that this great golden locust sat up upon its
hind legs upon the altar and waved its feelers in the air, which only happened
when wonderful fortune was about to bless the land. The tale reminded me of the
nodding of the statues of our own gods in Egypt when a new Pharaoh was
presented to them, and of that of Isis when Amada put up her prayer to the
divine Mother. To tell the truth, I suspected Karema of having some hand in the
business. However, so it happened.
At length we set forth, a mighty host, Bes commanding the swordsmen and I,
under him, the archers, of whom there were more than thirty thousand men, and
glad was I when all the farewells were said and we were free of the weeping
crowds of women. At first Bes and Karema were somewhat sad at parting from
their children, but in a little while they grew gay again since the one longed
for battle and the other for the sands of Egypt.
Now of our advance I need say little, except that it was slow, though none
dared to bar the road of so mighty an array. Since we must go on foot, we were
not able to cover more than five leagues a day, for even after we reached the
river boats could not be found for so many, though Karema travelled in one with
her ladies. Also cattle and corn must always be sent forward for food. Still we
crept on to Egypt without sickness, accident, or revolt.
When we drew near to its frontiers messengers met us from Pharaoh bearing
letters in answer to those which we had sent with the tidings of our coming.
These contained little but ill news. It seemed that the Great King with a
countless host had taken all the cities of the Delta and, after a long siege,
had captured Memphis and put it to the sack, and that the army of Egypt,
fighting desperately by land and upon the Nile was being driven southwards
towards Thebes. Pharaoh added that he proposed to make his last stand at the
strong city of Amada, since he doubted whether the troops from Lower Egypt
would not rather surrender to the Easterns than retreat further up the Nile. He
thanked and blessed us for our promised aid and prayed that it might come in
time to save Egypt from slavery and himself from death.
Also there was a letter for me from Amada in which she said,
“Oh! come quickly. Come quickly, beloved Shabaka, lest of me you should
find but bones for never will I fall living into the hands of the Great King.
We are sore pressed and although Amada has been made very strong, it can stand
but a little while against such a countless multitude armed with all the
engines of war.”
For Karema, too, there were messages from the holy Tanofir of the same meaning,
saying that unless we appeared within a moon of their receipt, all was lost.
We read and took counsel. Then we pressed forward by double marches, sending
swift runners forward to bid Pharaoh and his army hold on to the last spear and
arrow.
On the twenty-fifth day from the receipt of this news we came to the great
frontier city which we found in tumult for its citizens were mad with fear.
Here we rested one night and ate of the food that was gathered there in plenty.
Then leaving a small rear-guard of five thousand men who were tired out, to
hold the place, we pressed onwards, for Amada was still four days’ march
away. On the morning of the fourth day we were told that it was falling, or had
fallen, and when at length we came in sight of the place we saw that it was
beleaguered by an innumerable host of Easterns, while on the Nile was a great
fleet of Grecian and Cyprian mercenaries. Moreover, heralds from the King of
kings reached us, saying:
“Surrender, Barbarians, or before the second day dawns you shall sleep
sound, every one of you.”
To these we answered that we would take counsel on the matter and that perhaps
on the morrow we would surrender, since when we had marched from Ethiopia, we
did not know how great was the King’s strength, having been deceived as
to it by the letters of the Pharaoh. Meanwhile that the King of kings would do
well to let us alone, since we were brave men and meant to die hard, and it
would be better for him to leave us to march back to Ethiopia, rather than lose
an army in trying to kill us.
With these words which were spoken by Bes himself, the messengers departed. One
of them however, who seemed to be a great lord, called in a loud voice to his
companions, saying it was hard that nobles should have to do the errands, not
of a man but of an ape who would look better hanging to a pole. Bes made no
answer, only rolled his yellow eyes and said when the lord was out of hearing,
“Now by the Grasshopper and all the gods of Egypt I swear that in payment
for this insult I will choke the Nile with the army of the Great King, and hang
that knave to a pole from the prow of the royal ship.” Which last thing I
hope he did.
When the embassy had gone Bes gave orders that the whole army should eat and
lie down to sleep.
“I am sure,” said he, “that the Great King will not attack us
at once, since he will hope that we shall flee away during the night, having
seen his strength.”
So the Ethiopians filled themselves and then lay down to sleep, which these
people can do at any time, even if not tired as they were. But while they
rested Bes and I and Karema, with some of the generals consulted together long
and earnestly. For in truth we knew not what to do. But a league away lay the
town of Amada beset by hundreds of thousands of the Easterns so that none could
come in or out, and within its walls were the remains of Pharaoh’s army,
not more than twenty thousand men, all told, if what we heard were true. On the
Nile also was the great Grecian and Cyprian fleet, two hundred vessels and
more, though as we could see by the light of the setting sun the most of these
were made fast to the western bank where the Egyptians could not come at them.
For the rest our position was good, being on high desert beyond the cultivated
land which bordered the eastern bank. But in front of us, separating us from
the southern army of the King, stretched a swamp hard to cross, so that we
could not hope to make an attack by night as there was no moon. Lastly, the
main Eastern strength, to the number of two hundred thousand or more, lay to
the north beyond Amada.
All these things we considered, talking low and earnestly there in the tent,
till it grew so dark that we could not see each other’s faces while
behind us slumbered our army that now numbered some seventy thousand men.
“We are in a trap,” said Bes at length. “If we await attack
they will weigh us down with numbers. If we flee they have camels and horses
and will overtake us; also ships of which we have none. If we attack it must be
without cover through swamp where we shall be bogged.
“Meanwhile Pharaoh is perishing within yonder walls of Amada which the
engines batter down. By the Grasshopper! I know not what to do. It seems that
our journey is vain and that few of us will see Ethiopia more; also that Egypt
is sped.”
I made no answer, for here my generalship failed me and I had nothing to say.
The captains, too, were silent, only woman-like, Karema wept a little, and I
too went near to weeping who thought of Amada penned in yonder temple like a
lamb that awaits the butcher’s knife.
Suddenly, coming from the door of the tent which I thought was closed, I heard
a deep voice say,
“I have ever noted that those of Ethiopian blood are melancholy after
sundown, though of Egyptians I had thought better things.”
Now about this voice there was something familiar to me, still I said nothing,
nor did the others, for to speak the truth, all of us were frightened and
thought that we must dream. For how could any thing that breathed approach this
tent through a triple line of sentries? So we sat still, staring at the
darkness, till presently in that darkness appeared a glow of light, such as
comes from the fire-flies of Ethiopia. It grew and grew while we gasped with
fear, till presently it took shape, and the shape it took was that of the
ancient withered face, the sightless eyes, and the white beard of the holy
Tanofir. Yes, there not two feet from the ground seemed to float the head of
the holy Tanofir, limned in faint flame, which I suppose must have been
reflected on to it from the light of some camp-fire without.
“O my beloved master!” cried Karema, and threw herself towards him.
“O my beloved Cup!” answered Tanofir. “Glad am I to know you
well and unshattered.”
Then a torch was lit and lo! there before us, wrapped in his dark cloak sat the
holy Tanofir.
“Whence come you, my Great-uncle?” I asked amazed.
“From less far than you do, Nephew,” he answered. “Namely out
of Amada yonder. Oh! ask me not how. It is easy if you are a blind old beggar
who knows the path. And by the way, if you have aught to eat I should be glad
of a bite and a sup, since in Amada food has been scarce for this last month,
and to-night there is little left.”
Karema sped from the tent and presently returned with bread and wine of which
Tanofir partook almost greedily.
“This is the first strong drink that I have tasted for many a
year,” he said as he drained the goblet; “but better a broken vow
than broken wits when one has much to plan and do. At least I hope the gods
will think so when I meet them presently. There—I am strong again. Now,
say, what is your force?”
We told him.
“Good. And what is your plan?”
We shook our heads, having none.
“Bes,” he said sternly, “I think you grow dull since you
became a king—or perhaps it is marriage that makes you so. Why, in bygone
years schemes would have come so fast that they would have choked each other
between those thick lips of yours. And Shabaka, tell me, have you lost all your
generalship whereof once you had plenty, in the soft air of Ethiopia? Or is it
that even the shadow of marriage makes you dull? Well, I must turn to
the woman, for that is always the lot of man. Your plan, Karema, and quickly
for there is no time to lose.”
Now the face of Karema grew fixed and her eyes dreamy as she spoke in a slow,
measured voice like one who knows not what she says.
“My plan is to destroy the armies of the Great King and to relieve the
city of Amada.”
“A very good plan,” said holy Tanofir, “but the question is,
how?”
“I think,” went on Karema, “that about a league above this
place there is a spot where at this season the Nile can be forded by tall men
without the wetting of their shoulders. First then, I would send five thousand
swordsmen across that ford and let them creep down on the navy of the Great
King where the sailors revel in safety, or sleep sound, and fire the ships. The
wind blows strongly from the south and the flames will leap fast from one of
them to the other. Most of their crews will be burned and the rest can be slain
by our five thousand.”
“Good, very good,” said the holy Tanofir, “but not enough,
seeing that on the eastern bank is gathered the host of over two hundred
thousand men. Now how will you deal with them, Karema?”
“I seem to see a road yonder beyond the swamp. It runs on the edge of the
desert but behind the sand-hills. I would send the archers of whom there are
more than thirty thousand, under the command of Shabaka along that road which
leads them past Amada. On its farther side are low hills strewn with rocks.
Here I would let the archers take cover and wait for the breaking of the dawn.
Then beneath them they will see the most of the Eastern host and with such bows
as ours they can sweep the plain from the hills almost to the Nile, and having
a hundred arrows to a man, should slaughter the Easterns by the ten thousand,
for when these turn to charge a shaft should pierce through two
together.”
“Good again,” said Tanofir. “But what of the army of the
Great King which lies upon this side of Amada?”
“I think that before the dawn, believing us so few, it will advance and
with the first light begin to thread the swamp, and therefore we must keep five
thousand archers to gall it as it comes. Still it will win through, though with
loss, and find us waiting for it here shoulder to shoulder, rank upon rank with
locked shields, against which horse and foot shall break in vain, for who shall
drive a wedge through the Ethiopian squares that Shabaka has trained and that
Bes, the Karoon, commands? I say that they shall roll back like waves from a
cliff; yes, again and again, growing ever fewer till the clamour of battle and
the shouts of fear and agony reach their ears from beyond Amada where Shabaka
and the archers do their work and the sight of the burning ships strikes terror
in them and they fly.”
“Good again,” said the holy Tanofir. “But still many on both
fronts will be left, for this army of Easterns is very vast. And how will you
deal with these, O Karema?”
“On these I would have Pharaoh with all his remaining strength pour from
the northern and the southern gates of Amada, for so shall they be caught like
wounded lions between two wild bulls and torn and trampled and utterly
destroyed. Only I know not how to tell Pharaoh what he must do, and
when.”
“Good again,” said the holy Tanofir, “very good. And as for
the telling of Pharaoh, well, I shall see him presently. It is strange, my
chipped Cup which I had almost thrown away as useless, that although broken,
you still hold so much wisdom. For know, wonderful though it may seem, that
just such plans as you have spoken have grown up in my own mind, only I wished
to learn if you thought them wise.”
Then he laughed a little and Karema stretched her arms as one does who awakes
from sleep, rubbed her eyes and asked if he would not eat more food.
In an instant Tanofir was speaking again in a quick, clear voice.
“Bes, or King,” he said, “doubtless you will do your
wife’s will. Therefore let the host be aroused and stand to its arms. As
it chances I have four men without who can be trusted. Two of these will guide
the five thousand to the ford and across it; also down upon the ships. The
other two will guide Shabaka and the archers along the road which Karema
remembers so well; perhaps she trod it as a child. For my part I return to
Amada to make sure that Pharaoh does his share and at the right time. For mark,
unless all this is carried through to-night Amada will fall to-morrow, a
certain priestess will die, and you, Bes, and your soldiers will never look on
Ethiopia again. Is it agreed?”
I nodded who did not wish to waste time in words, and Bes rolled his eyes and
answered,
“When one can think of nothing, it is best to follow the counsel of those
who can think of something; also to hunt rather than to be hunted. Especially
is this so if that something comes from the holy Tanofir or his broken Cup.
Generals, you have heard. Rouse the host and bid them stand to their arms
company by company!”
The generals leapt away into the darkness like arrows from a bow, and presently
we heard the noise of gathering men.
“Where are these guides of yours, holy Tanofir?” asked Bes.
Tanofir beckoned over his shoulder, and out of the gloom, one by one, four men
stole into the tent. They were strange, quiet men, but I can say no more of
them since their faces were veiled, nor as it chances, did I ever see any of
them after the battle, in which I suppose that they were killed. Or perhaps
they appeared after—well, never mind!
“You have heard,” said Tanofir, whereupon all four of them bowed
their mysterious veiled heads.
“Now, my Brother,” whispered Bes into my ear, “tell me, I
pray you, how did four men who were not in the tent, hear what was said in this
tent, and how did they come through the guards who have orders to kill anyone
who does not know the countersign, especially men whose faces are wrapped in
napkins?”
“I do not know,” I answered, whereon Bes groaned, only Karema
smiled a little as though to herself.
“Then, having heard, obey,” said the holy Tanofir, whereon the four
veiled ones bowed again.
“Will you not give them their orders, O most Venerable?” inquired
Bes doubtfully.
“I think it is needless,” said Tanofir in a dry voice. “Why
try to teach those who know?”
“Will you not offer them something to eat, since they also must be
hungry?” I asked of Karema.
“Fool, be silent,” she replied, looking on me with contempt.
“Do the—friends—of Tanofir need to eat?”
“I should have thought so after being beleaguered for a month in a
starving town. If the master wants to eat, why should not his men?” I
murmured.
Then a thought struck me and I was silent.
A general returned and reported that the orders had been executed and that all
the army was afoot.
“Good,” said Bes. “Then start forthwith with five thousand
men, and burn those ships, according to the plan laid down by the Queen Karema,
which you heard her speak but now,” and he named certain regiments that
he should take with him, those of the general’s own command, adding:
“Save some of the ships if you can, and afterwards cross the Nile in them
with your men, and join yourself either to my force or to that of the lord
Shabaka, according to what you see. May the Grasshopper give you victory and
wisdom.”
The general saluted and asked,
“Who guides us to and across the ford of the great river?”
Two of the veiled men stepped forward whereon the general muttered into my ear,
“I like not the look of them. I pray the Grasshopper they do not guide us
across the River of Death.”
“Have no fear, General,” said the holy Tanofir from the other end
of the tent. “If you and your men play their parts as well as the guides
will play theirs, the ships are already burned together with their companies.
Only take fire with you.”
So that general departed with the two guides, looking somewhat frightened, and
soon was marching up Nile at the head of five thousand swordsmen.
Now Bes looked at me and said,
“It seems that you had better be gone also, my Brother, with the archers.
Perchance the holy Tanofir will show you whither.”
“No, no,” answered Tanofir, “my guides will show him. Look
not so doubtful, Shabaka. Did I fail you when you were in the grip of the King
of kings in the East, and only your own life and that of Bes were at
stake?”
“I do not know,” I answered.
“You do not know, but I know, as I think do Bes and Karema, since the one
received the messages which the other sent. Well, if I did not fail you then,
shall I fail you now when Egypt is at stake? Follow these guides I give you,
and——” here he took hold of the quiver of arrows that lay
beside me on the ground, and as certainly as though he could see it with his
blind eyes, touched one of them, on the shaft of which were two black and a
white feather, “remember my words after you have loosed this arrow from
your great black bow and noted where it strikes.”
Then I turned to Bes and asked,
“Where do we meet again?”
“I cannot say, Brother,” he answered. “In Amada if that may
be. If not, at the Table of Osiris, or in the fields of the Grasshopper, or in
the blackness which swallows all, gods and men together.”
“Does Karema come with me or bide with you?” I asked again.
“She does neither,” interrupted Tanofir, “she accompanies me
to Amada, where I have need of her and she will be more safe. Oh! fear nothing,
for every hermit however poor, still carries his staff and his cup, even if it
be cracked.”
Then I shook Bes by the hand and went my way, wondering if I were awake or
dreaming, and the last thing I saw in that tent was the beautiful face of
Karema smiling at me. This I took to be a good omen, since I knew that it was
the heart of the holy Tanofir which smiled, and that her eyes were but its
mirror.
Already my thirty thousand archers were marshalling, and having made sure that
there was ample store of arrows and that all their gourds were filled with
water, I set myself at their head while in front of me walked the two veiled
guides. I looked upon them doubtfully, since it seemed dangerous to trust an
army to unknown men who for aught I knew, might lead us into the midst of our
foes. Then I remembered that they were vouched for by the holy Tanofir, my own
great-uncle whom I trusted above any man on earth, and took heart again.
How had he come into our tent, I wondered, and how, blind as he was, would he
get back into Amada with Karema, if he took her? Well, who could account for
the goings or the comings of the holy Tanofir, who was more of a spirit than a
man? Perhaps it was not really he whom we had seen, but what we Egyptians
called his Ka or Double which can pass to and fro at will. Only do
Kas eat? Of this matter I knew only that offerings of food and drink are
made to them in tombs. So leaving the holy Tanofir to guard himself, I turned
my mind to our own business, which was to surprise the army of the Great King.
Skirting the swamp we came to rough and higher ground and though I could see
little in that darkness, I knew that we were walking up a hill. Presently we
crossed its crest and descending for three bowshots or so, I felt that my feet
were on a road. Now the guides turned to the left and after them in a long line
came my army of thirty thousand archers. In utter silence we went since we had
no beasts with us and our sandalled feet made little noise; moreover orders had
been passed down the line that the man who made a sound should die.
For two hours or more we marched thus, then bore to the left again and climbed
a slope, by which time I judged we must be well past the town of Amada. Here
suddenly the guides halted and we after them at whispered words of command. One
of them took me by the cloak, led me forward a little way to the crest of the
ridge, and pointed with his white-sleeved arm. I looked and there beneath me,
well within bowshot, were thousands of the watchfires of the King’s army,
flaring, some of them, in the strong wind. For a full league those fires burned
and we were opposite to the midmost of them.
“See now, General Shabaka,” said the guide, speaking for the first
time in a curious hissing whisper such as might come from a man who had no
lips, “beneath you sleeps the Eastern host, which being so great, has not
thought it needful to guard this ridge. Now marshal your archers in a fourfold
line in such fashion that at the first break of dawn they can take cover behind
the rocks and shoot, every man of them without piercing his fellow. Do you bide
here with the centre where your standard can be seen by all to north and south.
I and my companion will lead your vanguard farther on to where the ridge draws
nearer to the Nile, so that with their arrows they can hold back and slay any
who strive to escape down stream. The rest is in your hands, for we are guides,
not generals. Summon your captains and issue your commands.”
So we went back again and I called the officers together and told them what
they were to do, then despatched them to their regiments.
Presently the vanguard of ten thousand men drew away and vanished, and with
them the white-robed guides on whom I never looked again. Then I marshalled my
centre as well as I could in the gloom, and bade them lie down to rest and
sleep if they were able; also, within thirty minutes of the sunrise, to eat and
drink a little of the food they carried, to see that every bow was ready and
that the arrows were loosened in every quiver. This done, with a few whom I
trusted to serve me as messengers and guard, I crept up to the brow of the hill
or slope, and there we laid us down and watched.
CHAPTER XVII.
THE BATTLE—AND AFTER
Two hours went by and I knew by the stars that the dawn could not be far away.
My eyes were fixed upon the Nile and on the lights that hung to the prows of
the Great King’s ships. Where were those who had been sent to fire them,
I wondered, for of them I saw nothing. Well, their journey would be long as
they must wade the river. Perhaps they had not yet arrived, or perhaps they had
miscarried. At least the fleet seemed very quiet. None were alarmed there and
no sentry challenged.
At length it grew near to dawn and behind me I heard the gentle stir of the
Ethiopians arising and eating as they had been bidden, whereon I too ate and
drank a little, though never had I less wished for food. The East brightened
and far up the Nile of a sudden there appeared what at first I took to be a
meteor or a lantern waving in the wind that now was blowing its strongest, as
it does at this season of the year just at the time of dawn. Yet that lantern
seemed to travel fast and lo! now I saw that it was fire running up the rigging
of a ship.
It leapt from rope to rope and from sail to sail till they blazed fiercely, and
in other ships also nearer to us, flame appeared that grew to a great red
sheet. Our men had not failed; the navy of the King of kings was burning! Oh!
how it burned fanned by the breath of that strong wind. From vessel to vessel
leapt the fire like a thing alive, for all of them were drawn up on the bank
with prows fastened in such fashion that they could not readily be made loose.
Some broke away indeed, but they were aflame and only served to spread the fire
more quickly. Before the rim of the sun appeared for a league or more there was
nothing but blazing ships from which rose a hideous crying, and still more and
more took fire lower down the line.
I had no time to watch for now I must be up and doing. The sky grew grey, there
was light enough to see though faintly. I cast my eyes about me and perceived
that no place in the world could have been better for archery. In front the
hill was steep for a hundred paces or more and scattered over with thousands of
large stones behind which bowmen might take shelter. Then came a gentle slope
of loose sand up which attackers would find it hard to climb. Then the long
flat plain whereon the Easterns were camped, and beyond it, scarce two furlongs
away, the banks of Nile.
Indeed the place was ill-chosen for so great an army, nor could it have held
them all, had not the camping ground been a full league in length, and even so
they were crowded. Out of the mist their tents appeared, thousands of them,
farther than my eye could reach, and almost opposite to me, near to the banks
of the river, was a great pavilion of silk and gold that I guessed must shelter
the majesty of the King of kings. Indeed this was certain since now I saw that
over it floated his royal banner which I knew so well, I who had stolen the
little White Signet of signets from which it was taken. Truly the holy Tanofir,
or his Cup, Karema, or his messengers, or the spirits with whom he dwelt, I
know not which, had a general’s eye and knew how to plan an ambuscade.
So thought I to myself as I ran back to my army to meet the gathered captains
and set all things in order. It was soon done for they were ready, as were the
fierce Ethiopians fresh from their rest and food, and stringing their bows,
every one of them, or loosening the arrows in their quivers. As I came they
lifted their hands in salute, for speak they dared not and I sent a whisper
down their ranks, that this day they must fight and conquer, or fall for the
glory of Ethiopia and their king. Then I gave my orders and before the sun rose
and revealed them they crept forward in a fourfold line and took shelter behind
the stones, lying there invisible on their bellies until the moment came.
The red rim of Ra appeared glorious in the East, and I, from behind the rocks
that I had chosen, sat down and watched. Oh! truly Tanofir or the gods of Egypt
were ordering things aright for us. The huge camp was awake now and aware of
what was happening on the Nile. They could not see well because of the tall
reeds upon the river’s rim and therefore, without order or discipline, by
the thousand and the ten thousand, for their numbers were countless, some with
arms and some without, they ran to the slope of sand beneath our station and
began to climb it to have a better view of the burning ships.
The sun leapt up swiftly as it does in Egypt. His glowing edge appeared over
the crest of the hill though the hollows beneath were still filled with shadow.
The moment was at hand. I waited till I had counted ten, glancing to the right
and left of me to see that all were ready and to suffer the crowd to thicken on
the slope, but not to reach the lowest rocks, whither they were climbing. Then
I gave the double signal that had been agreed.
Behind me the banner of the golden Grasshopper was raised upon a tall pole and
broke upon the breeze. That was the first signal whereat every man rose to his
knees and set shaft on string. Next I lifted my bow, the black bow, the ancient
bow that few save I could bend, and drew it to my ear.
Far away, out of arrow-reach as most would have said, floated the Great
King’s standard over his pavilion. At this I aimed, making allowance for
the wind, and shot. The shaft leapt forward, seen in the sunlight, lost in the
shadow, seen in the sunlight again and lastly seen once more, pinning that
golden standard against its pole!
At the sight of the omen a roar went up that rolled to right and left of us, a
roar from thirty thousand throats. Now it was lost in a sound like to the
hissing of thunder rain in Ethiopia, the sound of thirty thousand arrows
rushing through the wind. Oh! they were well aimed, those arrows for I had not
taught the Ethiopians archery in vain.
How many went down before them? The gods of Egypt know alone. I do not. All I
know is that the long slope of sand which had been crowded with standing men,
was now thick with fallen men, many of whom lay as though they were asleep. For
what mail could resist the iron-pointed shafts driven by the strong bows of the
Ethiopians?
And this was but a beginning, for, flight after flight, those arrows sped till
the air grew dark with them. Soon there were no more to shoot at on the slope,
for these were down, and the order went to lift the bows and draw upon the
camp, and especially upon the parks of baggage beasts. Presently these were
down also, or rushing maddened to and fro.
At last the Eastern generals saw and understood. Orders were shouted and in a
mad confusion the scores of thousands who were unharmed, rushed back towards
the banks of Nile where our shafts could not reach them. Here they formed up in
their companies and took counsel. It was soon ended, for all the vast mass of
them, preceded by a cloud of archers, began to advance upon the hill.
Now I passed a command to the Ethiopians, of whom so far not one had fallen, to
lie low and wait. On came the glittering multitude of Easterns, gay with purple
and gold, their mail and swords shining in the risen sun. On they came by
squadron and by company, more than the eye could number. They reached the sand
slope thick with their own dead and wounded and paused a little because they
could see no man, since the black bodies of the Ethiopians were hid behind the
black stones and the black bows did not catch the light.
Then from a gorgeous group that I guessed hid the person of the Great King
surrounded by his regiment of guards, ten thousand of them who were called
Immortals, messengers sprang forth screaming the order to charge. The host
began to climb the slippery sand slope but still I held my hand till their
endless lines were within fifty paces of us and their arrows rattled harmlessly
against our stones. Then I caused the banner of the Grasshopper that had been
lowered, to be lifted thrice, and at the third lifting once more thirty
thousand arrows rushed forth to kill.
They went down, they went down in lines and heaps, riddled through and through.
But still others came on for they fought under the eye of the Great King, and
to fly meant death with shame and torture. We could not kill them all, they
were too many. We could not kill the half of them. Now their foremost were
within ten paces of us and since we must stand up to shoot, our men began to
fall, also pierced with arrows. I caused the blast of retreat to be sounded on
the ivory horn and step by step we drew back to the crest of the ridge,
shooting as we went. On the crest we re-formed rapidly in a double line
standing as close as we could together and my example was followed all down the
ranks to right and left. Then I bethought me of a plan that I had taught these
archers again and again in Ethiopia.
With the flag I signalled a command to stop shooting and also passed the word
down the line, so that presently no more arrows flew. The Easterns hesitated,
wondering whether this were a trap, or if we lacked shafts, and meanwhile I
sent messengers with certain orders to the vanguard, who sped away at speed
behind the hill, running as they never ran before. Presently I heard a voice
below cry out,
“The Great King commands that the barbarians be destroyed. Let the
barbarians be destroyed!”
Now with a roar they came on like a flood. I waited till they were within
twenty paces of us, and shouted, “Shoot and fall!”
The first line shot and oh! fearful was its work, for not a shaft missed those
crowded hosts and many pinned two together. My archers shot and fell down,
setting new arrows to the string as they fell, whereon the second line also
shot over them. Then up we sprang and loosed again, and again fell down,
whereon the second line once more poured in its deadly hail.
Now the Easterns stayed their advance, for their front ranks lay prone, and
those behind must climb over them if they could. Yes, standing there in
glittering groups they rocked and hesitated although their officers struck them
with swords and lances to drive them forward. Once more our front rank rose and
loosed, and once more we dropped and let the shafts of the second speed over
us. It was too much, flesh and blood could not bear more of those arrows.
Thousands upon thousands were down and the rest began to flee in confusion.
Then at my command the ivory horns sounded the charge. Every man slung his bow
upon his back and drew his short sword.
“On to them!” I cried and leapt forward.
Like a black torrent we rushed down the hill, leaping over the dead and
wounded. The retreat became a rout since before these ebon, great-eyed warriors
the soft Easterns did not care to stand. They fled screaming,
“These are devils! These are devils!”
We were among them now, hacking and stabbing with the short swords upon their
heads and backs. There was no need to aim the blow, they were so many. Like a
huddled mob of cattle they turned and fled down Nile. But my orders had reached
the vanguard and these, hidden in the growing crops on the narrow neck of
swampy land between the hills and the Nile, met them with arrows as they came,
also raked them from the steep cliff side. Their chariot wheels sank into the
mud till the horses were slain; their footmen were piled in heaps about them,
till soon there was a mighty wall of dead and dying. And our centre and
rearguard came up behind. Oh! we slew and slew, till before the sun was an hour
high over half the army of the Great King was no more. Then we re-formed,
having suffered but little loss, and drank of the water of the Nile.
“All is not done,” I cried.
For the Immortals still remained behind us, gathered in massed ranks about
their king. Also there were many thousands of others between these and the
walls of Amada, and to the south of the city yet a second army, that with which
Bes had been left to deal, with what success I knew not.
“Ethiopians,” I shouted, “cease crying Victory, since the
battle is about to begin. Strike, and at once before the Easterns find their
heart again.”
So we advanced upon the Immortals, all of us, for now the vanguard had joined
our strength.
In long lines we advanced over that blood-soaked plain, and as we came the
Great King loosed his remaining chariots against us. It availed him nothing,
since the horses could not face our arrows whereof, thanks be to the gods! I
had prepared so ample a store, carried in bundles by lads. Scarce a chariot
reached our lines, and those that did were destroyed, leaving us unbroken.
The chariots were done with and their drivers dead, but there still frowned the
squares of the Immortals. We shot at them till nearly all our shafts were
spent, and, galled to madness, they charged. We did not wait for the points of
those long spears, but ran in beneath them striking with our short swords, and
oh! grim and desperate was that battle, since the Easterns were clad in mail
and the Ethiopians had but short jerkins of bull’s hide.
Fight as we would we were driven back. The fray turned against us and we fell
by hundreds. I bethought me of flight to the hills, since now we were
outnumbered and very weary. But behold! when all seemed lost a great shouting
rose from Amada and through her opened gates poured forth all that remained of
the army of Pharaoh, perhaps eighteen or twenty thousand men. I saw, and my
heart rose again.
“Stand firm!” I cried. “Stand firm!” and lo! we stood.
The Egyptians were on them now and in their midst I saw Pharaoh’s banner.
By degrees the battle swayed towards the banks of Nile, we to the north, the
Egyptians to the south and the Easterns between us. They were trying to turn
our flank; yes, and would have done it, had there not suddenly appeared upon
the Nile a fleet of ships. At first I thought that we were lost, for these
ships were from Greece and Cyprus, till I saw the banner of the Grasshopper
wave from a prow, and knew that they were manned by our five thousand who had
gone out to burn the fleet, and had saved these vessels. They beached and from
their crowded holds poured the five thousand, or those that were left of them,
and ranging themselves upon the bank, raised their war-shout and attacked the
ends of the Easterns’ lines.
Now we charged for the last time and the Egyptians charged from the south.
Ha-ha! the ranks of the Immortals were broken at length. We were among them. I
saw Pharaoh, his uræus circlet on his helm. He was wounded and sore
beset. A tall Immortal rushed at him with a spear and drove it home.
Pharaoh fell.
I leapt over him and killed that Eastern with a blow upon the neck, but my
sword shattered on his armour. The tide of battle rolled up and swept us apart
and I saw Pharaoh being carried away. Look! yonder was the Great King himself
standing in a golden chariot, the Great King in all his glory whom last I had
seen far away in the East. He knew me and shot at me with a bow, the bow he
thought my own, shouting, “Die, dog of an Egyptian!”
His arrow pierced my helm but missed my head. I strove to come at him but could
not.
The real rout began. The Immortals were broken like an earthen jar. They
retreated in groups fighting desperately and of these the thickest was around
the Great King. He whom I hated was about to escape me. He still had horses; he
would fly down Nile, gain his reserves and so away back to the East, where he
would gather new and yet larger armies, since men in millions were at his
command. Then he would return and destroy Egypt when perchance there were no
Ethiopians to help her, and perhaps after all drag Amada to his House of Women.
See, they were breaking through and already I was far away with a wound in my
breast, a hurt leg and a shattered sword.
What could I do? My arrows were spent and the bearers had none left to give me.
No, there was one still in the quiver. I drew it out. On its shaft were two
black feathers and one white. Who had spoken of that arrow? I remembered,
Tanofir. I was to think of certain things that he had said when I noted what it
pierced. I unslung my bow, strung it and set that arrow on the string.
By now the Great King was far away, out of reach for most archers. His chariot
forging ahead amidst the remnant of his guards and the nobles who attended on
his sacred person, travelled over a little rise where doubtless once there had
been a village, long since rotted down to its parent clay. The sunlight glinted
on his shining armour and silken robe, whereof the back was toward me.
I aimed, I drew, I loosed! Swift and far the shaft sped forward. By Osiris! it
struck him full between the shoulders, and lo! the King of kings, the Monarch
of the World, lurched forward, fell on to the rail of his chariot, and rolled
to the ground. Next instant there arose a roar of, “The King is dead! The
Great King is dead! Fly, fly, fly!”
So they fled and after them thundered the pursuers slaying and slaying till
they could lift their arms no more. Oh! yes, some escaped though the men of
Thebes and country folk murdered many of them and but a few ever won back to
the East to tell the tale of the blotting out of the mighty army of the King of
kings and of the doom dealt to him by the great black bow of Shabaka the
Egyptian.
I stood there gasping, when suddenly I heard a voice at my side. It said,
“You seem to have done very well, Brother, even better than we did yonder
on the other side of the town, though some might think that fray a thing
whereof to make a song. Also that last shot of yours was worthy of a good
archer, for I marked it, I marked it. A great lord was laid low thereby. Let us
go and see who it was.”
I threw my arm round the bull neck of Bes and leaning on him, advanced to where
the King lay alone save for the fallen about him.
“This man is not yet sped,” said Bes. “Let us look upon his
face,” and he turned him over, and stretched him there upon the sand with
the arrow standing two spans beyond his corselet.
“Why,” said Bes, “this is a certain High one with whom we had
dealings in the East!” and he laughed thickly.
Then the Great King opened his eyes and knew us and on his dying features came
a look of hate.
“So you have conquered, Egyptian,” he said. “Oh! if only I
had you again in the East, whence in my folly I let you go——”
“You would set me in your boat, would you not, whence by the wisdom of
Bes I escaped.”
“More than that,” he gasped.
“I shall not serve you so,” I went on. “I shall leave you to
die as a warrior should upon a fair fought field. But learn, tyrant and
murderer, that the shaft which overthrew you came from the black bow you
coveted and thought you had received, and that this hand loosed it—not at
hazard.”
“I guessed it,” he whispered.
“Know, too, King, that the lady Amada whom you also coveted, waits to be
my wife; that your mighty army is destroyed, and that Egypt is free by the
hands of Shabaka the Egyptian and Bes the dwarf.”
“Shabaka the Egyptian,” he muttered, “whom I held and let go
because of a dream and for policy. So, Shabaka, you will wed Amada whom I
desired because I could not take her, and doubtless you will rule in Egypt, for
Pharaoh, I think, is as I am to-day. O Shabaka, you are strong and a great
warrior, but there is something stronger than you in the world—that which
men call Fate. Such success as yours offends the gods. Look on me, Shabaka,
look on the King of kings, the Ruler of the earth, lying shamed in the dust
before you, and, accursed Shabaka! do not call yourself happy until you see
death as near as I do now.”
Then he threw his arms wide and died.
We called to soldiers to bear his body and having set the pursuit, with that
royal clay entered into Amada in triumph. It was not a very great town and the
temple was its finest building and thither we wended. In the outer court we
found Pharaoh lying at the point of death, for from many wounds his life
drained out with his flowing blood, nor could the leeches help him.
“Greeting, Shabaka,” he said, “you and the Ethiopians have
saved Egypt. My son is slain in the battle and I too am slain, and who remains
to rule her save you, you and Amada? Would that you had married her at once,
and never left my side. But she was foolish and headstrong and I—was
jealous of you, Shabaka. Forgive me, and farewell.”
He spoke no more although he lived a little while.
Karema came from the inner court. She greeted her husband, then turned and
said,
“Lord Shabaka, one waits to welcome you.”
I rested myself upon her shoulder, for I could not walk alone.
“What happened to the army of the Karoon?” I asked as we went
slowly.
“That happened, Lord, which the holy Tanofir foretold. The Easterns
attacked across the swamp, thinking to bear us down by numbers. But the paths
were too narrow and their columns were bogged in the mud. Still they struggled
on against the arrows to its edge and there the Ethiopians fell on them and
being lighter-footed and without armour, had the mastery of them, who were
encumbered by their very multitude. Oh! I saw it all from the temple top. Bes
did well and I am proud of him, as I am proud of you.”
“It is of the Ethiopians that you should be proud, Karema, since with one
to five they have won a great battle.”
We came to the end of the second court where was a sanctuary.
“Enter,” said Karema and fell back.
I did so and though the cedar door was left a little ajar, at first could see
nothing because of the gloom of the place. By degrees my eyes grew accustomed
to the darkness and I perceived an alabaster statue of the goddess Isis of the
size of life, who held in her arms an ivory child, also lifesize. Then I heard
a sigh and, looking down, saw a woman clad in white kneeling at the feet of the
statue, lost in prayer. Suddenly she rose and turned and the ray of light from
the door ajar fell upon her. It was Amada draped only in the transparent robe
of a priestess, and oh! she was beautiful beyond imagining, so beautiful that
my heart stood still.
She saw me in my battered mail and the blood flowed up to her breast and brow
and in her eyes there came a light such as I had never known in them before,
the light that is lit only by the torch of woman’s love. Yes, no longer
were hers the eyes of a priestess; they were the eyes of a woman who burns with
mortal passion.
“Amada,” I whispered, “Amada found at last.”
“Shabaka,” she whispered back, “returned at last, to me, your
home,” and she stretched out her arms toward me.
But before I could take her into mine, she uttered a little cry and shrank
away.
“Oh! not here,” she said, “not here in the presence of this
Holy One who watches all that passes in heaven and earth.”
“Then perchance, Amada, she has watched the freeing of Egypt on yonder
field to-day, and knows for whose sake it was done.”
“Hearken, Shabaka. I am your guerdon. Moreover as a woman I am yours.
There is naught I desire so much as to feel your kiss upon me. For it and it
alone I am ready to risk my spirit’s death and torment. But for you I
fear. Twice have I sworn myself to this goddess and she is very jealous of
those who rob her of her votaries. I fear that her curse will fall not only on
me, but on you also, and not only for this life but for all lives that may be
given to us. For your own sake, I pray you leave me. I hear that Pharaoh my
uncle is dead or dying, and doubtless they will offer you the throne. Take it,
Shabaka, for in it I ask no share. Take it and leave me to serve the goddess
till my death.”
“I too serve a goddess,” I answered hoarsely, “and she is
named Love, and you are her priestess. Little I care for Isis who serve the
goddess Love. Come, kiss me here and now, ere perchance I die. Kiss me who have
waited long enough, and so let us be wed.”
One moment she paused, swaying in the wind of passion, like a tall reed on the
banks of Nile, and then, ah! then she sank upon my breast and pressed her lips
against my own.
AND AFTER
For a few moments I, Shabaka, seemed to be lost in a kind of delirium and
surrounded by a rose-hued mist. Then I, Allan Quatermain, heard a sharp quick
sound as of a clock striking, and looked up. It was a clock, a beautiful old
clock on a mantelpiece opposite to me and the hands showed that it had just
struck the hour of ten.
Now I remembered that centuries ago, as I was dropping asleep, I did not know
why, I had seen that clock and those hands in the same position and known that
it was striking the second stroke of ten. Oh! what did it all mean? Had
thousands of years gone by or—only eight seconds?
There was a weight upon my shoulder. I glanced round to see what it was and
discovered the beautiful head of Lady Ragnall who was sweetly sleeping there.
Lady Ragnall! and in that very strange dream which I had dreamed she was the
priestess called Amada. Look, there was the mark of the new moon above her
breast. And not a second ago I had been in a shrine with Amada dressed as Lady
Ragnall was to-night, in circumstances so intimate that it made me blush to
think of them. Lady Ragnall! Amada!—Amada! Lady Ragnall! A shrine! A
boudoir! Oh! I must be going mad!
I could not disturb her, it would have been—well, unseemly. So I,
Shabaka, or Allan Quatermain, just sat still feeling curiously comfortable, and
tried to piece things together, when suddenly Amada—I mean Lady Ragnall
woke.
“I wonder,” she said without lifting her head from my shoulder,
“what happened to the holy Tanofir. I think that I heard him outside the
shine giving directions for the digging of Pharaoh’s grave at that spot,
and saying that he must do so at once as his time was very short. Yes, and I
wished that he would go away. Oh! my goodness!” she exclaimed, and
suddenly sprang up.
I too rose and we stood facing each other.
Between us, in front of the fire stood the tripod and the bowl of black stone
at the bottom of which lay a pinch of white ashes, the remains of the
Taduki. We stared at it and at each other.
“Oh! where have we been, Shaba—I mean, Mr. Quatermain?” she
gasped, looking at me round-eyed.
“I don’t know,” I answered confusedly. “To the East I
suppose. That is—it was all a dream.”
“A dream!” she said. “What nonsense! Tell me, were you or
were you not in a sanctuary just now with me before the statue of Isis, the
same that fell on George two years ago and killed him, and did you or did you
not give me a necklace of wonderful rosy pearls which we put upon the neck of
the statue as a peace-offering because I had broken my vows to the
goddess—those that you won from the Great King?”
“No,” I answered triumphantly, “I did nothing of the sort. Is
it likely that I should have taken those priceless pearls into battle? I gave
them to Karema to keep after my mother returned them to me on her death-bed; I
remember it distinctly.”
“Yes, and Karema handed them to me again as your love-token when she
appeared in the city with the holy Tanofir, and what was more welcome at the
moment—something to eat. For we were near starving, you know. Well, I
threw them over your neck and my own in the shrine to be the symbol of our
eternal union. But afterwards we thought that it might be wise to offer them to
the goddess—to appease her, you know. Oh! how dared we plight our mortal
troth there in her very shrine and presence, and I her twice-sworn servant? It
was insult heaped on sacrilege.”
“At a guess, because love is stronger than fear,” I replied.
“But it seems that you dreamed a little longer than I did. So perhaps you
can tell me what happened afterwards. I only got as far as—well, I forget
how far I got,” I added, for at that moment full memory returned and I
could not go on.
She blushed to her eyes and grew disturbed.
“It is all mixed up in my mind too,” she exclaimed. “I can
only remember something rather absurd—and affectionate. You know what
strange things dreams are.”
“I thought you said it wasn’t a dream.”
“Really I don’t know what it was. But—your wound
doesn’t hurt you, does it? You were bleeding a good deal. It stained me
here,” and she touched her breast and looked down wonderingly at her
sacred, ancient robe as though she expected to see that it was red.
“As there is no stain now it must have been a dream. But my word!
that was a battle,” I answered.
“Yes, I watched it from the pylon top, and oh! it was glorious. Do you
remember the charge of the Ethiopians against the Immortals? Why of course you
must as you led it. And then the fall of Pharaoh Peroa—he was George, you
know. And the death of the Great King, killed by your black bow; you were a
wonderful shot even then, you see. And the burning of the ships, how they
blazed! And—a hundred other things.”
“Yes,” I said, “it came off. The holy Tanofir was a good
strategist—or his Cup was, I don’t know which.”
“And you were a good general, and so for the matter of that was Bes. Oh!
what agonies I went through while the fight hung doubtful. My heart was on
fire, yes, I seemed to burn for——” and she stopped.
“For whom?” I asked.
“For Egypt of course, and when, reflected in the alabaster, I saw you
enter that shrine, where you remember I was praying for your success—and
safety, I nearly died of joy. For you know I had been, well, attached to
you—to Shabaka, I mean—all the time—that’s my part of
the story which I daresay you did not see. Although I seemed so cold and
wayward I could love, yes, in that life I knew how to love. And Shabaka looked,
oh! a hero with his rent mail and the glory of triumph in his eyes. He was very
handsome, too, in his way. But what nonsense I am talking.”
“Yes, great nonsense. Still, I wish we were sure how it ended. It is a
pity that you forget, for I am crazed with curiosity. I suppose there is no
more Taduki, is there?”
“Not a scrap,” she answered firmly, “and if there were it
would be fatal to take it twice on the same day. We have learned all there is
to learn. Perhaps it is as well, though I should like to know what happened
after our—our marriage.”
“So we were married, were we?”
“I mean,” she went on ignoring my remark, “whether you ruled
long in Egypt. For you, or rather Shabaka, did rule. Also whether the Easterns
returned and drove us out, or what. You see the Ivory Child went away somehow,
for we found it again in Kendah Land only a few years ago.”
“Perhaps we retired to Ethiopia,” I suggested, “and the
worship of the Child continued in some part of that country after the Ethiopian
kingdom passed away.”
“Perhaps, only I don’t think Karema would ever have gone back to
Ethiopia unless she was obliged. You remember how she hated the place. No, not
even to see those black children of hers. Well, as we can never tell, it is no
use speculating.”
“I thought there was more Taduki,” I remarked sadly.
“I am sure I saw some in the coffer.”
“Not one bit,” she answered still more firmly than before, and,
stretching out her hand, she shut down the lid of the coffer before I could
look into it. “It may be best so, for as it stands the story had a happy
ending and I don’t want to learn, oh! I don’t want to learn how the
curse of Isis fell on you and me.”
“So you believe in that?”
“Yes, I do,” she answered with passion, “and what is more, I
believe it is working still, which perhaps is why we have all come down in the
world, you and I and George and Hans, yes, and even old Harût whom we knew in
Kendah Land, who, I think, was the holy Tanofir. For as surely as I live I
know beyond possibility of doubt that whatever we may be called to-day,
you were the General Shabaka and I was the priestess Amada, Royal Lady of
Egypt, and between us and about us the curse of Isis wavers like a sword. That
is why George was killed and that is why—but I feel very tired, I think I
had better go to bed.”
As I recall that I have explained, I was obliged to leave Ragnall Castle early
the next morning to keep a shooting engagement. O heavens! to keep a shooting
engagement!
But whatever Amada, I mean Lady Ragnall, said, there was plenty more
Taduki, as I have good reason to know.
ALLAN QUATERMAIN.
Featured Books

Taboo
James Branch Cabell
knowledgment, which may now, I think, betendered most appropriately by inscribing upon the dedicatio...

Natural History of the Salamander, Aneides hardii
Richard F. Johnston and G. A. Schad
eastern slope of Sierra Blanca,1.5 miles southwest of Monjeau Lookout, at about 9000 feet, LincolnC...

Birds, Illustrated by Color Photography, Vol. 2, No. 6
Various
timely deatheclipsed to some extent, possiblywholly, the conclusion of a series ofbird biographies w...

Birds, Illustrated by Color Photography, Vol. 1, No. 3
Various
o tell them to comeout of their warm winter cradles.I am of the same blue color asthe violet that sh...

The Gifts of Asti
Andre Norton
ls of Memphir were young, Asti had lived among men below. But in therichness and softness which was ...

Making His Way; Or, Frank Courtney's Struggle Upward
Jr. Horatio Alger
r from Mr. TarboxXXXII. Mr. Percival's ProposalXXXIII. Preparing for a JourneyXXXIV. Frank R...

A Knight of the White Cross: A Tale of the Siege of Rhodes
G. A. Henty
DS, The order of the Knights of St. John, which for some centuries played a very impor...

The Diary of a Nobody
George Grossmith and Weedon Grossmith
he front door, thereby taking her from herwork. We have a nice little back garden which runs down to...
Browse by Category
Join Our Literary Community
Subscribe to our newsletter for exclusive book recommendations, author interviews, and upcoming releases.
Comments on "The Ancient Allan" :